# Account streaming
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/account-streaming

Receive every order, fill, position, and balance change on your accounts over one authenticated WebSocket.

## Connect

The account stream pushes changes on your challenge accounts as they happen,
so a mirror or trade copier does not need to poll the REST API. One socket
covers every account your API key can reach.

| Environment | URL |
| - | - |
| Live | `wss://account-stream.myfundedperpetuals.com/v1/stream` |
| Sandbox | `wss://account-stream.myfundedperpetuals.com/v1/sandbox/stream` |

Send your API key as a Bearer token in the `Authorization` header of the
WebSocket upgrade request. Read-only and read-and-trade keys both work. Live
keys (`fp_live_`) connect only to the live URL and test keys (`fp_test_`) only
to the sandbox URL. A key restricted to specific accounts streams only those
accounts. MCP sessions cannot open the stream.

A rejected upgrade returns an HTTP status with a JSON body in the same
`{"error":{"code","message"}}` shape as the REST API:

| Status | Meaning |
| - | - |
| `401` | Missing, invalid, revoked, or expired credential, or a key for the other environment. |
| `403` | `sandbox_access_expired`: sandbox access requires a challenge purchase in the last 90 days. |
| `429` | Too many sockets from your address or for this key. Wait for `Retry-After` and back off. |
| `503` | The service is restarting or at capacity. Retry after `Retry-After` with jitter. |

> [tab] TypeScript (Node)
>
> ```ts theme={null}
> import WebSocket from "ws";
>
> const socket = new WebSocket(
>   "wss://account-stream.myfundedperpetuals.com/v1/stream",
>   { headers: { Authorization: `Bearer ${process.env.FP_API_KEY}` } },
> );
> socket.on("message", (data) => {
>   const frame = JSON.parse(String(data));
>   if (frame.type === "heartbeat") return;
>   console.log(frame.seq, frame.type, frame.event ?? "", frame.account_id ?? "");
> });
> socket.on("close", (code, reason) =>
>   console.log("closed", code, String(reason)),
> );
> ```

> [tab] Python
>
> ```python theme={null}
> import asyncio, json, os
> import websockets
>
> async def main():
>     async with websockets.connect(
>         "wss://account-stream.myfundedperpetuals.com/v1/stream",
>         additional_headers={"Authorization": f"Bearer {os.environ['FP_API_KEY']}"},
>     ) as socket:
>         async for message in socket:
>             frame = json.loads(message)
>             if frame["type"] != "heartbeat":
>                 print(frame.get("seq"), frame["type"], frame.get("event"), frame.get("account_id"))
>
> asyncio.run(main())
> ```

## Snapshot first, then events

Every frame is one JSON object. The server speaks first:

1. `hello` with your `stream_id`, the `environment`, and the heartbeat interval.
2. One `snapshot` per account: the account, its working orders, and its open
   positions.
3. `snapshot_end` once every account's snapshot has been sent.
4. Events, in the order they were observed.

Treat each snapshot as the complete current state of that account. Events for
an account are never sent before its snapshot. When the key gains access to a
new account (for example, a new challenge purchase on a key without an account
allowlist), its `snapshot` arrives with `"reason":"added"`. When an account
leaves the key's reach (for example, it is archived), you receive
`{"type":"account","event":"removed"}`.

A `snapshot` can also arrive later with `"reason":"resync"`. The server sends
one when it cannot determine how an order or position left an account's
working set. Replace that account's orders and positions with the snapshot,
exactly as on connect.

Every snapshot includes `latest_fill`, the account's newest fill
(`{"id","settled_at"}`, or `null` before its first fill).

Orders, positions, and accounts use exactly the JSON objects the
[REST API](/api-reference) returns, so the same parsing applies to both. Every
event carries the full object, including your `client_order_id`.

## Events

| `type` | `event` | Payload | When |
| - | - | - | - |
| `order` | `created` | `order` | A new working order (resting or executing). |
| `order` | `edited` | `order` | A working order changed: price, size, attached TP/SL, or its state. |
| `order` | `triggered` | `order` | A stop or take order's trigger fired and it began executing. |
| `order` | `partially_filled` | `order` | Part of the order filled. Limit orders normally fill in full. |
| `order` | `filled` | `order` | The order filled. Its `fill` event comes first. |
| `order` | `canceled` | `order` | The order was canceled. See `cancel_reason`. |
| `order` | `rejected` | `order` | The order was rejected. See `reject_reason` and `reject_rule_id`. |
| `order` | `expired` | `order` | A GTD order reached its expiry time, or an order could not execute. |
| `fill` | none | `fill` | One execution. See the fill fields below. |
| `position` | `opened` | `position` | A new position. |
| `position` | `changed` | `position` | Size, entry price, margin, or other position fields changed. |
| `position` | `closed` | `position` | The position closed. See `close_reason`. |
| `account` | `updated` | `account` | Balance, status, or lockout changed. `changes` lists the changed fields. |
| `account` | `removed` | none | The account is no longer reachable with this key. |
| `price_alert` | `triggered` | `alert` | One of your price alerts fired. See [Price alerts](#price-alerts). |

Every event also has `seq` and `time` (when the service observed the change,
in epoch milliseconds). Account, order, fill, and position events also have
`account_id`.

An order that is placed and finishes before the stream observes it working,
such as a market order that fills immediately, produces its `fill` and
`filled` (or `rejected`) events without a preceding `created` event. Several
changes to one working order in quick succession can arrive as a single
`edited` event carrying the latest state.

### Fills

A fill is one execution. Its `id` is unique and matches the `id` of the same
fill in `GET /v1/fills`, so streamed and fetched fills reconcile directly.

| Field | Meaning |
| - | - |
| `id` | Unique fill identifier. |
| `order_id` | The order this fill belongs to. |
| `client_order_id` | Your order identifier, when you supplied one. |
| `price`, `size` | Execution price and size in base-asset units. |
| `notional`, `fee` | Fill value and trading fee in USD. |
| `realized_pnl` | Realized profit or loss on the reduced portion, before fees. |
| `time` | Execution time in epoch milliseconds. |
| `position_side_after` | `long`, `short`, or `flat`: the position in this market after the fill. |
| `position_size_after` | The position size in base-asset units after the fill. `0` when flat. |
| `side`, `order_type` | `buy` or `sell`, and the order type that executed. |
| `market_id`, `symbol` | The market, as returned by `/v1/markets`. |

### Accounts

`account` events carry the account object plus `locked_out`, which is `true`
while a trader lockout blocks new trading. `changes` lists every field that
changed, for example `["balance"]` after a fill, or a list including
`status` when a challenge passes, fails, or closes. `balance` is the realized balance;
request `GET /v1/accounts/{account_id}` for equity and rule room.

### Price alerts

A `price_alert` event fires once each time one of your
[price alerts](/trading-with-api#price-alerts) triggers, including each fire
of a re-armed alert. Alerts belong to your user, so every key you own
receives them, including keys limited to certain accounts.

| Field | Meaning |
| - | - |
| `fire_id` | Unique per fire. Use it to deduplicate. |
| `alert_id` | The alert's `id`, as in `GET /v1/price-alerts/{id}`. |
| `alert` | The alert as it was when it fired: `id`, `market_id`, `provider`, `symbol`, `coin`, `price`, `condition`, `note`, `price_source`, `trigger_price`, `triggered_at`, and `status` `triggered`. |

The event is sent even if the alert was re-armed, edited, or deleted right
after it fired.

Price alerts are not part of the snapshot. A stream receives the fires from
when it connects, and can include one from up to 10 seconds earlier, so
deduplicate by `fire_id`. On a fresh connection with `since`, fires after
`since` are replayed after `snapshot_end`. For a longer gap, list
`GET /v1/price-alerts`: triggered alerts show `triggered_at`, but an alert
re-armed since it fired shows only its current state.

## Take-profit and stop-loss links

Attached take-profit and stop-loss orders are linked in both directions. When
an entry with attached exits fills, you receive the entry's `fill` and
`filled` events, then a `created` event for each exit order. Each exit names
its entry in `parent_order_id` and its role in `bracket_role` (`take_profit`
or `stop_loss`). The filled entry names them in `take_profit_order_id` and
`stop_loss_order_id`. Changing an entry's attached exit prices before it fills
produces an `edited` event on the entry; changing an exit after the fill
produces an `edited` event on that exit.

## Cancel and close reasons

Canceled orders carry `cancel_reason`: `user`, `oco`, `reduce_only`,
`replaced`, `liquidation`, `expired`, `account_closed`, `trading_restricted`,
`venue_policy`, or `copy`. Closed positions carry `close_reason`: `user`,
`take_profit`, `stop_loss`, `liquidation`, `reversal`, or `system`. See
[Trading with the API](/trading-with-api#reconcile-conditional-orders-and-scheduled-history)
for each value. Treat an unknown value as a generic cancellation or close.

## Sequence numbers and resume

`seq` increases by one on every snapshot and event frame of a stream, starting
at 1. `hello`, `heartbeat`, `pong`, `notice`, and `error` frames have no
`seq`. Store the last `seq` you processed and the `time` of the last frame
you processed that has one (heartbeats included).

To recover after a disconnect, reconnect with all three:

```text theme={null}
wss://account-stream.myfundedperpetuals.com/v1/stream?resume=<stream_id>&last_seq=<seq>&since=<time>
```

* If the server still holds your stream (for about 60 seconds after the
  disconnect), `hello` reports `"resumed":true` and you receive every frame
  after `last_seq`, with no new snapshot.
* Otherwise, for example after a service restart or deploy, `hello` reports
  `"resumed":false` with a new `stream_id`. Each account's snapshot follows,
  and right after it the fills, filled, canceled, rejected, and expired orders,
  and closed positions since `since`, each flagged `"replay":true`. Replace
  your local state with the snapshot; use the replayed events to record what
  happened while you were away. Price alerts that fired since `since` follow
  `snapshot_end`. Replayed events can repeat ones you already processed just
  before the disconnect: deduplicate by `id` (`fire_id` for price alerts).

`snapshot_end` then reports `replay.complete`. Replay reaches back about 100
seconds. If `complete` is `false` (you were away longer, or
`incomplete_accounts` lists an account), or you connected without `since`,
compare each snapshot's `latest_fill.id` with the last fill you processed for
that account. If they differ, request `GET /v1/fills` for the account (newest
first) and page until you reach your last processed fill. An order you held as
working that is missing from the snapshot and from the replay ended while you
were away: `GET /v1/orders/{order_id}` returns its outcome.

## Keepalive and closing

The server sends `{"type":"heartbeat"}` every 15 seconds and a WebSocket ping
every 20 seconds. A heartbeat with `"upstream_connected":false` means the
service is reconnecting to its data source and events may be delayed; they
resume automatically, and nothing that finished in the meantime is skipped.
A socket that stops answering for 60 seconds is closed. To measure latency,
send `{"op":"ping","id":1}`; the server replies with
`{"type":"pong","id":1,"time":...}`. No other client messages are needed.

Watch for silence on your side too: if no frame of any kind arrives for 45
seconds, treat the connection as dead even if your WebSocket library still
reports it open. Close it and reconnect with `resume`, `last_seq`, and `since`
as described above. Network paths can drop a connection without delivering a
close, and only this check catches that.

| Close code | Meaning and action |
| - | - |
| `1012` | The service is restarting. It first sends `{"type":"reconnect"}`. Reconnect now. |
| `1011` | The snapshot could not be assembled in time. Reconnect with backoff. |
| `4001` | The key was revoked, its session expired, or sandbox access lapsed. Do not retry the key. |
| `4008` | Your client read too slowly and too many frames queued. Reconnect for a fresh snapshot. |
| `4013` | The service is at capacity. Reconnect with exponential backoff and jitter. |

An `error` frame with a `code` and `message` precedes `4001`, `4013`, and
`1011` closes. A `notice` frame with `code` `accounts_truncated` means the key
reaches more accounts than one stream follows; create a key with an account
allowlist instead.

## Limits

* Open one socket per key: it already covers all of the key's accounts. A key
  may hold up to 8 sockets.
* One address may hold about a thousand sockets, which suits a service that
  streams many customers' keys from one server. Reconnect with jitter after a
  restart instead of all at once.
* The stream reports changes; it does not accept orders. Place and manage
  orders through the [REST API](/trading-with-api).


# API capabilities
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-capabilities

Compare the public REST API and MCP tools with the trading website.

> [!WARNING]
>
> The developer API is in beta. Breaking changes may be introduced at any time.

## Trading coverage

The public API can place and manage trades on existing challenge accounts.
It uses the website's paper execution engine and server-side trading rules.
It does not expose every website feature.

| Capability | Public API support |
| - | - |
| Account selection | List non-archived accounts accessible to the credential and read an account's risk snapshot. |
| Market discovery | List execution markets (optionally with alternate venues), inspect a market's availability, and request a quote with a size estimate. |
| Standard orders | Market, limit, chase, stop-market, stop-limit, take-market, take-limit, take-profit, and external conditional orders. |
| Limit instructions | IOC, FOK, and GTD; omit time in force for GTC. |
| Entry protection | Attached TP/SL on market and non-reduce-only limit, stop, and take entries. |
| Order lifecycle | Read working orders and paginated history; modify supported working orders, cancel, and update attached exits. |
| Position lifecycle | Read open and closed positions; close fully or partially using market, limit, or external conditional orders. |
| Protective exits | Batch TP/SL placement, modification, cancellation, and OCO pairing, including price-capped exits. |
| Margin | Supply leverage and margin mode when placing orders; add or remove extra isolated margin by setting its target total. |
| Execution strategies | Create, inspect, and cancel TWAP, VWAP, and scaled ladders. Use the documented status filters when listing strategy parents. |
| Account-wide actions | Resumable cancel-all ordinary orders and close-all positions. Strategy parents require separate cancellation. |
| Reconciliation | Order IDs, caller-assigned IDs for ordinary and close orders, paginated fills, and partial-fill lineage. |
| Copy trading | List, save, and disable copy-trading groups whose members the credential can access, and acknowledge a completed copy stop. |
| Trading policy | Read an account's effective rules, trading limits, restrictions, payout and copy locks, and trading halts. |
| Price alerts | Create, list, move, re-arm, and delete chart price alerts. Read scope is enough; alerts notify and never trade. |
| Account events | A [WebSocket stream](/account-streaming) of order, fill, position, and balance changes across the key's accounts, plus price alert fires. |

See [Trading with the API](/trading-with-api) for behavior and examples and the
[REST reference](/api-reference) for request and response fields.

## Features that require the website

The public REST contract has no endpoints for these website capabilities:

* Signup and onboarding, challenge purchases, identity verification, agreements,
  payout requests, and billing or purchase-history management.
* API-key creation and management or sandbox-account creation and reset.
* Saved trading preferences, watchlists, and notifications.
* Journal notes and tags, performance dashboards, and account equity-history charts.

Existing copy-trading configurations still apply when an API request trades a
lead account. Inspect those groups through the API or on the website before
running an automated strategy. The API lists only groups whose lead and every
follower your credential can access, and saving never changes groups it does
not list. Followers remain subject to the same manual-trading restrictions as
in the terminal.

Browser-internal connections are not an API-key subscription contract.
REST reads return snapshots; for pushed changes on your accounts, use the
[account stream](/account-streaming) instead of polling. Use bounded
reconciliation and respect the
[shared request budgets](/errors-and-rate-limits#request-budgets).

## MCP and CLI coverage

The REST methods in the [MCP server](/mcp-server) and [CLI](/cli) are
derived from the REST specification. They do not add website capabilities
missing from REST.
MCP exposes the REST read and trading operations as tools. The REST
specification also contains two CLI authentication endpoints that MCP does not
expose as tools. Consult the endpoint reference for the currently available
fields and filters.

Live MCP access uses browser OAuth. Direct REST calls use an API key, while
CLI login can create a browser-approved session. Sandbox MCP calls accept a
test API key. See [Authentication](/authentication) and [Sandbox](/sandbox).


# API Reference
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-reference

The v1 REST API contract and interactive endpoint reference.

> [!WARNING]
>
> The developer API is in beta. Breaking changes may be introduced at any time.

All endpoints use the base URL below. Except for API information, the
tradable-market catalog, and the restricted-country list, requests require a
Bearer API key.

```text theme={null}
https://developers.myfundedperpetuals.com/v1
```

Use the endpoint pages in this section for parameters, schemas, examples, and
the interactive request builder. The downloadable OpenAPI 3.1 specification is
available at [`/openapi.yaml`](/openapi.yaml).


# Acknowledge a completed copy stop
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-reference/accounts/acknowledge-a-completed-copy-stop

/openapi.yaml post /v1/accounts/{account_id}/acknowledge-copy-stop
Requires trade scope. Read copy_stop.stopped_at from the account trading-policy endpoint first; this survives deletion of the original group. Acknowledges only the exact completed stop timestamp. An outdated timestamp or cleanup still in progress makes this a no-op.

# Cancel all working orders
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-reference/accounts/cancel-all-working-orders

/openapi.yaml post /v1/accounts/{account_id}/cancel-all-orders
Takes one bounded snapshot of the account's ordinary resting orders and armed trigger orders, then cancels or queues cancellation for every target. In-flight market orders and TWAP, VWAP, or scaled parent orders are not included. Repeating the request with the same idempotency key resumes or replays the original snapshot.

# Close all open positions
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-reference/accounts/close-all-open-positions

/openapi.yaml post /v1/accounts/{account_id}/close-all-positions
Takes one bounded snapshot of every open position and submits one reduce-only market close for each target. Closes use the same 2.5% maximum-slippage policy as Close All in the trading terminal. The response reports each submitted or rejected child order. Repeating the request with the same idempotency key resumes or replays the original snapshot, even when positions have since closed.

# Disable a copy trading group
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-reference/accounts/disable-a-copy-trading-group

/openapi.yaml post /v1/copy-trading/{config_id}/disable
Requires trade scope and access to every group member. Stops new copying and schedules cleanup of outstanding copied orders. Existing filled positions remain open. Works when members are inactive or archived.

# Get a challenge account
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-reference/accounts/get-a-challenge-account

/openapi.yaml get /v1/accounts/{account_id}
Returns account identity, realized balance, and a fresh risk snapshot marked from authoritative book mids.

# Get effective account trading policy
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-reference/accounts/get-effective-account-trading-policy

/openapi.yaml get /v1/accounts/{account_id}/trading-policy
Returns an advisory snapshot of effective account rules, configured trading limits, user restrictions, payout and copy locks, and trading halts. Read scope is sufficient. Placement and settlement recheck authority; this snapshot does not reserve capacity or guarantee an order will pass.

# List challenge accounts
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-reference/accounts/list-challenge-accounts

/openapi.yaml get /v1/accounts
Returns the authenticated user's non-archived challenge accounts.

# List visible copy trading groups
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-reference/accounts/list-visible-copy-trading-groups

/openapi.yaml get /v1/copy-trading
Returns only groups whose lead and every follower are accessible to this credential in this environment, including stopped groups. Omitted groups are never modified by saving visible groups.

# Save copy trading groups
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-reference/accounts/save-copy-trading-groups

/openapi.yaml post /v1/copy-trading
Explicitly upserts submitted groups and deletes only deleted_config_ids. Requires trade scope and access to all existing and submitted members. Omitted groups remain unchanged. Disable a group before deleting it or changing its lead. New groups omit config_id; a retry without an existing config_id can create another disabled group, so read back state after an ambiguous response before retrying.

# Exchange a CLI authorization code
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-reference/authentication/exchange-a-cli-authorization-code

/openapi.yaml post /v1/auth/cli/token
Redeems a one-time authorization code approved in the browser during `fperp login`, together with its PKCE code verifier, for a new expiring CLI session credential. The credential is returned exactly once and authenticates like an API key with trade access to every owned account. Available on the live host only. The `fperp` CLI calls this endpoint itself; it is documented for transparency rather than direct use.

# Revoke the presented CLI session
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-reference/authentication/revoke-the-presented-cli-session

/openapi.yaml post /v1/auth/cli/revoke
Deletes the CLI session presented as the bearer credential (`fperp logout`). Only OAuth-minted CLI sessions can be revoked here; API keys are managed from account settings. Available on the live host only.

# List fills in settlement order
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-reference/fills/list-fills-in-settlement-order

/openapi.yaml get /v1/fills

# Get API information
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-reference/general/get-api-information

/openapi.yaml get /v1

# List restricted countries
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-reference/general/list-restricted-countries

/openapi.yaml get /v1/restricted-countries
Returns the ISO 3166-1 alpha-2 codes of every country whose residents cannot register or purchase challenges, sorted alphabetically. No API key is required. Responses are cached at the edge for five minutes, so a restriction added or removed by the compliance team can take up to that long to appear.

# Get a tradable market
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-reference/markets/get-a-tradable-market

/openapi.yaml get /v1/markets/{market_id}

# Get an execution quote
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-reference/markets/get-an-execution-quote

/openapi.yaml get /v1/markets/{market_id}/quote
Returns the best bid, best ask, and midpoint from a fresh authoritative execution book. Provide both side and size to walk the complete visible execution depth and estimate the fill, notional, and taker fee. The quote escalates to a newer deep book when the ordinary book is too shallow and the venue supports deeper execution data. URL-encode the pipe in a market ID when it is used in the path.

# List tradable markets
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-reference/markets/list-tradable-markets

/openapi.yaml get /v1/markets
Returns the default venue for each currently tradable instrument. With `venues=all`, also returns the alternate venues that accept new positions (`default_venue` false); an order trades an alternate venue by sending its `market_id`. An account holds an instrument on one venue at a time.

# Cancel a working order
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-reference/orders/cancel-a-working-order

/openapi.yaml delete /v1/orders/{order_id}
Cancels a resting order or queues cancellation for an armed order.

# Get an order
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-reference/orders/get-an-order

/openapi.yaml get /v1/orders/{order_id}

# List recent orders
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-reference/orders/list-recent-orders

/openapi.yaml get /v1/orders
Returns newest orders first with a bounded opaque cursor.

# Modify a working order
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-reference/orders/modify-a-working-order

/openapi.yaml patch /v1/orders/{order_id}
Reprices a modifiable order and optionally changes its size. A size is floored to the market's size step. A size change returns 409 while part of the order is executing; retry once that fill settles. On a partially filled order, size is the amount still left to fill.

# Place a standard or advanced order
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-reference/orders/place-a-standard-or-advanced-order

/openapi.yaml post /v1/orders
Places market, limit, chase, stop, take, take-profit, or external conditional orders through the authoritative paper-trading engine. The optional client_order_id and the idempotency key are committed transactionally with the order. Omit type for the original market-order behavior.

# Update TP/SL attached to a resting limit, stop, or take entry
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-reference/orders/update-tpsl-attached-to-a-resting-limit-stop-or-take-entry

/openapi.yaml put /v1/orders/{order_id}/attached-exits
Set a leg with a positive price or remove it with null.

# Atomically update position TP/SL orders
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-reference/positions/atomically-update-position-tpsl-orders

/openapi.yaml put /v1/positions/{position_id}/exit-orders
Applies a stale-snapshot-guarded batch of place, modify, and cancel operations. New opposite-group legs can be paired as OCO orders.

# Close part or all of a position
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-reference/positions/close-part-or-all-of-a-position

/openapi.yaml post /v1/positions/{position_id}/close
Resolves the current position side, leverage, and margin mode on the server and submits a reduce-only market, limit, or conditional order. Omit size to close the complete current position.

# Get a position
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-reference/positions/get-a-position

/openapi.yaml get /v1/positions/{position_id}

# List open positions
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-reference/positions/list-open-positions

/openapi.yaml get /v1/positions

# Set the position's extra isolated margin
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-reference/positions/set-the-positions-extra-isolated-margin

/openapi.yaml put /v1/positions/{position_id}/isolated-margin
Sets a desired total rather than applying a delta, making an identical retry safe. Reductions use a fresh authoritative book and reject when the new liquidation risk would be unsafe. On a copy-trading lead, the change is also applied to each follower's matching isolated position, scaled to its size; follower accounts cannot call this endpoint.

# Create a price alert
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-reference/price-alerts/create-a-price-alert

/openapi.yaml post /v1/price-alerts
Arms an alert that notifies once when the market's mark reaches `price`. The direction (`above` or `below`) is chosen from the current mark when the alert is created. A triggered alert sends the same notifications as one set on the chart, plus a `price_alert` event on the account stream. Alerts never place orders. Read scope is sufficient. A user may hold up to 25 armed alerts.

# Delete a price alert
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-reference/price-alerts/delete-a-price-alert

/openapi.yaml delete /v1/price-alerts/{alert_id}

# Get a price alert
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-reference/price-alerts/get-a-price-alert

/openapi.yaml get /v1/price-alerts/{alert_id}

# List price alerts
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-reference/price-alerts/list-price-alerts

/openapi.yaml get /v1/price-alerts
Returns the user's armed alerts plus up to 100 recent triggered and 100 recent disabled alerts, most recently changed first. Alerts belong to the user, so every API key of theirs sees the same alerts, including keys limited to certain accounts. Read scope is sufficient.

# Move an armed price alert
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-reference/price-alerts/move-an-armed-price-alert

/openapi.yaml patch /v1/price-alerts/{alert_id}
Changes an armed alert's price, note, or both. The direction is chosen again from the current mark. Triggered and disabled alerts cannot be edited; re-arm them instead.

# Re-arm a price alert
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-reference/price-alerts/re-arm-a-price-alert

/openapi.yaml post /v1/price-alerts/{alert_id}/rearm
Arms a triggered or disabled alert again at its stored price. The direction is chosen again from the current mark, so an alert that fired upward waits for the next cross in whichever direction now reaches its price. Counts toward the 25 armed alerts.

# Cancel a scaled order and its working rungs
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-reference/strategy-orders/cancel-a-scaled-order-and-its-working-rungs

/openapi.yaml delete /v1/scaled-orders/{scaled_order_id}

# Create a scaled price ladder
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-reference/strategy-orders/create-a-scaled-price-ladder

/openapi.yaml post /v1/scaled-orders

# Create a TWAP or VWAP order
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-reference/strategy-orders/create-a-twap-or-vwap-order

/openapi.yaml post /v1/twap-orders

# Get a scaled order and its rungs
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-reference/strategy-orders/get-a-scaled-order-and-its-rungs

/openapi.yaml get /v1/scaled-orders/{scaled_order_id}

# Get a TWAP or VWAP order
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-reference/strategy-orders/get-a-twap-or-vwap-order

/openapi.yaml get /v1/twap-orders/{twap_order_id}

# List active or historical TWAP and VWAP orders
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-reference/strategy-orders/list-active-or-historical-twap-and-vwap-orders

/openapi.yaml get /v1/twap-orders

# List scaled-order parents
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-reference/strategy-orders/list-scaled-order-parents

/openapi.yaml get /v1/scaled-orders

# Stop future TWAP or VWAP slices
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-reference/strategy-orders/stop-future-twap-or-vwap-slices

/openapi.yaml delete /v1/twap-orders/{twap_order_id}

# Authentication
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/authentication

Authenticate requests with a MyFundedPerps API key.

Send your API key in the HTTP `Authorization` header with the `Bearer` scheme:

```http theme={null}
Authorization: Bearer fp_live_...
```

Each API key has an access level and account boundary:

| Access level | Allowed requests |
| - | - |
| Read Only | Accounts, markets, quotes, positions, orders, and fills |
| Read And Trade | Read requests plus order and position changes |

Account access can cover every account you own or one selected challenge
account. Requests for an account outside the key's boundary return `404`, the
same response used for an account you do not own. Read-only keys receive `403`
when they attempt a trading request.

Copy trading follows the same account boundary. A lead order requires access to
its lead and every configured follower in the same environment. A key limited
to the lead account cannot place the lead trade while that copy group is
enabled. The request returns `404` with `account_not_found` before any order is
created; followers are never silently omitted. Use a key covering the complete
group or manage the trade on the website.

Modifications, cancellations, and protective-exit changes also require access
to every copied account they would affect. This includes outstanding copied
orders from a group that has since been disabled. A live key never grants
access to a sandbox follower, even when the website configuration includes it.

Keys created before scoped access was introduced retain read and trading access
to every owned account until they are revoked. The API information,
tradable-market catalog, and restricted-countries endpoints are public; account
state, quotes, positions, and orders require a key.

## Environments

Every key belongs to one environment, named by its prefix and served on its
own hostname:

| Environment | Key prefix | Base URL | Reaches |
| - | - | - | - |
| Live | `fp_live_` | `https://developers.myfundedperpetuals.com` | Your challenge accounts |
| Test | `fp_test_` | `https://sandbox.myfundedperpetuals.com` | Your sandbox accounts only |

A key presented on the other environment's host returns `401` with a message
naming the correct host. Test keys and sandbox accounts are covered in
[Sandbox and test keys](/sandbox).

## CLI sessions

The `fperp` command-line tool can sign in without a manually created API key.
Running `fperp login` opens your browser to an approval page; approving mints
an expiring CLI session credential that authenticates exactly like a live API
key with trading access to every account you own. The credential is stored in
your operating system keychain by default.

CLI sessions differ from API keys in three ways:

* They expire automatically 90 days after sign-in. An expired session returns
  `401` and `fperp login` mints a new one.
* `fperp logout` revokes the session server-side immediately.
* They exist only in the live environment. Use a test API key with
  `fperp login --api-key` for the sandbox host.

You can hold up to five CLI sessions at once (one per machine, for example);
signing in past that limit revokes the oldest session. On a remote or headless
machine, `fperp login --manual` shows a one-time code in the browser to paste
into the terminal instead of using a local callback.

## Keep keys server-side

API keys are long-lived credentials. Store them in a secret manager or an
encrypted environment registry. Do not commit a key, print it in logs, include
it in a URL, or ship it in frontend code.

Treat test keys with the same care: a leaked test key still exposes your
sandbox trading activity and consumes your request budgets.

## Rotate a key

Create a replacement key, update your client, confirm it can make an
authenticated read, and then revoke the old key in
[API Key Settings](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/settings?section=api-keys).
Revocation takes effect for new requests immediately; a request already in
flight may still finish.


# Command-Line Interface
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/cli

Install the fperp CLI, authenticate, trade from your terminal, and keep the tool up to date.

## What is fperp?

`fperp` is the official command-line client for the MyFundedPerps REST
API. Every API operation is available as a command with matching flags, so
anything you can do with `curl` against the API you can do with less typing:

```bash theme={null}
fperp list-accounts
fperp get-market-quote "binance|BTCUSDT" --side buy --size 0.5
fperp create-order --data @order.json
```

Run `fperp help` for the full command list and `fperp help <command>` for a
command's flags.

## Install

### macOS and Linux

```bash theme={null}
curl -fsSL https://cli.myfundedperpetuals.com/install | sh
```

The installer detects your platform, downloads the latest release, verifies
its checksum, and installs to `/usr/local/bin` when that directory is
writable, otherwise to `~/.local/bin`. It never asks for elevated privileges:
if the target directory is not writable it stops and tells you instead of
running `sudo` for you.

Optional environment variables, set before running the installer:

| Variable | Effect |
| - | - |
| `FPERP_VERSION` | Install a specific release, for example `v1.2.0` |
| `FPERP_INSTALL_DIR` | Install into a different directory |

### Windows

In PowerShell:

```powershell theme={null}
irm https://cli.myfundedperpetuals.com/install.ps1 | iex
```

The installer places `fperp.exe` in `%LOCALAPPDATA%\Programs\fperp` and adds
that directory to your user `PATH` (new terminals pick it up automatically).
Only x64 Windows builds are published.

### Verifying a download

Every release ships a `SHA256SUMS` file and an Ed25519 signature
(`SHA256SUMS.sig`) alongside its artifacts at
`https://cli.myfundedperpetuals.com/vX.Y.Z/`. The installers verify the
checksum of what they download, and `fperp upgrade` additionally verifies the
signature against a public key embedded in the binary, so a tampered release
is never installed.

## Authenticate

```bash theme={null}
fperp login
```

`fperp login` opens your browser to approve a new CLI session. After you
approve it, the CLI prints the session's expiry date and stores the
credential. The session expires on its own; run `fperp login` again to renew
it. Run `fperp login status` to see the current session.

On a remote or headless machine (for example over SSH), run
`fperp login --manual`. The CLI prints a sign-in link instead of waiting for
a browser on the same machine; open it anywhere, approve, and paste the code
the approval page shows.

To use a long-lived API key instead, create one in
[API Key Settings](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/settings?section=api-keys)
and run `fperp login --with-api-key`, which reads the key from stdin or a
prompt that does not echo it. `fperp login --api-key <key>` also works, but
leaves the key in your shell history.

Credentials are stored in your operating system's credential store (macOS
Keychain, Windows Credential Manager, or the Linux Secret Service). Where no
credential store is available, they fall back to a `0600` config file; see
`fperp login --help` for the `--store` options. `FPERP_API_KEY` and
`--api-key` on any other command override the stored credential for one-off
use.

`fperp logout` revokes a browser-approved session and removes the stored
credential.

## Stay up to date

```bash theme={null}
fperp upgrade
```

`fperp upgrade` downloads the latest release, verifies the signed checksums,
and replaces the binary in place. Use `fperp upgrade --check` to see whether a
newer version exists without installing it, and
`fperp upgrade --version vX.Y.Z` to install a specific release.

The CLI also checks for new releases in the background at most once per day
and prints a one-line notice on stderr when one exists. It never installs
anything on its own. To disable the check entirely, set
`FPERP_NO_UPDATE_CHECK=1`; the check is also skipped automatically when the
`CI` environment variable is set.

## Uninstall

Run `fperp logout` first so no credential stays behind in your OS credential
store, then remove the binary (`which fperp` shows where it is) and delete the
`~/.config/fperp` directory.


# Errors and Rate Limits
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/errors-and-rate-limits

Handle API errors, trading rejections, and request budgets.

Errors use a stable envelope:

```json theme={null}
{
  "error": {
    "code": "rate_limited",
    "message": "Rate limit exceeded for this IP address. Try again in 60 seconds.",
    "request_id": "b4ad5d8b-6e2c-4e44-915f-ff81956849e8"
  }
}
```

Keep `request_id` when contacting support; every response also carries the
same value in an `X-Request-Id` header. Trading-rule rejections may also
include `order_id`, `client_order_id`, `rule_id`, and structured `details`.

Validation failures (`400`) can include per-field `details`. Each entry names
the wire field that failed, using `body` for problems with the payload as a
whole. Other request errors may report only a code and message:

```json theme={null}
{
  "error": {
    "code": "invalid_order",
    "message": "One or more request fields are invalid.",
    "request_id": "b4ad5d8b-6e2c-4e44-915f-ff81956849e8",
    "details": [
      { "field": "size", "issue": "must be a number greater than zero" },
      { "field": "levrage", "issue": "is not a recognized field" }
    ]
  }
}
```

| Status | Meaning |
| - | - |
| `400` | The request shape, identifier, cursor, or idempotency key is invalid. |
| `401` | The API key or partner key is missing, invalid, revoked, or on the wrong host. |
| `403` | The key's access level does not allow this, or sandbox access has lapsed. |
| `404` | The requested account, market, order, or endpoint is unavailable to this key. |
| `405` | The endpoint does not support the requested HTTP method. |
| `409` | An idempotency key or client order ID conflicts, or a mutable snapshot is stale. |
| `413` | The JSON body exceeds 16 KiB. |
| `414` | The request URL is too long. |
| `415` | An order request is not sent as `application/json`. |
| `422` | The paper-trading engine rejected the order under a trading rule. |
| `429` | A rate budget is exhausted. Respect `Retry-After`. |
| `500` | An unexpected server failure. Retry, and report the `request_id` if it persists. |
| `503` | The API service or a fresh execution quote is temporarily unavailable. |

Saving copy groups can return `422` with code `copy_configuration_rejected`.
An account can belong to only one enabled group, including a group with an
unavailable member. Repeating the same save does not resolve that conflict.
Review [Copy Trading Settings](/settings/copy-trading#group-controls) before
changing membership or explicitly disabling a group.

Two environment-specific responses are worth handling explicitly. A `401` with
a message naming the other host means the key and hostname belong to different
environments; see [Sandbox and test keys](/sandbox). A `403` with the error
code `sandbox_access_expired` means the account's sandbox window lapsed; a new
challenge purchase restores it.

## Competition close

For up to six minutes after a [competition](/guides/competitions) ends, market
orders on a ranked competition account return `422` with code
`competition_finalization_pending` while its closing score is recorded. Retry
after a short wait. Stop-loss and take-profit orders stay armed and execute once
the window ends.

## Trader Lockout

A voluntary [Trader Lockout](/settings/trading#trader-lockout) applies to API
keys, bots, and copied trades as well as the trading terminal. Order attempts
on a locked account return `422` with code `account_trader_lockout_active` and
`details.expiresAt`, the unlock time as Unix milliseconds. Stop submitting
orders until that time; neither the API nor Support can remove the lock early.

Activation preserves existing positions, working orders, and accepted schedules.
Their execution, including stop-loss and take-profit exits, continues normally.
The lock rejects new orders, modifications, cancellations, and manually submitted
close orders until expiry. Positions remain exposed to losses and normal
liquidation rules. Trading becomes available automatically at expiry.

## Hourly opening limit

Each account can open or add to positions worth up to \$25,000,000 in order
value per market in any rolling hour. A reversal counts at its full order
value; reducing or closing is never limited. An order over the limit returns
`422` with code `rate_limit_hour` and `rule_id` `hourly-open-notional`. Its
`details` include:

| Field | Meaning |
| - | - |
| `availableUsd` | Order value that still fits in this market right now. |
| `capUsd` | The hourly limit in USD. |
| `retryAt` | When this order would fit, as Unix milliseconds. Omitted if it never can. |

Wait until `retryAt`, or reduce the order to `availableUsd` or less. A
`rate_limit_hour` rejection without that `rule_id` is the hourly order-count
limit instead.

## Request budgets

Each API host allows about 300 requests per minute from one source IP address.
The live and sandbox hosts count separately, and each Cloudflare location
counts on its own, so treat the figure as approximate. A request over the limit
returns `429` with a `Retry-After` header before it reaches the API. If the
limit cannot be checked, the request is refused with `503` and a `Retry-After`
header rather than let through; retry it after the delay.

A `429` from these request budgets uses the error code `rate_limited` and
carries headers you can read without parsing the message:

| Header | Value |
| - | - |
| `Retry-After` | Whole seconds to wait before retrying. |
| `X-RateLimit-Scope` | The budget that ran out: `ip`, `api_key`, or `partner` (see [Partner integrations](#partner-integrations)). |
| `X-RateLimit-Limit` | Requests per minute that budget allows, as an integer. |

Account-wide operation budgets, described below, send `Retry-After` but not the
two `X-RateLimit` headers. Responses do not report how much of a budget
remains, so pace requests below the limit rather than probing for it, and wait
for `Retry-After` after a `429`.

The limit is per address, not per API key. Several keys or bots sharing one
address share its allowance. Do not build a continuous terminal by polling
account, position, order, and quote endpoints every second. See
[API capabilities](/api-capabilities) and the endpoint reference when choosing
how to reconcile state.

### Partner integrations

Platforms that call the live API on behalf of many traders, such as copy-trading
services, can request a partner key from MyFundedPerps. A partner key begins
with `mfp_partner_` followed by the partner's name (for example
`mfp_partner_yourplatform_...`) and is sent in an `X-MFP-Partner-Key` header
beside the trader's own API key:

```bash theme={null}
curl https://developers.myfundedperpetuals.com/v1/accounts \
  -H "Authorization: Bearer $TRADER_API_KEY" \
  -H "X-MFP-Partner-Key: $PARTNER_KEY"
```

With a valid partner key, a trader-authenticated request is no longer counted
per source address, so one partner server can act for many traders. Instead it
counts against the partner's combined budget for all of its traffic and, for
most partners, a budget for each trader API key. MyFundedPerps sets both
budgets when it issues the key. Like the per-address limit, they are counted
separately at each Cloudflare location. After a `429`, `X-RateLimit-Scope`
is `api_key` when one trader's budget ran out and `partner` when the combined
budget did. The trader's
API key still decides which accounts the request can see and trade, and every
trading rule still applies; the partner key grants no access on its own.

A request with an unknown, malformed, or revoked partner key returns `401` with
the code `invalid_partner_key`. On requests without a live `fp_live_` trader
key, such as public market endpoints, and on the sandbox host, the header is
ignored and the ordinary per-address budget applies, so it is safe to send the
header on every request. Keep the partner key on your servers and never share
it with traders.

Orders also pass your account's trading rules, which may limit how many trades
you can place per minute, hour, or day. A rejected order returns `422` with the
rule that applied. A reduce-only order, such as a take profit or stop loss, is
never rejected by these limits when it triggers, but it still counts toward
them.

Account-wide cancel and close operations also share separate global budgets:

* Empty operation snapshots: 60/minute, burst 12.
* Planned work: 600 units/minute, burst 600. Each cancellation target reserves
  one unit; each close target reserves two.
* Advancing work: 600 units/minute, burst 50. A cancel slice consumes one unit
  per target (up to five); a close slice consumes two units.

Completed bulk-operation replays skip those bulk budgets but still count
toward the request budgets above. A capacity rejection returns `429`; wait for
`Retry-After` and resume with the same idempotency key.

Use exponential backoff with jitter for `429`, `500`, and `503`. Reuse the same
idempotency key when retrying a create or close request after an ambiguous
network or server failure.


# Affiliate Program
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/affiliate-program

Apply for affiliate access, set your code once, understand commission and attribution, climb the reward tiers, download promo graphics, buy and share giveaway codes, and get paid.

The affiliate program pays a commission on challenge purchases that use
your affiliate code at checkout. Everything below lives on the
[Affiliates page](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/affiliates), which is only
available to signed-in accounts.

## Get access

No account is an affiliate by default. There are two ways in:

1. **Apply.** Select **Start Application** on the Affiliates page to open the
   full form. You can view the overview without completing onboarding. If you
   have not completed onboarding, you will be asked to complete it first and
   then returned to the application. The team
   reviews every application by hand and notifies you on-site and by email
   when a decision is made.
2. **Team invitation.** The team can grant affiliate access directly. A direct
   grant skips the application and its eligibility requirements.

Use **Back to Overview** to return to the program introduction. Your answers
stay in the form while you remain on the page; refreshing or leaving the page
clears this unsent draft.

Select **Submit Application** to send your application. If anything is missing
or invalid, the form shows what to fix and takes you to the first item that
needs attention. Accept the Affiliate Terms beside the submit button before
sending. The button is unavailable only while your application is being sent.

### Eligibility

The application is reviewed against these requirements:

* at least 500 active followers or subscribers;
* a public, active platform with regular trading content;
* demonstrated expertise in trading;
* full disclosure of existing prop firm partnerships.

Applications from private accounts or accounts with no trading content are
declined. A declined applicant can submit a new application 30 days after the
decision; the page shows the exact date and any reason the team entered.

### What the application asks

| Field | Notes |
| - | - |
| Current Follower/Subscriber Count | Whole number, at least 500. |
| Existing Prop Firm Partnerships | Yes or No. Choosing Yes reveals a Partnership Details field for company names, partnership type, and duration. |
| Promotion strategy | How you promote. |
| Traffic plan | How you drive traffic to the platform. |
| Target audience | Who you reach. |
| Recent trading content | Links or descriptions. |
| Trading Platform Links | At least one public, active profile. Use the Add button in Social Links to add each platform and profile URL. |

> [!WARNING]
>
> All linked profiles must be public, active, and contain trading content.
> Private accounts are declined.

## Your affiliate code and link

After approval, the Affiliates page shows a placeholder code. Set your code
once from the Affiliate Code card. Codes use 2 to 32 letters, numbers,
underscores, or hyphens, must be unique across the platform, and pass a
profanity check. A few platform names are reserved, including the standing
checkout discount code PERPS.

To change a code you already set, use **Request Change**. The request queues
for review; your current code keeps working while the request is pending. If
the team declines the request, the reason it entered appears on the card.

Your link is `https://myfundedperpetuals.com/@YOURCODE`. Your Affiliate Code
card shows your code with copy-code and copy-link icons. Hover over an icon
or focus it with your keyboard to see its tooltip. **Copy Code** copies the
code for checkout; **Copy Link** copies the full referral URL to share.

If the team gives you a second code, it appears on your Affiliate Code card
with its own copy-code and copy-link icons. Both codes use your existing discount and
commission settings, and sales from both contribute to the same affiliate
account and reward tiers. Changing your primary code does not change your
second code. Contact the team to change or remove the second code.

Replaced or removed codes remain valid for attribution until they are removed
from your recent code history. Only your four most recently retired codes are
kept, so share the current codes using the buttons on your dashboard.

## Commission and attribution

* **Commission:** the rate shown on your Share & Earn tab applies to every
  attributed challenge purchase unless the team assigned you a custom first-order
  rate. That rate applies to each buyer's first successful purchase using your
  affiliate code, even if they previously bought without a code or used another
  affiliate's code. Later purchases using your code use your standard rate.
  Refunding the first purchase does not make a later purchase eligible again.
  The base rate is the same for every affiliate; the team can assign different
  standard and first-order rates to a specific affiliate.
* **Multi-account first orders:** when a first order buys several accounts,
  the first-order rate or promotion rate applies to one account, and the other
  accounts in that order earn your standard rate. For example, a first order of
  four accounts earns the first-order rate on one account and your standard
  rate on the other three. The order shows the combined rate.
* **Commission promotions:** the team may run a temporary commission
  promotion for every affiliate. While it runs, a buyer's first paid purchase
  on the platform earns 20%, whichever plan they buy, Elite included. Later
  purchases keep your normal rate. First purchase here means the buyer's first
  paid purchase with any code, affiliate, or plan, so a returning customer
  never qualifies for 20% by switching to your code. If your normal rate for a
  purchase is higher, you keep it. The rate is fixed when the buyer pays, and
  ending a promotion does not change commission you already earned. While a
  promotion runs, a **Boosted Commission** banner at the top of the Affiliates
  page shows the promotion rate; the banner disappears when the promotion
  ends.
* **Checkout credit:** your affiliate code must be applied to the completed
  purchase for a sale to count toward affiliate commission. Opening your
  `@CODE` link carries the selected code through browsing and sign-in to
  checkout, where it is applied automatically ahead of an older referral cookie.
  This selection works even when attribution cookies are unavailable. Before
  sign-in, checkout shows the selected code, and when your link set the
  referral cookie it also previews the discounted price. The code's
  eligibility and final price are still validated at payment. Buyers can
  also enter your code manually. Replacing it with another code or removing
  it earns you no commission. When the buyer came through your link and
  checked out without any affiliate code, the purchase still appears in your
  history as **Did Not Use Code** and counts toward your reward tiers. A
  purchase that uses another affiliate's code belongs to that affiliate.
* **First-purchase discount:** a buyer's first purchase with your code gets
  the larger of your standard customer discount and the platform's
  first-purchase discount: the larger of the one PERPS gives and the one on
  the code the homepage advertises, when it has one. Later purchases use your
  standard customer discount. A promotion on your code uses its own discount
  instead, except that a buyer's first purchase still gets the first-purchase
  discount when it is larger. The sale is credited to you either way.
* **Discount limit:** after their first purchase, a buyer gets a discount above
  20% on up to 3 orders in any 90 days, counting every code they use. Your code
  gives them 20% off once they have used all 3. The sale is still credited to
  you.
* **Referral link attribution:** last click wins. Clicking your link sets a cookie for the
  attribution window shown on your Share & Earn tab (30 days unless the
  team set a different window for you). If the visitor clicks another
  affiliate's link inside that window, the newer click replaces yours. There
  is no grace period or lockout. Attribution cookies still require consent
  where applicable. When there is no code selected in the URL, an active
  referral cookie supplies the checkout default and account-size discount
  preview. While your code is selected or your referral cookie is active, the
  homepage promo bar shows your code instead of the site-wide code. A cookie alone does not establish commission eligibility: the code
  must be applied to the completed purchase. Your link is saved with the
  purchase when checkout starts, so a buyer who removes your code is still
  recorded as **Did Not Use Code**. This also requires attribution cookies
  where consent applies.
* Paid orders show their order amount and calculated commission as **Pending**.
  The refund hold ends 48 hours after payment or when the purchased account
  executes its first trade, whichever comes first. For an order with several
  accounts, the first trade on any of them ends the hold, and commission is
  calculated on the whole order total. Unfilled or cancelled orders do not end
  the hold. Commission awaiting eligibility review remains pending
  until the review is complete.
* **Purchase emails:** when a purchase made with your code is credited to
  you, we email the address on your account with the commission amount, the
  code used, and a partially hidden email of the buyer. Each purchase sends
  one email while notifications are enabled, including repeat purchases by
  the same buyer. Historical purchases do not generate emails when their
  commission is corrected or approved. For new purchases, commission held
  for eligibility review is emailed once it is approved, and failed or
  abandoned checkouts send nothing. "Earned" means the commission is recorded
  on your affiliate balance, not that it has been paid out. Turn these emails
  off or back on under
  [Notification settings](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/settings?section=sounds).
* **Commission History** shows the full **Order ID** beneath each product.
  It is the same order number (starting with `FP-`) that appears on the
  buyer's invoice and receipt, so you can match orders to invoices and
  reference a purchase when discussing a commission with support. Each
  order with a calculated commission also shows the rate it was calculated
  at, including any promotion rate.
* Commission is approved when the refund hold ends, even if you have not
  verified your identity yet. When you complete identity verification, earlier
  approved commission is checked again, and commission on a purchase found to
  be your own is removed.
* A refund or chargeback during the refund hold removes the order's
  commission. A refund or chargeback after the hold ends does not: the
  approved commission stays yours.
* The exception is a buyer whose account is banned for a chargeback. All
  commission from that buyer's orders is clawed back, including commission
  that was already approved or paid out, and those orders show
  **Clawed Back: Chargeback** in Commission History. Commission that was
  already paid out is subtracted from your affiliate balance, and a payout
  can't be approved while that balance is negative.

### FP Points

Qualifying affiliate revenue also earns FP Points at the rate shown under
**Ways to Earn** on [Rewards](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/rewards). These
points are spendable as soon as they are awarded because the FP Points refund
hold is currently disabled. Commission payouts still follow their own refund
hold described below. Refunding a purchase during its refund hold reverses its
related FP Points and can leave a negative points balance if those points have
already been spent. A refund after the hold ends leaves them in place.
Like all FP Points, they expire 90 days after they are awarded. See
[FP Points Expiry](/guides/challenge-lifecycle/billing-and-rewards#fp-points-expiry).

## Reward tiers

Tiers are based on gross lifetime completed sales. A sale counts toward your
tier once its refund hold ends: 48 hours after payment, or as soon as the
purchased account executes its first trade, whichever comes first. A paid sale
can count toward tier rewards while its commission is still awaiting eligibility
review; that commission remains unavailable for payout until review clears.
Purchases made through your link without your code (**Did Not Use Code**)
earn no commission but count toward your tier once their refund hold ends, on
the same 48-hour or first-trade schedule.
Unpaid orders, ineligible self-referrals, and orders refunded before the hold
ends do not add tier progress. Refunds and chargebacks after a sale has counted never reduce the
total, so a tier you reach is permanent. Tiers do not change the commission
rate. Each tier above Bronze issues a one-time reward as gift codes, added to
the **Giveaways** tab on the Affiliates page the moment your completed sales
cross the threshold. Each code can be redeemed once. Redeem the codes on your
own account, or give them away to your audience: they make great giveaways for
your followers. See [Giveaway codes](#giveaway-codes).

| Tier | Gross lifetime sales | One-time reward codes |
| - | - | - |
| Bronze | Starting tier | None |
| Silver | \$250 | Diamond Case |
| Gold | \$1,000 | Obsidian Case |
| Diamond | \$2,500 | Eclipse Case |
| Obsidian | \$5,000 | Eclipse Case + 10K Elite No DLL account |
| Goat | \$10,000 | Matt's Golden Ticket |

The Obsidian reward is two codes, one for the case and one for the account,
so you can keep one and give the other away. If you reached a tier before
rewards became codes, you also receive that tier's codes.

## Promo graphics

Open the **Graphics** tab on the Affiliates page to download ready-made
promo graphics. Each one is filled in with your affiliate code, your display
name, and your profile picture.

* **Advertised offer.** Every graphic invites buyers to use your code for up
  to the discount a new buyer gets on their first purchase with it. The
  graphics fill in that rate when you open the tab and update when it
  changes, so the downloads always match checkout. **Your Code's Discount**
  shows the standard discount. Previously downloaded graphics keep the rate
  from when you downloaded them; download fresh copies after a discount
  changes.
* **Elite details.** The **MyFundedPerps Elite**, **Start Your Evaluation**,
  **Meet Elite**, and **How Much Can You Open** graphics show account prices,
  rules, and leverage figures as designed. These do not update automatically.
* **Name and picture.** Edit the name, upload a different picture, and zoom or
  drag to frame it. These edits only affect your graphics; they do not change
  your profile.
* **Code.** Your code fills in automatically. To use a different code,
  request a change as described in [Your affiliate code and link](#your-affiliate-code-and-link).
* **Formats.** Graphics are grouped into two sections. **Standard** holds
  post and banner sizes: Partnership Announcement, Trade Everything, Every
  Asset, The Market Never Closes, MyFundedPerps Elite, Start Your Evaluation,
  and a Discount Banner. **Story** holds vertical 1080 × 1920 versions
  of Partnership Announcement, Trade Everything, The Market Never Closes,
  and Start Your Evaluation, plus Meet Elite and How Much Can You Open.
* **Downloads.** Download each graphic as a PNG.

The **Your Code's Discount** card shows the discount your code gives buyers
right now and, when the discount has a limited number of uses, how many are
left. If a graphic is temporarily turned off, it stays listed with the
reason and cannot be downloaded until it is available again.

Graphics you already received from the team stay available to download in
the same tab.

## Giveaway codes

The **Giveaways** tab on the Affiliates page holds codes to share with your
audience: your [reward tier](#reward-tiers) codes, any giveaway codes the
team issues you, and codes you [buy](#buy-giveaway-codes).

* Each code shows the reward it grants: a free evaluation account with the
  listed size and profit split, or a sealed reward case. A code limited to
  first-time code redeemers, or to users with or without an account, says so
  under the reward.
* Each code can be redeemed once. Tier reward codes are labeled with the tier
  that earned them, such as **Silver tier reward**, and you can redeem them on
  your own account or give them away. Codes from the team can be redeemed by
  anyone except you; redeeming one on your account is refused.
* Codes are hidden until you select the show button beside them, so the tab is
  safe to keep on screen while streaming. The copy button copies a code without
  revealing it.
* Codes that have not been redeemed show **Available**. A redeemed code shows
  **Redeemed**, the date and time, and a partially hidden email of the person
  who redeemed it, such as `fo•••@g•••.com`: only the first one or two
  characters of the address, the first character of the domain, and its
  ending (such as `.com`) are visible.
* Newest codes appear first. Use **Next** and **Previous** to browse older
  codes.

Recipients redeem codes on
[Redeem Code](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/rewards/redeem).

### Buy giveaway codes

Affiliates with at least \*\*$2,500 in net sales over the last 60 days** can buy
giveaway codes from **Buy Giveaway Codes** at the top of the Giveaways tab.
Net sales are your attributed sales after refunds and chargebacks. Access is
checked each time you open the tab or pay, so it ends if your last 60 days fall
below $2,500 and returns once they reach it again. Codes you already bought
stay valid.

| Code | Price |
| - | - |
| Select, Prime, or Signature evaluation | 25% off the current list price |
| Elite evaluation | 20% off the current list price |
| Gold Case | \$9 |
| Diamond Case | \$14 |
| Obsidian Case | \$25 |
| Eclipse Case | \$45 |
| Matt's Golden Ticket | \$400 |

* An evaluation code grants a standard evaluation at that plan's usual profit
  split, without add-ons.
* Discount codes and affiliate codes cannot be applied, and these purchases
  earn no commission.
* Each purchase can include up to 10 codes, in any mix of accounts and cases.
  You can make 2 purchases per day; the day resets at midnight New York time.
  Declined payments do not count toward the limit.
* Pay with a card, your store credit, or your affiliate commission that is at
  least 10 days old. One payment method covers the whole purchase, so store
  credit or commission must cover the full total. Commission you spend leaves
  your payable balance at once.
* Bought codes appear in the list labeled **Purchased**. They are for your
  audience: you cannot redeem them on your own account, and they do not count
  toward the recipient's purchase limits. Redemptions by people who share your
  devices or network may be reviewed.

## Payouts

Before you can request an affiliate payout, complete identity verification
through **Sumsub**. Open the **Payouts** tab at the top of the **Affiliates**
page, then select **Verify Identity**. You do not
need to buy or pass a trading challenge to verify your identity as an affiliate.
If you already have a current, approved Sumsub verification, it is reused.
Verification must confirm that you meet the age and country eligibility rules.
An approved country exception applies to that country on your account, but
you still need current Sumsub approval and must meet the minimum age.
A pending, unsuccessful, or invalidated check does not unlock payout requests.
If Sumsub asks you to resubmit, try again with your full legal name and clear
photos of a valid ID. Sumsub sometimes approves a check after additional
screening, so contact support only if your check is still not approved 12 hours
after your last submission, or if the page asks you to contact support.

Once approved, return to **Payouts** and select **Request Payout**. Rise onboarding
is a separate payment step and does not replace Sumsub identity verification.

* Request a payout from the Payouts tab once your unclaimed commission reaches
  \$10. Only commission that has cleared the refund hold counts toward your
  available payout.
* Enter how much to request in **Payout Amount**. It starts at your full
  available balance; select **Max** to reset it. You can request any amount
  up to your balance. Whatever you don't request stays in your balance for a
  later payout.
* There is no waiting period between payouts. Once your last payout is paid,
  you can request another as soon as you have an available balance.
* Use **Take Part as Store Credit** to choose how much of the payout amount
  is paid as store credit. Drag the slider, tap a preset (0%, 25%, 50%, 75%,
  or 100%), or type a dollar amount. The rest is paid in cash through Rise to
  the email you enter. At 0% the whole amount goes to Rise; at 100% it is all
  store credit and does not require Rise onboarding.
* The Rise part must be at least \$100, and the store credit part at least
  \$10. If a higher Rise minimum applies, the Payouts tab shows it; the Rise
  minimum cannot be set below \$100. When you request less than the Rise
  minimum, the dialog starts at 100% store credit.
* The store credit part gets a 5% boost, and the dialog shows the cash, store
  credit, boost, and total before you submit. For example, \$250 with \$50
  as store credit pays \$200 through Rise and \$52.50 in store credit. Store
  credit cannot be withdrawn as cash and follows the
  [store credit expiry rules](/guides/challenge-lifecycle/billing-and-rewards#store-credit-expiry).
* A payout taken entirely as store credit for less than \$250 is usually
  added to your account as soon as you request it.
* Other payout requests are usually approved on the last Friday of each
  month, and some requests may be approved and paid sooner.
* Every choice uses the same identity verification, refund hold, and
  pending-request rules. Store credit alone does not
  require Rise onboarding. If a Rise payout is waiting on an invitation you haven't
  accepted, you get the same
  [invitation reminders](/guides/challenge-lifecycle/payouts#complete-rise-onboarding)
  as traders. While
  [Streamer Mode](/settings/streamer-mode) is on, that email is blurred in the
  payout dialog and the Payouts tab. Hold **Hold to peek** in the dialog to
  check it.
* You are responsible for your own taxes.

> [!NOTE]
>
> Affiliate payouts are separate from funded trader payouts. See
> [Payouts](/guides/challenge-lifecycle/payouts) for funded account payouts.

## Sub Affiliates

The team can assign other affiliates under you as sub-affiliates. For each one,
you earn an agreed percentage of the gross value of every purchase made with
that affiliate's code after the date they were assigned to you. The percentage
can differ from one sub-affiliate to another. Being assigned does not change a
sub-affiliate's own commission, code, link, or attribution window.

These earnings follow the same rules as your own commission: they stay pending
until the purchase clears the refund hold, they are reversed if the purchase is
refunded or is not eligible for commission, and they add to your payout
balance. They do not count toward your reward tier. You earn nothing on
purchases you make yourself through a sub-affiliate's code, including from
another account.

If you have at least one sub-affiliate, the Affiliates page shows a
**Sub Affiliates** section with one row per sub-affiliate and a total row:

| Column | What it shows |
| - | - |
| **Link Clicks** | Clicks on the sub-affiliate's link since they were assigned to you. This figure updates periodically rather than instantly. |
| **Total Purchases** | Purchases made with the sub-affiliate's code since assignment, excluding refunded or ineligible purchases. |
| **Total Revenue** | The gross value of those purchases, after any partial refunds. |
| **Sub Affiliate Commission Earned** | What you have earned from that sub-affiliate, including pending earnings. |

A rate change applies to later purchases only. If a sub-affiliate is removed
from you, purchases they make afterwards earn you nothing; earnings from
earlier purchases stay in your balance.

## Partner links

Partner tracking is a separate program managed by the team. A partner does not
need an affiliate account. The team creates a link such as
`https://myfundedperpetuals.com/?partner=MFFU`.

When attribution cookies are permitted, opening a valid partner link starts a
7-day attribution window in that browser. The most recent valid partner link
replaces the previous partner. Opening the same link again refreshes the window.
Clearing cookies or switching browsers loses that attribution. If you have not
allowed attribution cookies where consent is required, the visit is not tracked;
you can allow them in Cookie Preferences and reopen the link.

A purchase started during that window is credited to the partner automatically,
even with no checkout code or with a different affiliate or discount code.
Partner tracking does not apply a discount or change affiliate commissions.
Attribution is saved when checkout starts, so a later payment confirmation keeps
it even if the cookie expires. Refunded purchases remain identifiable separately.

## Analytics

Open the **Analytics** tab on the Affiliates page to see how your link, code,
and campaigns perform. Every figure is reported by purchase date in UTC.

### Date range and grouping

Choose a **Date Range**: **Today**, **Yesterday**, **Last 7 Days**, **Last 30
Days** (the default), **Last 90 Days**, **This Month**, **Last Month**, **All
Time**, or a **Custom Range** of UTC days. **Group By** sets the charts and the
breakdown table to **Daily**, **Weekly**, or **Monthly** buckets. Ranges longer
than 400 days are always grouped by month.

**Compare to Previous Period** is on by default. Each summary figure then shows
its change against the period of the same length just before your range, or
**No prior data** when there is nothing to compare.

The report loads when you open the tab and shows the time it was updated.
Select **Refresh** for the latest figures.

### Summary figures

| Figure | What it counts |
| - | - |
| **Link Clicks** | Visits through your referral and campaign links. Refreshes of the same link and known bots are not counted. |
| **Unique Visitors** | Browsers that reached your link for the first time in this period. Each visitor counts once, on the day of their first visit. |
| **Signups** | New accounts created after visiting your link, within your attribution window. |
| **Customers** | Distinct buyers in this period, split into new customers (first purchase through you) and returning customers. |
| **Purchases** | Completed purchases credited to you by code or link, including purchases refunded later. |
| **Sales Revenue** | The amount paid after discounts. Refunded amounts are shown separately and are not subtracted. |
| **Commission Earned** | Commission on this period's purchases, pending plus approved, after reversals. |
| **Link Conversion** | Unique visitors from this period who went on to purchase, divided by unique visitors. Code-only purchases are excluded. |
| **Average Order Value** | Sales revenue divided by purchases. |
| **Earnings per Click** | Commission from purchases that followed a link visit, divided by unique visitors. |

Select the info icon beside any figure for its definition.

### Charts and funnel

* **Sales** charts purchases and revenue over time.
* **Traffic and Customers** charts clicks, signups, and customers.
* **Commission by Purchase Date** charts pending, approved, and reversed
  commission.
* **Referral Funnel** follows the unique visitors first seen in your range
  through **Signed Up** and **First Purchase**, with the share of the previous
  step that reached each stage.

Click, visitor, and signup tracking has a start date. A notice shows when it
began, and traffic before that date is unavailable rather than zero. Sales are
shown in full.

### Campaigns

Create a tracking link for each place you share, such as your X bio, a YouTube
review, or a Discord announcement. Select **New Tracking Link**, give it a
name and a link ID (lowercase letters, numbers, and hyphens; the ID cannot be
changed later), and optionally add UTM tags for your own analytics tools. You
can have up to 50 tracking links. Archive a link you no longer use and restore
it later.

The **Campaigns** table reports clicks, visitors, signups, customers,
purchases, revenue, conversion, and commission for each tracking
link. **Plain Link** covers your link without a campaign, and **Code Only**
covers purchases made with your code and no tracked visit.

### Link sales without your code

**Link Sales Without Your Code** lists the orders and revenue from buyers who
arrived through your link but checked out without your code. These purchases
count toward your reward tiers but do not earn commission.

### Details and export

The **Details** section has three tables, each with **Export CSV**:

* **Breakdown**: clicks, signups, buyers, purchases, revenue, refunds,
  commission, and conversion for each day, week, or month in your range.
* **Products**: purchases, revenue, refunds, and commission for each product.
* **Transactions**: each order with its purchase date, product, amount, code,
  method (**Code**, **Link and Code**, or **Link Only**), commission, and
  status. Filter by product, campaign, or status, or use **Search Orders**.

Buyers are never identified: each order shows a short reference only. When a
range has more than 5,000 purchases, choose a shorter range to see sales
details.

### Detailed sales report

Partners who need to reconcile orders against invoices can ask the affiliate
team to turn on advanced analytics for their account. The **Detailed Sales
Report** then appears on the Analytics tab and follows the same date range,
so select **Today** for a daily report. All dates and times are in UTC.

The report shows each order attributed to you, by code or by link, with:

* The full **Order ID** (starting with `FP-`). Select the copy button beside
  it to copy it exactly.
* The **Invoice Number** issued for that order (starting with `INV-`). Orders
  without an issued invoice show **No invoice issued**.
* The purchase date and time, product, number of accounts, and currency.
* **Gross** (the price before discounts), **Discount** with the discount code
  and percentage, any store credit the buyer used, and **Amount Paid**.
* **Payment Status**: **Paid**, **Partially Refunded**, or **Refunded**, with
  the refunded amount.
* Your **Commission** and its status, including any reversed commission.

Totals above the table show the order count (with refunded and partially
refunded orders counted separately), gross sales, discounts, amount paid, net
sales after refunds, and commission. Search by a full order ID or invoice
number to find one order. **Export CSV** downloads every matching order in
the range, not only the current page, with the same values and full
identifiers. When a range has more than 1,000 orders, choose a shorter range.

### How attribution works

* Last click wins. Your link saves a cookie for your attribution window, and a
  later click on another affiliate's link replaces it.
* Commission goes to the affiliate code applied at checkout. A buyer who
  arrives through your link but uses another affiliate's code belongs to that
  affiliate.
* Commission is approved after the refund hold and paid out later, so approval
  and payout dates can fall in a different period than the purchase.
* Refunded and charged-back purchases stay in the purchase count. Their amounts
  appear under refunds, and any commission they remove appears as
  **Reversed**.

## Commission history

The Affiliates page shows **Commission History** with your total commission
earned and the number of paid orders from your code or link. Each row shows
the purchased account type and size, its commission, and the date and time
the order was placed in your local time zone. Newest orders appear first;
use **Next** and **Previous** to browse older orders.

Orders placed through your link without your code show **Did Not Use Code**
instead of a commission. The **Did Not Use Code** box in the earnings summary
at the top of the page totals these paid purchases and how many there are.
They never add to your commission or payout balance.

Orders within the refund hold or awaiting a commission decision show
**Pending** alongside their calculated commission. Pending commission is
included in total earnings but cannot be withdrawn. Ineligible orders show zero commission. Refunded orders
remain in the history and order count, marked **Refunded**. They show zero
commission when refunded during the refund hold, or the approved commission
you keep when refunded after it. Total commission
earned includes pending, confirmed, requested, and paid earnings, including
recorded adjustments; it is not the amount currently available for payout.


# Asset Exposure Limits
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/asset-exposure-limits

Find current market leverage and exposure caps, and understand how per-user open notional limits affect your orders.

## Find Current Market Limits

Open [Market Exposure Caps](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/exposure-caps)
for the current list of tradable markets, their categories, maximum leverage,
and exposure caps. Search by market name or symbol to find an asset.

By default the page shows **All Products**: each market's cap range across
every challenge product and account size. Choose a **Product** and an
**Account Size** to see the exact caps for that account. The page also shows
that account's **Account Exposure Limit** when one applies, and for Elite, its
**Market Group Caps** on NAS100, SP500, US30, gold, and oil. The selection is saved in the
page link, so you can bookmark or share the caps for one product and size.

The table uses the platform's market configuration. Check that page for
current values when planning a trade; this guide explains the rules without
copying limits that can change.

## How Exposure Is Calculated

A market exposure cap limits the combined open notional across your own
accounts of the same challenge product and account size trading that market.
Your matching accounts share one allowance. Other users have separate
allowances, even when their accounts have the same product and size.

Elite accounts are the exception: each Elite account has its own allowance for
each market, counting only that account's position. Your other Elite accounts
of the same size do not use up its capacity, and a reduction frees capacity
on that account immediately rather than at the next refresh. See
[Elite Accounts](/guides/elite-accounts#leverage-and-exposure).

Competition accounts have a separate allowance from your other accounts.
Your competition accounts with the same product and size share that competition
allowance for each market. Each allowance uses the configured cap for that
product, size, and market: competition exposure does not reduce the capacity
available to your purchased accounts, and purchased-account exposure does not
reduce competition capacity. Competition orders are still rejected if they
would exceed their own allowance.

Exposure uses the full position value, not just the margin used. Long and
short exposure add together rather than offsetting each other. For example,
\$100,000 of long exposure and \$50,000 of short exposure contribute \$150,000
toward your combined cap. These amounts illustrate the calculation, not a
market's configured limit.

An order that would increase combined exposure beyond the applicable cap is
rejected without resizing. The exposure cap does not block reducing or closing
a position and does not force positions to close. Capacity freed by a reduction
becomes available at the next exposure refresh, approximately 10 seconds later.
Exposure is valued at the incoming fill’s execution price.

The separate hourly opening-notional budget for each account and market remains
unchanged.

On the order ticket, the percentage size slider tops out at the smaller of the
size your available margin supports and your remaining exposure capacity for
that market. The estimate uses the current order price; the engine checks the
actual fill.

If you type a size larger than that remaining capacity, a note under **Size**
shows how far over the cap the order is, with **Use Max** to fill in the largest
size that fits. When no capacity is left, the note says the cap is reached.
Because the remaining capacity is an estimate, you can still submit the order;
the engine rejects it at fill if it would exceed the cap.

A position keeps the same exposure group while it remains open,
including when you add, reduce, or reverse its size. Retiring a challenge
product does not move existing exposure into another group. After you fully
close the position, a new position uses the current product grouping.

## Read the Cap Table

* **Max Leverage** is the market's maximum leverage. Your account's rules can
  impose a lower limit. Elite accounts have higher leverage and their own
  exposure caps on NAS100, SP500, US30, gold, and oil; with Elite selected, the column
  shows the Elite leverage. See
  [Elite Accounts](/guides/elite-accounts#leverage-and-exposure).
* **Exposure Cap** is the configured per-user notional ceiling, not the
  remaining capacity available for your next order.
* With **All Products** selected, a range with an asterisk means the cap
  varies by challenge product and account size. The range shows the smallest and largest configured caps;
  each value applies separately to each user’s matching accounts, or to each
  Elite account on its own.
* **No Cap** means market exposure enforcement is disabled. Available margin,
  account rules, and other order checks still apply.

For your account's configured **Maximum Position Size**, sign in, select an
account, and hover over the market's leverage badge. Read the
[Trading Guide](/guides/trading-guide#size-the-order) for how that ceiling
differs from your remaining buying power.


# Becoming Funded
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/challenge-lifecycle/becoming-funded

Complete identity verification, sign the customer agreement, follow funding review, and open the issued funded account.

The evaluation pass starts a four-part funding path:

1. Challenge Passed
2. Identity Verification
3. Customer Agreement
4. Funded Account

The passed account's dashboard shows which step is complete, current, upcoming,
or blocked. When the evaluation passes, you also receive a congratulations
email with the account ID and a link back to the dashboard. If identity
verification is your next step, a separate email invites you to complete it.

Your pass certificate celebrates **Passed** and includes your name, the
evaluation you passed, and the pass date. Follow the passed-account dashboard
for your next funding step.

[API sandbox accounts](/sandbox) are for integration testing only. Passing a
sandbox account ends it as passed and does not start the funding path.

## 1. Verify your identity

Choose **Verify Identity** or **Continue Verification** from the passed-account
dashboard. The secure identity check is provided by Sumsub. Identity documents
are sent directly to Sumsub and are not stored by MyFundedPerps.

A current Sumsub approval is reused across your accounts, including a check
completed for affiliate payouts. You do not need to repeat an approved check
unless the team requires a new verification.

Use your complete legal identity and follow the provider prompts. Most checks
finish within minutes, but some take up to 12 hours.

If Sumsub asks you to resubmit, try again with your full legal name and clear
photos of a valid ID. Most resubmitted checks are approved. If the check is not
approved, read the explanation on the funding path. Sumsub sometimes approves a
check after additional screening, and the page updates when it does. Contact
support only if your check is still not approved 12 hours after your last
submission.

Funding requires a verified eligible residence country and proof that you
meet the minimum age. An approved country exception applies only to that
country on your account. It does not replace Sumsub approval or age verification.

Completing identity verification also makes you eligible for an annual
[Birthday Case](/guides/challenge-lifecycle/billing-and-rewards#birthday-cases)
on the birthday shown on your verified identity document.

## 2. Review and sign the agreement

After identity approval, the customer agreement becomes available. Open it
from the funding path and:

1. review the complete document and version;
2. confirm the legal name used for the signature;
3. provide the required consent;
4. type or draw the electronic signature;
5. submit the signed agreement.

The **Review and Sign** button near the top takes you to the consent and
signature section. You can still scroll through the full document. Using the
shortcut does not give consent or sign the agreement; complete those actions
yourself after reviewing it.

Signing records the signature and its audit details with the exact document
fingerprint. Download the signed agreement when the action is available.

## Funded allocation limits

You can receive **up to \$300K in total funded allocation**, with a maximum of
**\$100K per model type**. Prime, Select, Signature, and Elite are separate
model types. For example, \$100K in Prime, \$100K in Select, and \$100K in
Signature totals \$300K, so a passed Elite account would need Funding Review.
Active evaluations are limited separately, to \$100K per model type, so passed
evaluations beyond a model's \$100K funded limit also wait for Funding Review; see
[Elite Accounts](/guides/elite-accounts#funded-allocation).

The limit adds the original sizes of your active funded accounts. Two \$50K
accounts in the same model use its entire \$100K allowance. Trading profits,
losses, and withdrawals do not change the allocation used. Failed, closed, and
archived accounts no longer use active allocation.

If funding another passed account would exceed either limit, the application
enters **Funding Review** after identity verification and agreement completion.
It does not receive a funded account automatically. For example, passing a
second \$100K Prime account while you already hold \$100K funded in Prime requires
Funding Review, even if your total across all models is below \$300K.

A review does not guarantee additional allocation. Funding approval must remain
within both limits. Your completed identity check and signed agreement remain
on the application while it waits.

If one of your active funded accounts fails or is closed while the application
waits, and the waiting account now fits within both limits, it is funded
automatically. You do not need to contact support. When several applications
are waiting, the one you signed first is funded first.

## 3. Follow any funding review

Some passed accounts can enter **Funding Review In Progress** after identity
and agreement completion. The dashboard shows whether the account is waiting
for review, needs attention, was not approved, or is ready.

Do not repeat identity or signing steps after they are shown as complete.

## 4. Open the funded account

When funding is approved, choose **Go to Funded Account** or select the new
funded account in the account switcher. Confirm that its stage is **Funded**
and its status is **Active** before trading.

The funded account is separate from the passed evaluation. It has its own
balance, rules, positions, payout cycle, and history.

> [!WARNING]
>
> A funded account must record an executed trade at least once every 7
> consecutive calendar days, counted from activation or from the most recent
> executed trade. If the 7-Day Inactivity Rule passes without a trade, the
> account is closed and trading is disabled. The rule card shows the countdown
> and deadline. See [Inactivity
> rules](/guides/challenge-lifecycle/breaches-and-next-steps#inactivity-rules).

Any inactivity window respects a scheduled account activation date. Time before
that date does not count toward inactivity.

Continue with [Payouts](/guides/challenge-lifecycle/payouts).


# Billing and Rewards
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/challenge-lifecycle/billing-and-rewards

Find challenge orders and invoices, understand purchase statuses, and use reward cases, FP Points, and campaigns when available.

MyFundedPerps keeps billing records, platform rewards, and funded payouts as
separate parts of the product.

* **Billing** records challenge purchases and invoices.
* **Rewards** contains reward cases, FP Points, and enabled campaigns.
* **Payouts** sends eligible funded-account profit through the payout flow.

For funded profit, use the [Payouts guide](/guides/challenge-lifecycle/payouts).

## Your Rewards page

Open [Rewards](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/rewards) to manage your cases,
giveaways, FP Points, and store credit in one place. Overview shows cases
ready to open and any open giveaways. My Rewards contains unopened cases,
account prizes awaiting delivery, and discount codes won from cases. Giveaways lists every open giveaway with
its own entry details, so you can enter each one separately, followed by past
draws. When a past draw has more winners than fit on its row, select **Show
All** to open **Giveaway Winners**, where you can search the full list by
username. FP Points, Store Credit, and Pull History remain separate views
within Rewards when available.

Select **Redeem Code** to enter a gift code, drop password, or giveaway
password in a dialog.
[This link](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/rewards/redeem) opens that
dialog directly after sign-in. Existing Redeem and Giveaways links continue
to take you to the corresponding Rewards view. Each selected view stays in
the URL, so reload and Back or Forward return to the same place.

You can browse available giveaways before signing in. Sign in to enter or
view your own rewards. If an entry cannot be confirmed, turn off any
content blockers for the site, check your connection, and try again. On smaller screens, swipe the section tabs to reach
additional views.

Giveaway entry requires an enabled public profile. If you have not finished
account onboarding, select **Complete Onboarding** in the entry dialog. After
you finish, you return to Giveaways. Select **Create Profile** to publish a
profile using your account username, or **Enable Public Profile** if your
existing profile is disabled. Some giveaways also require a linked X account.

Some giveaways ask you to join a trading competition and place at least one
trade on your competition account before you can enter. The entry dialog shows
your progress and links to the competition. The step completes as soon as your
first competition order fills.

Some giveaways need a password. A password giveaway shows a password box on
its card, often with a hint about where the password was shared. Enter the
password and select **Enter**. Some password giveaways are private instead and
do not appear on the Giveaways tab until you unlock them. To unlock one, open
the link that was shared for it, or select **Redeem Code** on the Rewards page
and enter the giveaway's password. The giveaway then appears on your Giveaways
tab, where you enter it like any other.

Letter case and extra spaces in a password do not matter. Unlocking applies
only to your account, and repeated wrong passwords are paused for about a
minute.

A giveaway prize is either a reward case or a challenge account. Each winner of
a case giveaway receives a sealed case in My Rewards. A giveaway can also award
[Matt's Golden Ticket](#matts-golden-ticket), which each winner opens the same
way. Each winner of an account
giveaway receives the stated evaluation account as soon as the draw runs, and a
notification confirms it is ready. An account giveaway can award an
Elite account, including a \$1K Elite size that cannot be bought; see
[Elite prize accounts](/guides/elite-accounts#elite-prize-accounts).

## Share to Claim

When available, **Share to Claim** on Rewards lets you earn a case by posting
about a paid payout on X. Payout tasks appear only on Rewards, not on the
Payouts page. Link your X account, include the certificate link, mention
@MyFundedPerps, and submit the published post link within seven days of the
payout. A case is added after the post is approved. Payouts from every account
size can earn a case.

Passed challenges no longer earn a Share to Claim case. A pass claim you
submitted before this change is still reviewed.

Payouts paid on the same New York calendar day earn **one** Share to Claim case
between them. Once you submit a claim for one of that day's payouts, on X or
Instagram, the day's other payouts are no longer offered. If that claim is
rejected and you do not resubmit, the day's other payouts become available
again while their claim windows are open.

For a paid payout, you can instead choose **Instagram** from the payout's task
in Share to Claim. Save the payout image, post it to your story, tag **@myfundedperps\_**, and
keep your account public until review. Submit the story link and a screenshot
within seven days of the payout. Instagram does not require a linked X account.
Each payout can earn one reward through either X or Instagram. A pending or
approved claim locks that payout to its chosen platform; after rejection, you
can switch platforms while the claim window is open.

Payout rewards use the net amount you received after the profit split:

| Net payout | X case | Instagram story case |
| - | - | - |
| Up to \$250 | Bronze | Silver |
| \$250.01 to \$500 | Silver | Gold |
| \$500.01 to \$1,000 | Gold | Diamond |
| \$1,000.01 to \$2,500 | Diamond | Obsidian |
| \$2,500.01 to \$9,998.99 | Obsidian | Eclipse |
| \$9,999 or more | Eclipse | Eclipse |

A payout share for **\$9,999 or more** also earns a merch case alongside its
regular case. An Instagram story below that amount earns only the case in the
table, including when that case is Eclipse.

You can submit **one payout share on X per New York calendar day**. Instagram
stories have their own allowance of one submission per New York calendar day. Pending and approved submissions count; rejected submissions
do not. A rejected post can be resubmitted once within the original seven-day window.

After you use an allowance, other tasks of that type show a countdown and unlock
at midnight New York time. This reset follows daylight saving time. The seven-day
claim window still applies, so a task may expire before the next reset. Community
tasks have their own limits and do not use these daily allowances.

Community tasks can ask you to post on X, Instagram, YouTube, or TikTok. X tasks
need a linked X account. Instagram, YouTube, and TikTok tasks do not need a
linked account: follow the task details, publish the post, and paste its link
before the task ends. Each task accepts one claim per person, and a rejected post
can be resubmitted once while the task is open.

## Purchase History

Open [Purchase History](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/settings?section=purchases)
to review orders associated with your account.

| Status | Meaning |
| - | - |
| Paid | Payment completed and the challenge account was issued. |
| Pending | Payment is awaiting funds or processing. Open the crypto payment page to resume, check its status, or cancel an unpaid invoice. |
| Failed | The order did not complete. Review the displayed details before trying a new checkout. |
| Partially refunded | Some accounts in the order were refunded. Refunded accounts are marked in the order details. |
| Refunded | A refund was recorded for the order. The original purchase remains visible for history. |

A **Paid** purchase can still have **Pending** affiliate commission while its
refund hold or eligibility review is open. A refund reduces the commission for
the refunded accounts while it is still subject to reversal. Commission that
has already cleared its refund hold remains earned. See the
[Affiliate Program](/guides/affiliate-program) for the 48-hour or first-trade
refund hold and commission history.

**View Invoice** opens the PDF receipt for an eligible paid purchase.
When store credit paid for some or all of an order, the invoice shows the
store credit amount and the amount charged to your card or crypto payment
under **Total Paid**.
Crypto orders also have a permanent payment page: select the order number or
**View Payment** in its details. From there, resume payment, check the provider
status, or cancel an unpaid invoice. MyFundedPerps sends this link once in a
**Complete Your Purchase** email when the crypto invoice is created. Sign in to
the account that created the purchase to use the link.

## Spend store credit at checkout

The Store Credit spending tab appears only when this feature is enabled for your
account. While it is unavailable, your balance remains yours and new purchases
use card or crypto. Payments already using reserved credit can still complete.

When store-credit checkout is enabled for your account, available store credit
is automatically applied to your next checkout. You do
not need to create or enter a credit code. You can still enter one discount or
affiliate code: the discount applies first, then credit pays the remaining total.
To apply less, turn off **Use Store Credit** or drag its slider to a smaller
whole-dollar amount; the rest stays in your balance until it expires.

Open [Rewards](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/rewards?tab=credit) and select
**Store Credit** to see **Available Balance**. Pending rewards and credit reserved for a pending payment
are not available to spend.

For example, a \$100 order with a 20% discount costs \$80. With \$50 available
credit, checkout automatically applies \$50 and you pay \$30 by card or crypto.
With \$100 credit, you pay nothing externally and \$20 remains for a later purchase
until it expires.
Review the total and accept the terms, then select **Complete Purchase** for an
order fully covered by credit.

While a payment is pending, its credit balance snapshot is reserved. Unused
credit becomes available when the payment completes. A confirmed payment failure
releases that reservation automatically. Closing checkout or an uncertain payment
result does not release it; contact support with the order number if it remains
pending. When a refund is recorded, spent credit returns as store credit. Only
the external payment portion can be refunded through the payment provider.

For a partial refund, only the selected accounts' share of the discounted order
is returned. The selected store credit returns as credit, and one \$25 fee per
refund request is retained from the selected external payment portion, capped
at that portion. Purchase FP Points are reduced to the entitlement for the
remaining accounts; the retained refund fee does not earn points.

Contact support if your store credit balance needs correction. If an adjustment
removes reserved credit, the
checkout reservation is cancelled and any remaining balance becomes available.
A pending order that loses its credit needs review before completion. Do not send
another payment; contact support with the order number. Removing store credit
does not refund a card or crypto payment.

## Store credit expiry

Store credit expires 45 days after it is issued. The schedule shows each expiry in your local time. Each case pull,
payout conversion, refund, or adjustment is issued separately, so different
parts of your balance can expire on different dates. Checkout always uses the
credit that expires soonest first.

To see when your credit expires, open
[Rewards](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/rewards?tab=credit), select
**Store Credit**, then select **Expiry Schedule**. The schedule lists each
expiry date, how many days remain, where the credit came from, and the amount.

Unused credit is removed from your balance shortly after its expiry date.
Credit reserved for a pending payment stays with that payment even after its
expiry date. If the payment fails, the reserved credit that is past its expiry
date is removed. When a refund returns spent credit, the returned credit expires
45 days after the refund.

For crypto checkout, credit either covers the full order or leaves at least
**\$16** to pay in crypto. This includes a margin above the highest minimum among
the supported crypto networks. If using all your available credit would leave
less than \$16, checkout applies less credit and keeps the unused amount in your
balance. For example, a \$100 discounted order with \$95 credit uses \$84 credit and
leaves \$16 due; \$11 credit remains after payment.

If the order itself is below \$16, crypto payment is unavailable unless credit
covers it completely. You can use a card where available. Card payments do not
have this store-credit cap. Discounts still apply before credit.

## Reward cases

Market labels in reward activities use **NAS100** for the Nasdaq-100 index.

You can view Rewards after signing in, even before completing onboarding.
Opening a case still requires a completed onboarding profile and eligibility
under the current country restrictions. An approved country exception applies
only to that country on your account; other requirements for opening a case
still apply.

Open [Rewards](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/rewards) to see sealed cases and
pull history. A sealed case must be opened before its result is known. Opened
cases remain in history with the recorded result.

Before you open a case, it lists the rewards that case type can contain. After
the result appears, select **Open Next** to open your next sealed case of the
same type. When you have no more cases of that type and the result was store
credit, select **Use Credit** to go to checkout.

Cases open with a 3D animation. To use still images instead, turn off
**3D Scenes** in [Appearance settings](/settings/appearance). Opening works the
same either way, and cases also show still images on devices that cannot run
the animation.

Some promotions include a reward case with an eligible challenge purchase. When
the promotion requires a code, enter that code at checkout. The order summary
then shows the case you will receive. The sealed case appears under My Rewards
as soon as the order is paid, and you receive an in-app notification.

During some promotions, each eligible account you buy includes a Trick or
Treat Case. Each account size can earn one of two case tiers, a better one or
a worse one, with an even chance of each, decided at random when the order is
paid. Its card in My Rewards shows the rewards of the tier you received. When
you open it, pick **Treat** for a smaller, surer reward or **Trick** for a
chance at a bigger one. **Possible Rewards & Drop Rates** lists the rates for
each pick.

If you leave before an account prize reveal finishes, the pull stays marked
as not yet revealed in pull history and under Accounts on the Rewards page.
Select **Reveal** to finish revealing the account size; the prize itself is
already recorded and waiting for delivery.

If your device cannot render a case in 3D, or graphics support is lost while
viewing it, a static case image appears. You can still open the case and view
its result; the visual fallback does not change rewards or drop rates.

Share an opened case from pull history to copy its link or image, or download
a share card. Cards and public share pages use MyFundedPerps Rewards branding.

The case carousel near the top of the page shows the seven case types (Iron,
Bronze, Silver, Gold, Diamond, Obsidian, and Eclipse) one at a time, followed by
[Matt's Golden Ticket](#matts-golden-ticket). Use the arrows or
the dots to move between cases. The carousel also moves to the next case on
its own every few seconds. It pauses while your mouse is over it, while you
view a case's drop rates, or while you open a case. Each case shows its FP Points cost and how
many rewards it can contain. If you already hold a sealed case of that type,
**Open** shows how many you have and opens one without spending FP Points;
**Redeem** beside it buys another for the listed cost. Without one, **Open**
shows the cost, spends the FP Points, and opens the new case right away.
Select the info icon next to the case name to
open **Possible Rewards & Drop Rates**: every reward the case can pay with its
exact drop rate, listed highest odds first. The rates add up to 100%, and
they are the same rates the server uses when it opens the case.

The available case types, contents, drop rates, and grant conditions can
change. Review the current Rewards page before opening a case.

An account prize is issued as an evaluation account on the challenge model
the reward names (Select, Prime, or Signature) at the displayed account size.
It appears in your account switcher once issuance finishes. Account prizes are
normally issued automatically. If a prize needs review, it remains under **My
Rewards** until delivery.
Prize-account issuance is confirmed in the app and does not send the standard
account-issued email.

For accounts currently sold in the challenge selector, the reward's displayed
value follows the plan, account size, and profit split's catalog list price
before checkout codes. `PERPS` and other purchase discounts do not change a
reward account's displayed value. Price changes can change displayed reward
values without changing the published drop rates or store-credit amounts.

### Matt's Golden Ticket

Matt's Golden Ticket is awarded through giveaways and events. It cannot be
bought with FP Points, so its carousel slide shows **Giveaways and Events Only**
until you hold one. A ticket you hold is listed first under My Rewards, and the
carousel shows **Open** with the number of tickets you hold.

Every ticket pays one of 11 prizes:

| Prize type | Possible prizes |
| - | - |
| Challenge account | 100K Select, 25K Elite No DLL, 50K Elite No DLL, or 50K Elite 3% DLL account |
| Store credit | \$150, \$250, \$500, or \$1,000 |
| FP Points | 250,000, 500,000, or 1,000,000 FP Points |

Select **Drop Rates** on a ticket, or the info icon on its carousel slide, to
see the exact rate of each prize. The rates add up to 100%, and they are the
same rates the server uses when it opens the ticket.

Opening a ticket has the same onboarding and eligibility requirements as
opening a case. Your prize is decided and recorded the moment the ticket
opens. The 3D show that follows lets you snap the ticket off its cord, pick a
side, and choose how to tear it. Those choices are for fun and do not change
the prize. After the tear, select **Skip** to go straight to the result. If you leave early,
the prize is already in pull history. When you hold another ticket, select
**Open Another** to open it.

With **3D Scenes** turned off, or on a device that cannot run the show, the
ticket opens straight to a still result showing your prize.

Each prize is delivered the same way as the matching case prize:

* **Accounts** are issued as evaluation accounts, like any other
  account prize. An Elite account comes with the Daily Loss Limit option its
  prize names: No DLL, or the 3% DLL. A combination prize from an earlier
  ticket issues each of its accounts separately.
* **Store credit** is added to your balance like credit won from a case.
* **FP Points** are added to your balance right away, like
  [FP Points won from a case](#fp-points-prizes).
* **Merch Cases**, which a ticket opened before they were retired can pay,
  are added to My Rewards as sealed cases. Open each one separately.

Opened tickets appear in pull history with the prize they paid. Tickets do not
have a share card.

### Birthday Cases

After completing identity verification, you receive one automatic Birthday Case
each year on your verified birthday. The birthday is based on your verified
identity document, not the date entered in your profile. Awards use UTC and
normally arrive within an hour. You'll receive an email when your annual case
is added, with a link to open Rewards. February 29 birthdays are celebrated on February 28 in
non-leap years. Verification must remain valid and your account must not be
banned. Birthdays before you become eligible are not awarded retroactively.

Birthday Cases can also be awarded through giveaways and events. They cannot be bought
with FP Points and does not appear in the case carousel. A Birthday Case you
hold is listed under My Rewards. Open it to lift the cake's top tier and
release a fountain of coins and reward cards, followed by the same prize spin
used by other cases. With reduced motion enabled, the fountain is skipped.
Use the sound control in the opening dialog to mute or unmute the birthday
music.

A Birthday Case contains the prizes of one of the case tiers, at that tier's
[drop rates](#reward-cases). A sealed Birthday Case under My Rewards lists the
rewards it can contain, and the opening dialog shows the same list before you
open it. Prizes are delivered the same way as prizes from that tier, and opened
Birthday Cases appear in pull history.

### Elite Cases

Every Elite challenge account you buy comes with one Elite Case. Its tier
depends on the account size and the Daily Loss Limit option you choose:

| Elite account | 3% DLL | No DLL |
| - | - | - |
| 5K | Elite Iron Case | Elite Iron Case |
| 10K | Elite Iron Case | Elite Bronze Case |
| 25K | Elite Silver Case | Elite Gold Case |
| 50K | Elite Diamond Case | Elite Diamond Case |

The Elite plan cards and the checkout order summary show the case your
selection includes. No code is needed. An order of several Elite accounts
earns one case per account, and the case is added alongside any case a
promotion includes. The sealed case appears under My Rewards as soon as the
order is paid, and you receive an in-app notification. A partner code case,
such as the Smart Prop Firm Case, takes the Elite Case's place on that order.

An Elite Case is a black edition of its tier's case. It contains the same
prizes at the same [drop rates](#reward-cases) as the standard case of that
tier, opens the same way, and appears in pull history under its Elite name.
Elite Cases cannot be bought with FP Points.

### Smart Prop Firm Case

Your first paid order with the code **SMART** earns one Smart Prop Firm Case for
each account in the order. Later orders with SMART do not earn it, and earlier
orders without the code do not count. The case contains the prizes of the tier
your account size maps to, which the checkout order summary shows before you
pay. It replaces the Elite Case on an Elite order. Smart Prop Firm Cases cannot
be bought with FP Points.

### Tradesyncer Case

Your first paid order with the code **SYNC** earns one Tradesyncer Case for
each account in the order. Later orders with SYNC do not earn it, and earlier
orders without the code do not count. The case contains
the prizes of the tier your account size maps to, which the checkout order
summary shows before you pay. It replaces the Elite Case on an Elite order.
Tradesyncer Cases cannot be bought with FP Points.

### Speed Case

While the SPEED promotion runs, every paid order with the code **SPEED**
earns one Speed Case for each account in the order. An affiliate code earns it
too when checkout applies the SPEED offer to it. Unlike the Smart Prop Firm
and Tradesyncer Cases, later orders earn it as well, for as many orders as the
code allows you to use it. The case contains the prizes of the tier your
account size maps to, which the checkout order summary shows before you pay.
It replaces the Elite Case on an Elite order. Speed Cases cannot be bought
with FP Points.

### Merch Cases

A Merch Case cannot be bought with FP Points. Every Merch Case pays one piece of
MyFundedPerps merch: a T-Shirt, Pillow, Long Sleeve Tee, Polo, Baseball Cap, or
Full-Zip Hoodie.

Merch you win appears in the **Merch** section of My Rewards. For each item,
choose one of these:

* **Keep and Ship**: enter your shipping details. Clothing sizes are US men's
  sizes. Merch ships to the US, Canada, Mexico, and Europe. It can take up to
  2-3 weeks to receive your tracking code. While
  [Streamer Mode](/settings/streamer-mode) is on, the shipping fields are
  blurred on screen.
* **Take \$25 Credit**: exchange the item for \$25 in store credit instead.
  This is also the option for addresses outside the shipping regions.

You do not have to decide right away. The item waits in Rewards until you
choose.

### Discount code prizes

Bronze, Silver, Gold, Diamond, and Eclipse Cases can pay a discount code for
one account of a specific plan and size, such as **Select or Prime \$25K 30%
Off Code** or **Elite 3% DLL \$50K 25% Off Code**. The case's **Possible
Rewards & Drop Rates** lists each code it can pay. A code you win is saved
under **Discount Codes** on the Rewards page, with **Copy** and **Use Code**
buttons. **Use Code** opens checkout on that plan and size with the code
applied.

Each discount code won from a case:

* Works only on your account. Anyone else who enters it sees it as an invalid
  code.
* Works only on the plan and account size it names. A **Select or Prime** code
  works on either the Select or the Prime plan at that size, and an **Elite 3%
  DLL** code works only on the Elite 3% DLL option.
* Can be used once, on one account. An order for several accounts cannot use
  it.
* Expires 30 days after you open the case. The expiry date is shown beside
  the code.

Codes won before November 2026 work on any plan and size, and one use covers
a whole checkout, including an order for several accounts.

If a payment with the code fails or is canceled, the code becomes available
again until it expires. A refunded order does not return the code. Discount
codes cannot be exchanged for store credit and do not have a share card. Some
unused codes can be exchanged for FP Points instead; see
[Exchange rewards for FP Points](#exchange-rewards-for-fp-points).

### FP Points prizes

Every case tier can pay FP Points, from 1,000 FP in an Iron Case up to
250,000 FP in an Obsidian or Eclipse Case. The case's **Possible Rewards &
Drop Rates** lists each amount it can pay. Matt's Golden Ticket can pay
250,000, 500,000, or 1,000,000 FP Points.

FP Points you win are added to your balance the moment you open the case.
They appear in Points History as a prize from that case, are spendable right
away, and expire 90 days after you win them like any other points (see
[FP Points expiry](#fp-points-expiry)). FP Points prizes do not have a share
card.

### Competition account prizes

Competition account prizes are reviewed before issuance and provided as
Select evaluation accounts at the awarded size.

### Competition standings

For account-scored competitions, final standings value each ranked account at
the competition's end, including an early end. Pausing does not finalize the
leaderboard; scoring resumes when the competition resumes. Final results can
remain pending while end-time valuations finish. If the required price history
is unavailable, final results and prize issuance may be delayed for review.

Team scores include every active member. A member who has not traded contributes
zero profit or loss, including in average and best-member scoring. Removed or
disqualified members no longer count toward team capacity or the minimum team
size for prizes. Published final team scores stay fixed.

Tournament prizes wait for the bracket to finish. Closing all positions does not
require another trade to remain eligible for round advancement.

### Free Trade Case for following and posting on X and joining Discord

When the offer is available, the Rewards overview shows a free Trade Case you
can claim by following an account on X, publishing a post on X, and joining
the MyFundedPerps Discord server.

If you browse the site before creating an account, an invitation to sign up
for the free Trade Case may appear once after a few seconds. Select
**Sign Up & Open My Free Case** to create your account; after you finish
account setup you land on the Rewards overview to complete the steps below.
Select **No Thanks** or close the invitation to keep browsing; it does not
appear again in that browser.

To claim the free Trade Case:

1. Select **Connect X** and approve the connection. If your X account is
   already connected, this step is complete.
2. Select **Connect Discord** and approve the connection, then select
   **Join Discord** and join the server with that same Discord account.
   Joining is required: the claim is not accepted until your connected Discord
   account is a member of the server.
3. The offer shows the X account assigned to you. Select its **Follow**
   button to open that account on X, then follow it there. Your assigned
   account stays the same if you reload the page or reconnect X.
4. Select **Post on X** to open a prepared post about the free Trade Case,
   then publish it on X.
5. **Claim Free Trade Case** becomes available after both waits finish:
   15 seconds after selecting **Follow** and 10 seconds after selecting
   **Post on X**. Select it to add the Trade Case to My Rewards. If the claim
   says to join the Discord server, join it with your connected Discord
   account and claim again. If you already joined, or the claim says your
   Discord membership could not be checked, wait a minute and claim again.

Reloading the page keeps your completed steps and waiting time. The post and
Discord steps are required for claims that have not yet been completed.

While a [competition](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/competitions) is open for
registration, an optional step before the claim lets you enter it with one
click. Select **Enter Competition**; entering means you agree to the
competition's rules and the Terms of Use shown under the button. Once you are
in, the step shows **You're entered.** with a link to the competition page.
The step is optional: you can claim your free Trade Case without entering.

While the [October Competition](/guides/october-competition) is open for
registration, claiming also enters you into it automatically when you meet its
entry requirements. If you cannot be entered automatically, the confirmation
invites you to join instead.

Each MyFundedPerps account can claim one free Trade Case from this offer, and
each X account can be used for only one claim. The case is in addition to any
other Trade Case you received. Open it from My Rewards; opening it requires
the same completed account details as other cases. The offer ends once all
follow tasks have been handed out. If you already received a follow task by
then, you can still finish it and claim your case.

Claims are checked for fraud. A claim made from a browser or device that cannot
be verified is not accepted; claim again from your usual browser. Accepted
claims add a Trade Case immediately, including when you share a device with
another user. Previously held claims can also be opened without waiting for
approval. An explicitly declined claim remains unavailable, and its X account
cannot be used for another claim. Contact support if you think a claim was
declined by mistake.

### Affiliate milestone rewards

Reaching an affiliate tier issues one-time rewards as single-use gift codes on
the **Giveaways** tab of the Affiliates page. Each tier reward is issued once
and remains yours after refunds. Redeem a code on your own account with
[Redeem Code](#redeem-a-free-account-or-case-code), or give it away. See
[Reward tiers](/guides/affiliate-program#reward-tiers) for each tier's
rewards.

## Redeem a free account or case code

Open [Redeem Code](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/rewards/redeem), sign in, and complete
onboarding if prompted. Paste the full code and select **Redeem Code**. You can
also reach this page from Rewards. If you enter a free account or case code in
the checkout code field and select **Add Code**, checkout takes you to Redeem
Code and redeems it for you. Keep the gift prefix included when using checkout.
Redeem older codes without a prefix directly on Rewards.

Codes do not expire. Most codes can be used once; a shared code, such as one
posted for a community event, works until its maximum number of uses is reached. An account code adds a free
evaluation account with the challenge size and profit split configured when
the code was issued. Normal challenge rules and funding requirements apply.
A case code adds one sealed case to Rewards; redeeming the code does not open
the case or guarantee an account prize.

A code that is invalid or has reached its maximum uses cannot grant a reward.
An affiliate cannot redeem a giveaway code that MyFundedPerps issued to them to
share with their audience. Affiliate tier reward codes are different: the
affiliate can redeem them or give them away.
Free code grants are not paid purchases and do not create an order in
Purchase History.

## Password drops

A password drop is a giveaway that opens with a shared password instead of a
personal code. When MyFundedPerps announces a drop, enter the password on
[Redeem Code](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/rewards/redeem) or open the announced
link, which fills the password in for you. Passwords are not case sensitive.
Once a drop has ended, its password shows that the drop has ended. If you
opened the drop before it ended, the password still takes you back to its page
so you can see your result.

The password opens a question page with one of nine modes:

* **2048:** Slide numbered tiles together until one reaches the drop's target tile.

* **Pipes:** Draw pipes that connect each pair of matching numbered dots and fill
  every cell of the board.

* **Unblock:** Slide blocks out of the way to free the green arrow block
  through the exit.

* **Text Answer:** Type an answer using the matching rules shown with the question.
  Some questions include images, and some are asked entirely in an image.
  Select an image to open it full size in a new tab.

* **Show Your Work:** Draw every step of your solution with your mouse, finger,
  or stylus and box your final answer. The grader checks the answer and the
  steps that reach it. A final answer alone is not accepted.

* **Draw a Chart:** Draw the given function, such as `y = x^2 + 3`, on the
  supplied grid. Each question sets the ranges and spacing of its numbered
  x and y axes. Some questions use π labels for radians, for example
  −2π to 2π for `y = sin(x)`. Read the axis labels before drawing, then draw
  the curve within the visible range. You do not need
  algebra steps or a boxed answer. The grader checks the curve's shape and
  position against the function.

* **Speed Trading:** Trade a fast replay of a real past chart for a limited
  time. The best profit and loss (PnL) when the drop closes wins.

* **Not Priced In:** Answer a set of crypto and trading questions against a
  timer. Rarer correct answers score more, and the top scores when the drop
  closes win.

* **Pictionary:** Watch a MyFundedPerps team member, or a player they invite,
  draw live and type guesses. The first correct guessers win.

* **Trivia Rush:** Answer multiple-choice questions that open for everyone at
  the same moment. Correct answers score more the faster you give them, and
  the highest totals win.

### 2048

Select **New Game** on the board to start with two tiles. On a desktop, slide
with the arrow keys or W, A, S, D. On a phone or tablet, swipe the board or tap
the arrow buttons under it. The board tells you which applies before you start.
Every slide moves all tiles as far as they can go, and two tiles with the same
number that touch during a slide merge into one tile of double the value. A
slide that moves nothing does not count. After each slide a new 2 or 4 tile
appears. The game ends and submits your result as soon as any tile reaches the
target shown on the board. For example, a 1024 drop ends at the first 1024
tile. When no slide can change the board, the game is over.

Starting a game uses one attempt, including when you leave or reload the page.
When a game ends, your score, your best tile, and a **New Game** button appear
on the board; select it to try again while attempts remain. Each game expires
60 minutes after it starts.

Your result includes game-control counts and timing information for fair-play
review. Only 2048 controls used during active play are recorded; text entered
in fields is excluded. Input records are collected for later review and do not
block a valid win or delay your reward. If you win a case, you can open it as
soon as it is awarded; there is no wait for a game-input review.

Your result is checked automatically when the game ends. A win receives the
reward only if a slot is still available when the result is accepted. If the
connection fails, use **Retry Claim** to resend the same result without spending
another attempt. The remaining reward count updates on its own as other
players win.

### Pipes

Select **New Game** on the board to get your board. Every player gets a
different board, with dots numbered from 1 up. The goal under the reward shows
how many pipes the board has. **How to Play** under the board lists the rules:

1. Drag from a dot to the other dot with the same number and color. Drag with
   your mouse, or with your finger on a phone or tablet.
2. Pipes can't cross. Drawing through another pipe cuts that pipe at that
   point, and dragging back along your own pipe erases it. Drag from any dot
   to redraw its pipe, or select **Clear Board** to start the drawing over.
   Clearing does not use an attempt.
3. Connect every pair and fill every cell to win. Most boards have only one
   way to do this, so plan where each pipe has to go. If every pair is
   connected but cells are still empty, the progress message asks you to
   fill them.

On a keyboard, select the board, move with the arrow keys, and press Space to
pick up or put down a pipe at a dot.

The game submits as soon as every pair is connected and every cell is filled. Starting a game uses one
attempt, including when you leave or reload the page, and each game expires 30
minutes after it starts. Your board is checked automatically. A solved board
receives the reward only if a slot is still available when the result is
accepted. If the connection fails, use **Retry Claim** to resend the same
solution without spending another attempt. The remaining reward count updates
on its own as other players win.

### Unblock

Select **New Game** on the board to get your board. Every player gets a
different board of the same difficulty. **How to Play** under the board lists
the rules:

1. Drag a block along its length with your mouse, or with your finger on a
   phone or tablet. Blocks slide forward and back, never sideways, and stop
   when they reach another block or the edge of the board.
2. Clear a path and slide the green block with the arrow out through the exit
   on the right side of the board.
3. The rules show the drop's difficulty: Easy, Medium, or Hard. Harder boards
   need more moves to solve. Each slide of one block counts as one move,
   however far it goes, and any solution wins.

The move count above the board updates as you play. Select **Undo** to take
back your last move or **Restart** to put every block back where it started.
Neither uses an attempt.

On a keyboard, select the board, move with the arrow keys, press Space to pick
up the block under the highlight, slide it with the arrow keys, and press
Space again to put it down.

The game submits as soon as the green block reaches the exit. Starting a game
uses one attempt, including when you leave or reload the page, and each game
expires 30 minutes after it starts. Your moves are checked automatically. A
solved board receives the reward only if a slot is still available when the
result is accepted. If the connection fails, use **Retry Claim** to resend the
same solution without spending another attempt. The remaining reward count
updates on its own as other players win.

### Speed Trading

A Speed Trading drop stays open for a set time shown at the top of the page,
and the top players by PnL when it closes win the reward. Select **Start Run**
to play. After a three second countdown, 60 seconds of a real chart from one of
our most traded markets plays at 100× speed, starting at a random moment in
the past. Prices are shown at a random scale with a little noise so the chart
can't be looked up, but every move is real. The market is shown during the run;
the date and real starting price are revealed when it ends.

Every run starts with a \$100,000 balance at 1× leverage, with no fees and no
liquidation. Trade with the buttons under the chart:

| Control | What it does |
| - | - |
| **Buy** | Moves your position one step toward Long 100% |
| **Sell** | Moves your position one step toward Short 100% |
| **Close** | Closes your position and banks the profit or loss |
| **Step** | Sets the step size: 10%, 25%, 50%, or 100% (all in) |

Each button shows the position it leads to, for example **Buy 25%** and
**To Long 75%**. You can change the step size at any time, even mid-run. On a
keyboard, press the up arrow to buy, the down arrow to sell, and Space to
close. Trades fill at the price on the chart when you place them, and a trade
that arrives too late or too fast is rejected with a message. Any open
position closes automatically when the run ends.

Your PnL is your final balance minus \$100,000. Only your best run counts
toward the leaderboard, so a worse run never lowers your place. Starting a run
uses one attempt unless the drop allows unlimited attempts. If you leave the
page or lose your connection mid-run, the run normally keeps playing to the
end, open positions close automatically, and saved results still count. A
service interruption can prevent a run from finishing or its result from
being saved. If you stay on
the page, it shows **Scoring Your Run** and then your result once it is saved,
usually within a minute or two. If the result cannot be confirmed in that
time, the page says so; check **My Runs** a few minutes later. Rewards are
awarded about a minute after the drop closes. Starting runs too quickly
temporarily pauses new runs and shows when to retry.

Select **My Runs** at the top of the page to see every run you have started in
that drop, newest first. Each finished run shows its market, PnL, number of
trades, and the date and time of the chart you traded, and your best run is
marked **Best**. A run that is still playing shows **In Progress**, a run that
never finished shows **Not Finished**, and a run whose chart could not load
shows **Chart Unavailable**. Older runs load when you select **Load More**.

### Not Priced In

A Not Priced In drop stays open for a set time shown at the top of the page,
and the top scores when it closes win the reward. You get one run per drop.
Select **Start Run** to see the first question. Everyone gets the same
questions, each in their own order, and every question has many accepted
answers.

Each question has a timer, shown above it. Type one answer
and select **Lock In**; you cannot change it afterwards. Capitalization,
spacing, and punctuation do not matter, and small typos in longer names are
forgiven, in which case the result shows what your answer was read as. Short
answers such as tickers must be spelled exactly. Whatever you have typed when
the timer runs out is submitted as your answer, and a question left blank
scores nothing.

Every accepted answer has a rarity tier. The fewer players likely to think of
an answer, the more it scores:

| Tier | Points |
| - | - |
| Consensus | 10 |
| Crowded Trade | 15 |
| Mid Cap | 30 |
| Alpha | 60 |
| Low Float | 85 |
| 100x | 100 |

**Crowded Trade** is the answer most players think is obscure. Each question
has one **100x** answer. An answer that is not accepted shows **Rekt**, and a
question whose timer ran out shows **Liquidated**; both score 0.

After each answer you see your tier and points, then select **Next Question**
when you are ready. Your score counts toward the leaderboard as it grows, so
if you leave mid-run the points you already earned still count. When you
finish, the page shows your final score and each of your answers. Other
players' answers and the full answer lists are never shown. Ties go to the
player who reached the score first, and rewards are awarded about a minute
after the drop closes.

### Pictionary

A Pictionary drop shows a live drawing made by a MyFundedPerps team member, or
by a player the team hands the drawing to, with a short prompt about what is being drawn. Everyone who opened the drop
watches the same drawing as it happens. Until the drawing starts, the page
shows that it is waiting for the artist.

Type your guess under the drawing and select **Guess**. Guesses can be up to
60 characters (some symbols, including emoji, count as two characters).
Most Pictionary drops let you keep guessing until the drop ends. Some drops
give each player a set number of guesses; the page then shows how many you
have left, and every wrong, very close, or correct guess uses one. When you
run out, the guess box locks for the rest of the drop. Guesses are limited to
one per second, with a burst of up to three after a pause. Each guess is checked with the same matching rules as
text answers, shown on the page. The page tells you right away whether a
guess is wrong, very close, or correct.

A selection of wrong guesses appears in the public **Guesses** list with
your display name. The list may omit guesses during busy periods or when a
player is muted. Correct and very close guess text is never shown to other
players. The list can show that someone guessed correctly without revealing
their answer. The winner count updates when rewards are confirmed, and the
page shows how many people are watching while the drop is live.

Some Pictionary drops keep guesses private. In those drops the **Guesses**
list is replaced by a note, other players never see your guesses, and you
see only the winner count go up as rewards are claimed. Whoever is drawing,
and the MyFundedPerps team, can see every guess in both kinds of drop.

The first correct guesses received and accepted by the server win, up to
one reward per player and the number of rewards shown on the page. A correct guess shows that your place is being checked, then shows that
you won or that every reward was already claimed. Once you have guessed
correctly, further guesses do not count again. The drop ends when every
reward is claimed or when it is closed, and the page then shows that the drop
ended. Opening the drop afterwards still shows the final drawing and the
public guesses for about a week.

Sending guesses too quickly asks you to slow down for a moment before you
guess again. If your connection drops, the page reconnects on its own and the
drawing catches up. Keep the drop open in only one tab or window; opening it
somewhere else moves your seat there.

#### Drawing for a Pictionary drop

The MyFundedPerps team can invite you to draw for a Pictionary drop. While
you hold the canvas, the drop shows a **Start Drawing** button above the
drawing; select it to open the drawing page. The team can also share a drawing
link for that drop; open it while signed in to the account they invited. The
drawing page shows what to draw, a drawing canvas, and every guess
as it is checked. Everything you draw appears to players as you draw it, so
never write the answer or any part of it. Because you know the answer, your
own guesses never count in that drop, even after the team takes the drawing
back: the guess box on the drop stays locked and says why. If the team takes
the drawing back or hands it to someone else, the page tells you that you are
no longer drawing, with a **Back to the Drop** link to keep watching.

To draw in any color, select the color swatch next to **Expand Canvas** and
pick a shade from the color square and the hue slider. To change the canvas
color, select the **Canvas Background** swatch beside it and pick white,
cream, light gray, pale blue, pale green, or pale pink. Players see the new
background right away, and **Clear Canvas** keeps it. The canvas looks the
same in the light and dark themes, so everyone sees your exact colors.

### Trivia Rush

A Trivia Rush drop is a quiz the MyFundedPerps team starts at an announced
time. Until it starts, the page shows the number of questions, the time each
one stays open, and the scoring rules. When the team starts it, everyone sees
a short countdown, then the questions run on their own.

Each question shows four choices, labeled A to D, and a timer. Some questions
also include a picture, which appears when the question opens. Select one
choice; your first
selection is final and cannot be changed. Whether it was right is not shown
until the timer runs out. After each question the page shows the correct
answer, your result, your total score and rank, and the top scores, then
opens the next question a few seconds later.

Scoring:

* A correct answer earns 500 points plus up to 500 more for speed. The speed
  bonus falls evenly from 500 for an instant answer to 0 at the end of the
  timer, so the maximum is 1,000 points per question.
* A wrong answer, or no answer before the timer ends, earns 0 points.
* Your speed is measured from when the question opens on our server to when
  your answer reaches it, so a slow connection can cost a little time.

When the last question's results have shown, the drop ends and the highest
total scores win, up to the number of rewards shown on the page and one reward
per player. If two players have the same total, the one who spent less time
on their correct answers ranks higher. If the team ends the drop early, the
standings at that moment decide the winners. You can join after the quiz has
started and answer the remaining questions, but questions you missed score 0.

### Text answers

Some drops ask for a **Text Answer**. Enter your answer directly on the question
page and select **Submit Answer**. Any accepted alternative succeeds. Read the
matching rules shown with the question: case and spacing can each matter.
When case is ignored, `A` matches `a`. When spacing is ignored, `New York`
matches `NewYork`; this also ignores tabs and line breaks. Otherwise, spacing
must match exactly, including at the beginning and end. Punctuation and accents
always matter. Equivalent Unicode spellings of the same accented character match.

Text answers must be nonblank and at most 200 characters. An incorrect answer
uses one attempt and remains in the field so you can edit it. Answers are checked
immediately. A correct answer shows that it is correct and that your place is
being checked for a moment while rewards go out in the order correct answers
arrived, then shows your place or that every reward was already claimed. You
can submit another answer once that result appears. Your reward appears on
your rewards page or dashboard a few seconds after your place is confirmed. If
checking your place fails, the attempt is not counted and you can submit
again. The remaining reward count updates on its own as other players win. Too many
submissions temporarily pauses attempts and shows when to retry.

### Drawn answers

Use **Pen**, **Eraser**, **Undo**, and **Clear** to edit your drawing, then select
**Submit Drawing**. Erasing or clearing a chart leaves the grid intact, and
that same grid is included in your submission. Your work must be drawn by
hand; typed or pasted work is not accepted. Any text in the drawing that
addresses the grader is treated as an automatic fail.

Drawings enter a queue and are checked in parallel. Your result appears after its grade and any
reward have been recorded, even if other drawings are still being checked.
If recording a completed grade is temporarily delayed, it is saved and retried
without asking you to redraw.
You can leave the page and return to see the result. Only one drawing per drop
can be waiting for a result at a time.

Each drop names how many rewards it has and how many attempts each person
gets. Rewards are awarded as correct grading results are recorded. Submitting
earlier does not reserve a reward. Once every reward is claimed the drop
closes. Drawings that have not reached the grader are marked too late without
being graded; drawings already being graded may finish after the rewards run
out and receive no reward. A grading failure does not use up an attempt.

A won account drop adds a free evaluation account with the size and profit
split set when the drop was created; normal challenge rules apply. A won case
drop adds one sealed case to Rewards. Your puzzle page shows the status of
each attempt and the grader's notes. Drawings are kept for 30 days for
review and then deleted.

## FP Points

When FP Points are enabled for your account, the Rewards page shows your
balance, the case carousel, and an **FP Points** tab with the earning rules
(**Ways to Earn**) and your Points History.

Points can come from qualifying activities shown in the app, such as challenge
purchases, your first account pass, affiliate revenue, case prizes, or support
grants. The
current rates and bonus amounts are listed under Ways to Earn. Purchase and
affiliate points are spendable as soon as they are awarded: the FP Points
refund hold is currently disabled. A refund still reverses the related points
and can leave a negative points balance if those points have already been
spent. The reversal appears as an adjustment in Points History.
Support can also correct a balance by removing points. A removal appears as
a **Support Adjustment** in Points History and never takes your balance below
zero.

**First Account Pass** automatically awards **15,000 FP** once per user when
you pass your first real evaluation that proceeds to funding review. If that
evaluation is a 1K or 2.5K account, the bonus is **5,000 FP**. The points
are spendable immediately; you do not need to claim them or wait for identity
verification or funding approval. Mock accounts, retired Beta evaluations, and Beta Blitz do not qualify.
Older evaluation passes do not forfeit a first-pass bonus you have never
received. Once credited, later passes do not earn another first-pass bonus. Look for
**First Account Pass** in Points History.

To open a case with points, move the carousel to that case and select
**Open**. Opening spends the displayed FP Points cost, records a Case
Redemption entry in Points History, and reveals the reward immediately. When
your balance is below the cost, the control reads how many points you are
missing and cannot be selected.

### Exchange rewards for FP Points

You can trade a reward account, store credit, or a discount code you won from
a case for FP Points on the
[Rewards](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/rewards) page. Each exchange asks you
to confirm first and cannot be undone. The points are spendable immediately
and appear in Points History as **Account Exchange**, **Store Credit
Exchange**, or **Discount Code Exchange**.

**Accounts.** Exchangeable accounts are listed under **Exchange Accounts for FP
Points** on the **My Rewards** tab. These are evaluation accounts you won from any
case, including a case you redeemed with FP Points, or received from a
giveaway, a redemption code, or a password drop. Accounts you bought cannot be
exchanged. An account stays exchangeable
only until you place your first order on it; after that, it is removed from
the list. When you exchange an account, it is closed and removed from your
accounts. If it came from a case, the case in Pull History shows the points
you received.

| Account | FP Points |
| - | - |
| 10K Select | 18,000 |
| 10K Signature | 40,000 |
| 25K Select | 45,000 |
| 25K Signature | 100,000 |
| 50K Select | 85,000 |
| 50K Signature | 195,000 |
| 100K Select | 165,000 |
| 100K Signature | 400,000 |

Only accounts with the standard 80/20 profit split qualify. Other accounts,
such as Prime, Elite, and 90/10 accounts, cannot be exchanged.

**Store credit.** On the **Store Credit** tab, enter an amount under **Exchange
for FP Points** and select **Exchange**. You receive **700 FP for every \$1** of
store credit (7 FP per cent). Store credit won from any case, including credit
you took instead of a merch prize, and Trade Case credit can be exchanged.
Credit from payouts, refunds, or adjustments cannot be exchanged. Credit reserved for a pending
checkout cannot be exchanged until that checkout finishes or is released. FP
Points cannot be turned back into store credit.

**Discount codes.** Under **Discount Codes** on the **My Rewards** tab, an unused
code that qualifies shows an **Exchange for FP** button with its points. A code
for a specific plan and size exchanges for:

| Plan and size | 25% off | 30% off | 35% off | 40% off |
| - | - | - | - | - |
| Elite 3% DLL \$5K | 1,400 | 2,800 | 4,200 | 5,600 |
| Elite 3% DLL \$10K | 2,700 | 5,400 | 8,100 | 10,800 |
| Elite 3% DLL \$25K | 7,100 | 14,200 | 21,300 | 28,400 |
| Elite 3% DLL \$50K | 14,100 | 28,200 | 42,400 | 56,500 |
| Select or Prime \$10K | 1,000 | 2,100 | 3,100 | 4,200 |
| Select or Prime \$25K | 2,700 | 5,400 | 8,100 | 10,900 |
| Select or Prime \$50K | 5,100 | 10,200 | 15,400 | 20,500 |
| Select or Prime \$100K | 10,000 | 20,000 | 30,000 | 40,100 |
| Signature \$10K | 1,800 | 3,600 | 5,400 | 7,300 |
| Signature \$25K | 4,300 | 8,700 | 13,100 | 17,500 |
| Signature \$50K | 8,800 | 17,500 | 26,400 | 35,100 |
| Signature \$100K | 17,600 | 35,200 | 52,800 | 70,400 |

A code won before November 2026, which works on any plan and size, exchanges
for 3,750 FP at 30% off, 5,000 FP at 35% off, or 10,000 FP at 40% off; those
codes at other percentages cannot be exchanged. Codes won from any case
qualify, including a case you redeemed with FP Points. A code that is used, expired, or reserved by a pending checkout cannot be
exchanged. When you exchange a code, it stops working at checkout and shows the
points you received.

### FP Points expiry

FP Points expire 90 days after they are earned. For purchase points, that is
90 days after the purchase. Points earned before launch day (September 11, 2026) expire at 11:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time on December 9, 2026
(04:00 UTC on December 10), exactly 90 days after launch day began. The schedule shows each
expiry in your local time. Each purchase, bonus, grant, or other award is
tracked separately, so different parts of your balance can expire on different
dates. Opening a case always spends the points that expire soonest first.

To see when your points expire, open
[Rewards](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/rewards?tab=points), select
**FP Points**, then select **Expiry Schedule** beside Points History. The
schedule lists each expiry date, how many days remain, where the points came
from, and the amount.

Unspent points are removed from your balance shortly after their expiry date,
and the removal appears as **Expired Points** in Points History. If your balance
is negative after a refund, new points first cover the negative amount, and
only the remainder starts its own 90 days.

## Campaign rewards

When the Campaigns tab is enabled, it displays each campaign's dates,
eligibility, submission requirements, reward calculation, limits, and review
state. Connect the required social account and submit only through the current
campaign form.

Campaign submissions can be pending, paid, rejected, disqualified, or waiting
for results. Check the campaign card for its current terms and status.

## Keep the records separate

A purchase refund, FP Points adjustment, reward-case result, campaign reward,
and funded payout are different records. When contacting support, name the page
or record and include its order number, account number, payout date, case, or
campaign as applicable. Never include full payment credentials or identity
documents.

## Billing details and invoice corrections

Checkout may ask you to shorten billing details that are too long for an
invoice. Keep your real billing name and address accurate.

If a completed purchase cannot produce an invoice because of billing details,
contact support with the order number and your corrected details. Support can
repair affected orders before an invoice has been issued. This does not charge
you again or change the order amount. An issued invoice remains unchanged.

When an order uses two discount rates, purchase history and its CSV export
show both rates and the number of accounts priced at each rate.


# Breaches and Next Steps
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/challenge-lifecycle/breaches-and-next-steps

Understand a failed evaluation, identify the final constraint, preserve the account record, and decide what to do next.

## What a failed status means

An evaluation changes to **Failed** when a rule breach or authorized account
decision ends it. The account can no longer place trades, but it remains in
the account switcher and history so you can review the result.

The dashboard's Pass Progress card identifies the final failed constraint when
that information is available. Common constraints include:

* maximum daily loss;
* maximum drawdown;
* the 30-Day Inactivity Rule (evaluation accounts) or the 7-Day Inactivity
  Rule (funded accounts);
* evaluation time limit (historical accounts only);
* consistency (historical accounts only);
* profit target or another plan-specific pass condition.

If a position is liquidated, its notification shows **Total trade net PnL**:
the complete position result including earlier partial closes, trading fees,
and swap payments. This amount describes the trade, while the account's rule
result depends on its recorded equity and applicable limits.

## Inactivity rules

Every account must record an executed trade at least once within its
inactivity window. The window is measured in calendar days, not trading days,
and applies to every account model and size:

| Account stage | Window | Outcome when the window passes |
| - | - | - |
| Evaluation | 30 consecutive calendar days | The evaluation is marked **Failed** with the reason **30-Day Inactivity Rule**. |
| Funded | 7 consecutive calendar days | The funded account is closed with the reason **7-Day Inactivity Rule**. |

The window starts at account creation or activation if you have never traded.
If your account has a later scheduled activation date, time before that date
does not count toward inactivity. An executed trade after activation restarts
the window from that trade's timestamp. A trade before scheduled activation
does not move the start earlier. Logging in, placing an order that does not
fill, or cancelling an order does not reset the window.

The rule card on the dashboard shows the remaining time and the deadline for
the selected account. When the window passes, trading is disabled, any open
positions are closed automatically as described above, and the failure
report names the inactivity rule.

> [!NOTE]
>
> Competition products with no evaluation rules are not subject to the
> inactivity rules.

## Review the account before acting

1. Select the failed account in the account switcher.
2. Read the Pass Progress summary and final constraint.
3. Review the rule card, equity chart, closed trades, and order history around
   the decision.
4. Compare the result with the terms attached to that exact account.

Open positions, marked equity, fills, fees, and funding can affect the account
state. Use the recorded account data rather than reconstructing the outcome
from one order alone.

When an account ends, any remaining open positions are closed automatically.
A position in a market that is outside its
[trading hours](/guides/trading-guide#trading-hours) closes at the last quote
before the close.
Closes use top-of-book
bounded between the reference and the maximum slippage cap (see
[How market orders fill](/guides/trading-guide#how-market-orders-fill)). On
Veranta forex and Ostium NAS100, SP500, and US30, they fill at the bid or ask
plus the size-based slippage charge instead (see
[Veranta and Ostium fills](/guides/trading-guide#veranta-and-ostium-fills)). The
close appears in the order history as a close-out with the account's taker fee
for that market's asset category, including the reduced
[Elite rate](/guides/elite-accounts#fees) on NAS100, SP500, Gold, and WTI Oil. The source
venue and venue ticker format do not change the fee rate.

## Written breach explanation

The failure report stays expanded on the dashboard while the failed account
is selected. It cannot be dismissed.

A rule-triggered failure automatically queues a written explanation. It is
written to you in plain language and covers:

* **What happened:** the rule, the time, your equity, the floor, and how far
  equity went past it.
* **How the limit works for your account:** your starting balance, the rule's
  percentage and dollar limit, and what it is measured from (day-start equity
  for the daily loss rule, starting balance for a static drawdown).
* **What drove it:** the positions that were open, their size compared with
  your starting balance, and, for a daily loss failure, how the day's loss
  splits into closed trades, trading fees, swap fees, and the change in open
  positions.

When only one position was open, the explanation names that position's open
loss, because all of your open profit or loss at that moment belonged to it.
With several positions open, it gives their combined open loss. When the
failure happened as a trade closed, it names that trade. Swap fees and funding
charges are always described as costs you paid. The explanation distinguishes
the failure from the automatic position close-out that follows, which does not
cause it.

Historical failures may have less detail. If the explanation cannot be
generated, the recorded breach details remain available.

Newly generated explanations display dates in your latest recorded login time
zone, with UTC as the fallback if no valid time zone is available. This only
changes how dates are presented: trading rules keep their Eastern-time day
boundaries.

Money amounts display in dollars and cents. An amount smaller than one cent
keeps its significant digits, so a real difference never shows as \$0.00.
Asset prices keep the precision they were quoted with. For example:

| Recorded value | Displayed value |
| - | - |
| \$9,950.750418 balance | \$9,950.75 |
| \$0.748425 fee | \$0.75 |
| \$0.004 difference | \$0.004 |
| \$5.3117 price | \$5.3117 |
| \$0.041234 price | \$0.041234 |

Percentages display with at most two decimal places. Display rounding does not
change the recorded rule decision.

## Start again

Regular funding evaluations do not have a self-service balance reset. To make
a new attempt, open the
[challenge selector](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/#pricing), review the
currently offered terms, and purchase a new challenge.

The new challenge is a separate account. It does not erase or reactivate the
failed account.

If your breach email includes a discount code, it works only on your account.
Anyone else who enters it sees it as an invalid code.

> [!NOTE]
>
> Competition products can have different reset rules. A competition reset does
> not apply to a standard funding evaluation.

## When to contact support

Contact support if the dashboard does not identify the expected account, if a
recorded fill or account value appears incorrect, or if the displayed failed
constraint conflicts with the account's terms.

Include the account number, approximate time, market, order identifier when
available, and a concise description. Do not send passwords, payment-card
details, identity documents, or private keys.


# Buying a Challenge
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/challenge-lifecycle/buying-a-challenge

Compare challenge terms, complete checkout, understand payment states, and find the evaluation account after purchase.

## 1. Compare the plan terms

Open the [challenge selector](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/#pricing). Select a
plan and account size, then review the complete order summary before checkout.
Every plan is a 1-Step evaluation. Select, Prime, and Signature each offer
\$10K, \$25K, \$50K, and \$100K accounts. Elite offers \$5K, \$10K, \$25K, and
\$50K accounts, each with a choice of a 3% daily loss limit (3% DLL) or no
daily loss limit (No DLL). Choose the option on the Elite pricing card or at
checkout; it cannot be changed after purchase. List prices are \$49, \$95,
\$249, and \$495 with 3% DLL, and \$99, \$194, \$482, and \$965 with No DLL.
See [Elite Accounts](/guides/elite-accounts#dll-options). \$200K
accounts are not available at checkout.

Every Elite account includes an [Elite Case](/guides/challenge-lifecycle/billing-and-rewards#elite-cases),
whose tier depends on the size and DLL option. The Elite pricing card and the
checkout order summary show the case your selection includes, and the sealed
case is added to Rewards when the order is paid.

The homepage shows whole-dollar prices. When `PERPS` is available, the cards
show the list price crossed out above the price with that code. A code selected through an affiliate `@CODE` link is applied automatically at checkout, followed by an active referral cookie when attribution consent permits it. `PERPS` is not applied automatically: to use it or any other code, enter it and select **Add Code**. A valid code
discounts the list price once, including the 90/10 upgrade but not the
[Reduced Fees add-on](#reduced-fees-add-on). There is no additional catalog discount. A percentage discount on a
whole-dollar total rounds down to the nearest whole dollar, so the discounted
price on a homepage card is the amount you pay and you never get less than
the stated percentage off.

The percentage comes from the current `PERPS` offer and can change with public
promotions. A different discount or affiliate code replaces `PERPS`; percentage discounts do
not stack. Available store credit is applied automatically after the discount.
A custom price that includes cents, or a discounted total under \$1, keeps
its exact cents, which checkout shows in full. The final order total is the
amount you will pay.

If you enter a free account or case gift code at checkout and select
**Add Code**, checkout opens Redeem Code on the Rewards page and redeems it
for you. Keep the gift prefix included when using checkout. Redeem older codes
without a prefix directly on Rewards. Gift codes do not discount an order.

`PERPS` can give a larger discount on your first purchase. The homepage cards
and banner show that first-purchase discount until you have bought an account,
then the standard `PERPS` discount. A refunded purchase still uses up the first-purchase
discount. Affiliate codes share the same first-purchase discount: on your first
purchase, an affiliate code gives you whichever is larger, the first-purchase
discount or the affiliate's standard discount. A promotion that applies to the
affiliate code uses its own discount instead, unless the first-purchase
discount is larger on your first purchase.

Some other codes also give a larger discount on your first purchase and a
standard discount on every purchase after it. These codes count every purchase
you have made, whichever code you used. When the homepage advertises one of
these codes, affiliate codes also match its first-purchase discount: your first
purchase with an affiliate code gets the largest of that discount, the `PERPS`
first-purchase discount, and the affiliate's standard discount. Checkout shows
the discount that applies to you before you pay. A failed or abandoned checkout does not use up the
first-purchase discount, but a completed purchase does, even if it is later
refunded. While one checkout with the first-purchase discount is still open,
other checkouts get the standard discount for up to 30 minutes.

Some of these codes include a set number of extra uses at the code's discount
after your first purchase, then give a lower discount on every purchase after
that. Your first purchase does not use up one of those extra uses, even when
its discount is the same as the code's. When you are signed in, the homepage
banner shows whether you still have an extra use, and checkout shows the
discount that applies.

### Discount limit

After your first purchase, you can buy with a discount above 20% on up to 3
orders in any 90 days. This includes `PERPS`, the code the homepage advertises,
other discount codes, and affiliate codes. Once you have used all 3, these codes
give 20% off until your oldest of those orders is more than 90 days old. Each
order counts once, however many accounts it includes. A refunded order still
counts. Your first-purchase discount does not count toward the limit, and codes
that give 20% or less are not affected. Orders placed before this limit began
also count if they are within the last 90 days.

Occasional special promotions are exempt from the limit and give their full
discount even after you have used all 3. When a special promotion includes
extra uses at its discount, those uses ignore the limit too, and they do not
count toward it. Discount codes you win from cases and
codes we email you after an account fails are also exempt, and orders that use
them do not count toward the limit. When you are signed in, the homepage cards
and banner show the discount you would get on your next order, and checkout
shows the discount applied.

Some promotions apply only to certain account types, or limit how many accounts
you can buy at their discount. For those, each account in an order uses one of
your uses. Checkout tells you when a code does not apply to the account you
selected. When a promotion gives a lower discount after its uses and your
order has more accounts than you have uses left, the accounts within your
remaining uses get the full discount and the rest of the same order get the
lower one. Only the accounts at the full discount use up your uses. Checkout
shows both discounts before you pay. A promotion without a lower discount
tells you when your order has more accounts than you have uses left.

Before email verification and profile setup, an affiliate-link visit shows the
selected code and the price before discounts. The code stays selected through
sign-in, and checkout validates its discount and eligibility afterward. Other
visits preview the current standing-code discount, including any selected
profit-split upgrade. The collapsed summary shows the same price as the expanded
summary. Use **Back** at the left of the checkout header, beside the logo,
to return to the challenge selector. This is a public price preview; enter the
code at payment and review the confirmed total.

Checkout shows the chosen plan and account size as the item in your order,
with its collector card, fee, and rules, beside the billing and payment form.
Use the **Account Size** control to move between the sizes the plan sells,
and the **Challenge Type** control to switch plans, without leaving checkout.
Each size shows its fee before you select it. A cell marked **Coming Soon**
is an unavailable placeholder with no announced account size or price and
cannot be selected. Switching plans keeps your account size when the new plan
sells it and otherwise moves to that plan's recommended size. The fee, rules,
and total update with every change. On a phone the whole order stays open above
the payment form: choose a plan from **Choose a Challenge**, pick an account
size, and open **Trading Rules** or **Payouts and Perks** to see the full rules.
**Review Your Order** shows the fee, the **Discount or Affiliate Code** field,
and the total.

Pay particular attention to:

* the single evaluation profit target;
* maximum daily loss and maximum drawdown;
* the daily payout window (Elite has none) and gross minimum;
* funded payout terms and purchased profit split;
* challenge fee, discount, optional add-ons, and final total.

Plan values can change. The terms displayed for the selected order are more
reliable than an older screenshot or example. If pricing changes while your
checkout is open, the payment is stopped so you can review the refreshed prices
and confirm the order again.

### Buy more than one account

When multi-account checkout is available for your account, a **Number of
Accounts** control appears under **Account Size**. Use it to buy several
accounts of the selected plan and size in one order:

| Account size | Accounts per order |
| - | - |
| \$5K (Elite) | Up to 10 |
| \$10K | Up to 10 |
| \$25K | Up to 4 |
| \$50K | Up to 2 |
| \$100K | 1 |

Changing to a size with a lower limit reduces the number of accounts to that
limit. The order is one payment for every account in it:

* The fee, any profit-split upgrade, and the total reflect every account.
  A discount or affiliate code applies once to the whole order, and
  store credit is applied to the order total.
* Promotions that require a minimum purchase amount count the whole order
  total after discounts. For example, two accounts that total more than a
  promotion's threshold qualify even when one account alone would not.
* Winning trade offers apply only to an order for one account.
* A promotion that includes a reward case gives one case for each account in
  the order, up to any per-customer limit the promotion has.
* An Elite order gives one Elite Case for each account, in addition to any
  promotion case. A partner code case, such as the Smart Prop Firm Case or the
  Speed Case, takes the place of the Elite Case on that order.
* Each account is a separate evaluation with its own account number, rules,
  and progress. All of them appear in the dashboard account switcher after
  payment.

Use the [Trading Calculators](/guides/trading-calculators) to compare scenarios
before buying. Their example inputs and optional rules do not define the
terms of the challenge you select.

Challenge cards show “Up to 90%” when the optional profit-split upgrade is
available. Select the info icon beside the split to see the standard share and
upgrade terms. The upgrade costs extra; the displayed challenge price does not
include it.

The standard profit split is 80% to you and 20% to MyFundedPerps. You can choose
the 90/10 upgrade only during checkout, on every plan including Elite. It cannot be added to an existing
account. Each size and plan has an explicit upgrade price; use the final total
shown at checkout rather than calculating a percentage surcharge yourself.

### Reduced Fees add-on

Reduced Fees halves every commission and swap fee on the account. Read
[Commissions and Fees](/guides/commissions-and-fees#reduced-fees) for the
reduced rates. Turn on **Reduced Fees** at checkout to add it to a Select,
Prime, or Signature order of any size, including \$10K. It is not available on
Elite.

The add-on costs 10% of the challenge price after any discount or affiliate
code, with a \$10 minimum. The 90/10 upgrade is not part of that price, and the
code does not discount the add-on again. Because of the minimum, the add-on
costs more than 10% on challenges under \$100. For example:

| Challenge price after codes | Add-on price |
| - | - |
| \$40 | \$10 |
| \$90 | \$10 |
| \$240 | \$24 |
| \$430 | \$43 |

In a multi-account order, each account adds its own add-on price. **Review
Your Order** shows the add-on as its own line and includes it in the total, and
the invoice, order details in purchase history, and the purchase history CSV
list it separately.

The add-on stays with the account through the evaluation and carries over to
the funded account issued after you pass. It can be chosen only during
checkout and cannot be added to an existing account.

Accounts that received the add-on free during the October 2026 launch week
keep it. Read
[Free launch week](/guides/commissions-and-fees#free-launch-week).

## Allocation limits before you buy

You can hold up to **\$100K in active evaluations per model type**: Prime,
Select, Signature, and Elite each have their own allowance. Checkout shows how
much of the selected model's allowance remains, counting the order you are
placing, and blocks an order that would go over \$100K. If the selected model
has no room, choose another model with enough room, or wait until one of your
active evaluations in that model passes or fails. See
[Maximum active evaluation allocation](/guides/challenges-and-rules#maximum-active-evaluation-allocation).

Funded allocation is a separate limit: **\$300K total**, with a maximum of
**\$100K per model type** across active funded accounts. Elite is its own model
type. Buying or passing another challenge does not guarantee automatic funding. An account that would exceed
either limit enters **Funding Review** after identity and agreement completion.
Read [Becoming Funded](/guides/challenge-lifecycle/becoming-funded) for examples.

Your residence country must be eligible for purchases. An approved country
exception applies only to that country on your account. It does not change
payment-provider restrictions or make every payment method available.

## 2. Complete checkout

Checkout pre-fills your name, billing address, and country from the details
you entered at signup and shows them as a single line. To change them for the
current order, select **Edit**, update the fields, then select **Use Address**
to keep your changes or **Cancel** to discard them. Payment options stay
unavailable while you are editing. If no address is on file, fill in the
billing fields directly. As you type a street address, checkout suggests matching addresses. Choosing
one fills in the city, state or province, postal code, and country, which you
can still edit. You can also ignore the suggestions and type the full address.
Each order keeps its submitted billing address; changing it does not change
your saved residential address or legal name. If your residence
country is Afghanistan, India, Indonesia, or Myanmar, the last name is
optional. Complete any additional fields
required by the selected payment method. Card and crypto
options are available according to your billing country and provider availability.
If you stream or record checkout, turn on
[Streamer Mode](/settings/streamer-mode) first to blur your email, billing
details, and card fields while keeping the form usable.
If card payments are unavailable for your selected billing country, checkout
automatically selects **Crypto**, disables **Card**, and explains the restriction.
Continue with crypto to pay from your wallet. When enabled for your account, store credit automatically reduces the
amount due; when credit covers the entire order, select **Complete Purchase**
without a card or crypto payment. Billing details and legal acceptance are
still required.

For crypto checkouts, pay the full amount shown at checkout. The payment
provider must confirm that the payment succeeded before your challenge is
issued. If a payment stays processing, contact support with your order number
before making another payment.

Send the payment before the crypto checkout expires. If it arrives after the
checkout has expired or been canceled, your challenge is issued automatically
once the payment provider reports the funds, as long as the payment covers the
order and arrives within 24 hours. If you pay more than the order total, the
difference is added to your store credit. If a late payment is short of the
order total, contact support with your order number.

If the crypto checkout keeps loading, your connection may be blocking the
crypto payment provider. After about 20 seconds, the page shows a message
saying the provider can't be reached. Try another network, such as mobile data,
or turn off any VPN, ad blocker, or DNS filter, then reload the page.

You must accept the [Terms of Use](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/terms) and
[Trading Disclaimer](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/disclaimer) before submitting
the payment. Review the [Refund Policy](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/refund-policy)
before purchasing for activation conditions, refund eligibility, fees, and the
request process. MyFundedPerps does not display or store the payment credentials
entered into the secure provider fields.

### Save a card

When you pay with a new card, select **Save this card for future purchases**
under the card fields. The card is saved only if that payment succeeds. Your
card number stays with the payment processor; MyFundedPerps keeps only the card
brand, last four digits, and expiry date. You can save up to 10 cards. At the
limit, checkout explains that you must remove a card before saving another.

On your next card checkout, your saved cards appear above **New Card** as
**Visa ending in 4242** (for example) with their expiry date, and the first one
that has not expired is selected. Choose a saved card to pay without entering
card details, or choose **New Card** to enter a different one. Expired cards
show **Expired** and cannot be selected. Saving a card you already saved
replaces the earlier entry instead of adding a duplicate.

To remove a card, open
[Purchase History](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/settings?section=purchases)
in Settings and select **Remove** next to it in **Saved Cards**. Removing a card
does not affect past purchases.

### Return to a crypto invoice

When a new crypto invoice is ready, MyFundedPerps sends one **Complete Your
Purchase** email. Select **View Payment** and sign in to the account that created
the order. The same payment page is available from the crypto order number in
[Purchase History](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/settings?section=purchases),
from **View Payment** in its details, and from an open crypto checkout.
Reopening the invoice does not create a new order or send another email.

The payment page shows the original amount, applied credit, expiry time, and any
**Reserved Store Credit**. **Resume Payment** opens that invoice again.
**Check Status** retrieves its current provider status. The page can still manage
an existing invoice when new challenge purchases or store-credit checkout are
unavailable.

Use **Cancel Invoice** to cancel an unpaid invoice. Credit is released only after
the payment provider confirms cancellation or expiry. Once funds are arriving or
processing, cancellation may be unavailable: check the status or contact support
with your order number before sending anything else. Closing the payment window
alone does not cancel the invoice. A closed invoice cannot be paid again; start
a new purchase to use released credit for a different challenge.

If a crypto payment never opened, the payment page says so and offers only
**Cancel Invoice**. Nothing can be sent to that invoice, so cancelling it returns
any reserved store credit to your balance right away. An invoice like this also
closes on its own a few minutes after its expiry time.

## 3. Apply a checkout code

Opening a valid affiliate `@CODE` link selects that code ahead of any older
referral cookie. The selection follows your navigation and sign-in even when
attribution cookies are unavailable. Checkout validates the code before
applying its discount. Without a code selected in the URL, an active referral
cookie supplies the default when attribution consent permits it. Otherwise,
checkout starts without a code; **PERPS** is shown on the account-size cards
but applies only when you enter it.
You can replace or remove the applied discount beside **Discount or Affiliate Code**.
Account-size cards preview the list
price crossed out beside a discounted price and a code badge. Direct visitors
see **PERPS**; visitors with a valid affiliate-link selection or active referral
cookie see that affiliate's code and customer discount instead. The preview covers the base
account fee. It does not change your order total.

Use **Add Code** to enter a discount or affiliate code, or to replace an
automatically applied affiliate code. Review the confirmed total.
PERPS resolves to the best eligible public promotion or its standing rate.
Only one discount or affiliate code applies. Available store credit is then
applied automatically. Promotion redemption limits still apply. If a code
is rejected, remove or correct it before payment. Removing the discount restores the price before that discount while keeping
automatic store credit; it does not apply PERPS automatically.

When the banner advertises a free case, it applies to qualifying purchases. The
banner drops the free case once that offer ends. Some promotional
codes include a reward case. When the applied code
unlocks one for your selected account size, the order summary shows the case
under **Discount or Affiliate Code** with the tier you will receive, and how many cases
the order earns when it includes more than one account. The sealed cases are
delivered to My Rewards when the order is paid. Some codes include a case only
on your first paid order with that code; the order summary does not show a case
on later orders with it.

Some promotions also apply automatically when you enter an eligible affiliate
code. Checkout then shows that promotion's discount, and any reward case it
includes, in place of the standard affiliate discount. The affiliate is still
credited for the purchase. Promotion limits still apply. Some promotions give a
larger discount on your first use and a smaller one on later uses; these stay
available on later purchases at the later-use discount, with any reward case,
as long as that discount is at least the standard affiliate discount. Once you
reach a promotion's limit otherwise, it is no longer offered and the standard
affiliate discount applies. When more than one
promotion matches, choose the one you want from the **Choose your promotion**
menu under the code before you pay.

Affiliate commission requires that affiliate's code on the completed purchase.
A link or cookie alone earns no commission. Entering a different code credits
only the affiliate whose code was used, if it is an eligible affiliate code.
If you arrived through an affiliate's link and check out with no affiliate
code, the order is still shared with that affiliate as a purchase that did not
use their code. This does not change your price or discount.

### Store-credit vouchers

When store-credit checkout is enabled for your account, credit is applied
automatically from your **Available Balance**, after
any discount or affiliate code. No credit code is needed. View your balance on
the **Store Credit** tab on [Rewards](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/rewards?tab=credit).

Checkout applies the most credit the order allows by default. To keep credit for
later, turn off **Use Store Credit**, or drag its slider to apply a smaller
whole-dollar amount. Credit you do not apply stays in your balance until it
expires.

For example, a \$100 order with a 20% discount and \$50 of credit leaves \$30 due.
When credit covers the full discounted price, no card or crypto payment is
needed. Unused credit remains available after payment. Pending rewards and
credit reserved for a pending payment cannot fund another checkout.

If a credit adjustment affects a pending order, its result page shows
**Payment Needs Review**. Contact support with the order
number and do not send another payment. Removing credit does not refund a card
or crypto payment; support must review that payment separately.

See [Spend Store Credit](/guides/challenge-lifecycle/billing-and-rewards#spend-store-credit-at-checkout)
for reservation and refund details.

For crypto checkout, credit either covers the full order or leaves at least
**\$16** to pay in crypto. This includes a margin above the highest minimum among
the supported crypto networks. If using all your available credit would leave
less than \$16, checkout applies less credit and keeps the unused amount in your
balance. For example, a \$100 discounted order with \$95 credit uses \$84 credit and
leaves \$16 due; \$11 credit remains after payment.

If the order itself is below \$16, crypto payment is unavailable unless credit
covers it completely. You can use a card where available. Card payments do not
have this store-credit cap. Discounts still apply before credit.

### Winning trade offers

During some competitions, closing a single winning trade can unlock a personal
evaluation discount. The offer is live the moment the trade settles, and the
site shows the discount and a countdown until it expires.

* The trade must reach the offer's profit threshold on its own, measured as
  realized profit after fees on one fully closed position. Several smaller
  trades, or a day's total profit, do not add up to it.
* The countdown appears in the trading terminal and on your Dashboard, and you
  also receive a notification. It continues across refreshes, devices, and
  sessions. You can dismiss the terminal and Dashboard banners independently.
* Select **Open Checkout** to open checkout with the discount already applied.
  If a public discount would give you a lower price, checkout applies that one
  instead and keeps your offer for another purchase in the same window.
* The offer is tied to your account and works once. It cannot be shared or
  transferred, and an offer that has expired or been used cannot be redeemed.
* Each person can receive one offer per competition. When several accounts
  share a device, only the first qualifying account receives the offer. This
  does not affect the other accounts in any way.
* The offer applies to the evaluations shown as eligible at checkout, and it
  takes the place of any other discount or affiliate code on that order.

### Partner links

Partner links use separate attribution. If you opened a valid partner link and
attribution cookies are permitted, purchases started within its seven-day window
are credited to that partner automatically. The most recent valid partner link
wins. This works with no checkout code or with a different affiliate or discount
code, and does not apply a discount or change affiliate commissions.

Attribution is saved when checkout starts, so a later payment confirmation keeps
it even if the cookie expires. See [Partner Links](/guides/affiliate-program#partner-links)
for consent, browser, and cookie-window details.

> [!WARNING]
>
> Review the final total after every code, add-on, or payment-method change.

### Purchase limits

There is no limit on how many orders you can place. What you can hold at once
is limited by the \$100K active evaluation allowance for each model type; see
[Allocation limits before you buy](#allocation-limits-before-you-buy). The
number of accounts in a single order is also limited; see
[Buy more than one account](#buy-more-than-one-account).

If an order would take a model over its active evaluation allowance, checkout
names the model, the allowance, the size the order adds, and the size that
remains. No payment is taken.

Elite No DLL evaluations also have a limit of \$250,000 in total account size
purchased in any rolling 7-day period, across all Elite No DLL sizes combined.
Elite 3% DLL is not affected by it. An Elite No DLL order must fit both this
limit and the active evaluation allowance. When an Elite No DLL order would go
over the 7-day limit, checkout shows how much you bought in the last 7 days,
what remains, a countdown to when the order fits, and the exact date and time in
your timezone. You can also switch to Elite 3% DLL from the notice. See
[No DLL purchase limit](/guides/elite-accounts#no-dll-purchase-limit).

If an individual purchase limit applies to your account, checkout shows a
**Purchase Limit Reached** notice when an order would exceed it. The notice
shows your selected quantity, the quantity available now, and how many accounts
to remove. No payment is taken. If waiting can make the full quantity fit, the
notice also shows when, and checkout checks the limit again when you submit.

## 4. Read the payment result

Checkout opens a fresh confirmation page after you submit payment. If your
session has ended, sign in again to return to the same order's payment status.
You do not need to submit another payment to view the result.

| Result | What to do |
| - | - |
| Your Challenge Is Ready | The evaluation account, or every account in a multi-account order, has been added to the dashboard. The page shows the account card and its rules. Select **Start Trading** to open the new account, or **Go to Dashboard**. |
| Payment Submitted | The payment is still processing. Keep the order number and wait for settlement. Do not start another payment for that order. |
| Payment Status Unavailable | Check the dashboard and Purchase History before attempting another payment. This prevents an unnecessary duplicate attempt when the result is uncertain. |

Sometimes the card processor does not confirm whether a card payment went
through. Checkout then shows a reference such as `PAY-101-1A2B3C4D` and pauses
new payments on your account for 30 minutes so you are not charged twice. If
the payment went through, the account appears on your dashboard within a few
minutes. If no account appears, you can pay again once the pause ends; trying
earlier shows how many minutes are left. Keep the reference in case you
contact support.

The order also appears in
[Purchase History](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/settings?section=purchases)
with its current paid, pending, failed, or refunded status.

## 5. Confirm the new account

Open the [dashboard](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/dashboard) and choose the
new evaluation account in the account switcher. Confirm its plan, starting
balance, status, and rule card before trading.

Continue with [Evaluation Progress](/guides/challenge-lifecycle/evaluation-progress).


# Evaluation Progress
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/challenge-lifecycle/evaluation-progress

Read the dashboard, track pass requirements, complete a 1-Step evaluation, and understand when an account passes.

## Select the correct account

Use the account switcher on the
[dashboard](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/dashboard) or
[trading workspace](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/trade). Confirm the account
number, evaluation stage, and active status before placing an
order.

Each evaluation account keeps its own balance, positions, orders, progress,
and rule history.

## Read the Pass Progress Card

The dashboard's Pass Progress card combines the requirements for the selected
account. Every evaluation has one profit target and a static maximum drawdown.
Select, Prime, and Signature also have a 3% daily loss limit. Elite accounts
bought with the 3% DLL option have the same 3% daily loss limit, and No DLL
Elite accounts have none
(see [Elite Accounts](/guides/elite-accounts#dll-options)). There is no minimum trading-day count or deadline
for reaching the profit target, but every evaluation must record an executed
trade at least once every 30 consecutive calendar days (the 30-Day
Inactivity Rule). See
[Inactivity rules](/guides/challenge-lifecycle/breaches-and-next-steps#inactivity-rules).

The dashboard marks each requirement as clear, partial, pending, warning, or
failed. Open profit and loss count toward account equity and rule headroom.

> [!WARNING]
>
> Reaching the profit target does not cancel the loss limits or other pass
> requirements. Keep every requirement clear until the account is recorded as
> passed.

## Monitor rule headroom

Use the rule card and equity chart to watch the effective daily-loss and
drawdown floors. On plans with a daily loss limit, the daily loss floor is
start-of-day equity, including open profit or loss, minus 3% of starting
balance. The day resets at midnight in
America/New\_York, including daylight saving changes. The static maximum
drawdown is also a percentage of starting balance.

The rule card also shows the inactivity countdown: the time left until the
30-Day Inactivity Rule fails the account and the deadline it will fail at.
Any executed trade restarts the countdown.

The server evaluates the rules. Refresh a stale browser tab before relying on
the account status it shows.

## When the evaluation passes

When the server confirms that account equity reaches the profit target and
all other pass requirements are clear, the evaluation automatically changes
to **Passed**, stops accepting new trades, and closes its open positions.
Equity includes unrealized profit and loss. You do not need to close positions
yourself to realize the target. Closing fees or slippage may leave the final
balance slightly below the target; the account keeps its passed status.
The dashboard shows the result, any available pass certificate, and the next
action.

Your first qualifying real evaluation pass also earns a one-time **15,000 FP**
bonus automatically, or **5,000 FP** when the passing evaluation is a 1K or
2.5K account. An older evaluation pass does not block a bonus you have
never received. Existing pass bonuses, including support credits, are not
awarded again. See [FP Points](/guides/challenge-lifecycle/billing-and-rewards#fp-points)
for eligibility and where to find the credit.
Retired Beta evaluations and Beta Blitz do not qualify for this bonus. A later
qualifying non-Beta evaluation can still earn it if you have not received it.

Continue with [Becoming Funded](/guides/challenge-lifecycle/becoming-funded).

If the account changes to **Failed**, read
[Breaches and Next Steps](/guides/challenge-lifecycle/breaches-and-next-steps).


# Challenge Lifecycle
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/challenge-lifecycle/index

Follow a MyFundedPerps challenge from purchase through evaluation, funding, payouts, and account history.

A challenge starts with a purchase, continues through a single evaluation, and may lead to a funded account and payouts. The plan attached to your
account sets its target, limits, and payout terms.

## The complete path

1. [Choose and buy a challenge](/guides/challenge-lifecycle/buying-a-challenge).
2. [Track evaluation progress](/guides/challenge-lifecycle/evaluation-progress)
   without breaching a rule.
3. If the account fails, review the
   [breach and next-step guidance](/guides/challenge-lifecycle/breaches-and-next-steps).
4. After the evaluation passes, complete the
   [funding path](/guides/challenge-lifecycle/becoming-funded).
5. On an active funded account, meet the current terms and
   [request a payout](/guides/challenge-lifecycle/payouts).
6. Use [Billing and Rewards](/guides/challenge-lifecycle/billing-and-rewards)
   to find purchase records, invoices, FP Points, and reward cases.

## Account stages and statuses

The account switcher shows both a stage and a status. They answer different
questions:

| Field | What it means |
| - | - |
| Stage | Whether the account is an evaluation account or a funded account. |
| Status | Whether that account is active, passed, failed, or closed. |

A passed evaluation remains in your history. A funded account is a separate
account issued after the required post-pass steps.

The account switcher shows active accounts by default. Open its Filter menu to
include other stages or statuses. Your selection is saved to your account and
follows you across devices. Clearing every filter shows all accounts, including
passed and failed accounts.

> [!NOTE]
>
> Check the selected account's rule card, pass-progress card, funding path, and
> payout panel for its current state.

## Where to look

* [Dashboard](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/dashboard): balance, equity, rule
  headroom, pass progress, and post-pass actions.
* [Trade](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/trade): positions, orders, and trading
  activity for the selected account.
* [Payouts](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/dashboard/payouts): funded payout
  terms, eligibility, Rise onboarding, requests, and payout history.
* [Purchase History](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/settings?section=purchases):
  challenge orders, statuses, and available invoice actions.
* [Rewards](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/rewards): reward cases, FP Points,
  and any enabled campaigns.
* [Affiliates](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/affiliates): affiliate
  application, code, reward tiers, promo graphics, and affiliate payouts.


# Payouts
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/challenge-lifecycle/payouts

Read funded payout terms, complete Rise onboarding, clear eligibility gates, submit a request, and understand its effect on the account.

Payouts are available from the
[Payouts panel](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/dashboard/payouts) for an active
funded account. Select the intended account before reviewing or submitting a
request.

## Payout request availability

Payout requests opened on **September 11, 2026 at 12:00 a.m. Eastern Daylight
Time (04:00 UTC)** for all existing and newly funded accounts. Every request
must meet the normal payout requirements below.

## Daily payout window

Each funded account can submit one payout request per day. Elite accounts are
the exception: they have no daily limit, so you can request again as soon as
your previous request finishes. Checkout shows Elite payout frequency as
**On Demand**. See [Elite Accounts](/guides/elite-accounts#payouts).

On every other plan, the allowance resets
at **12:00 a.m. (midnight) New York time** (`America/New_York`), the same time
as the [daily loss reset](/guides/challenges-and-rules#daily-loss-reset-time).
This is **04:00 UTC during Eastern Daylight Time (EDT)** and **05:00 UTC during
Eastern Standard Time (EST)**.

The allowance follows calendar days, rather than a rolling 24-hour wait from
your previous request. The payout panel shows the next window in your local
time and in Eastern time. Two funded accounts held by the same trader each
have their own daily allowance.

Midnight renews the request allowance; it does not approve or pay an existing
request. A pending request must finish and all eligibility gates must be clear
before you can submit another one.

Submitted requests cannot be cancelled. If a request is rejected, that day's
allowance is restored, so you can submit a new request right away once all
eligibility gates are clear. Every request is subject to review and approval.
Daily or on-demand request availability does not guarantee immediate payment;
review and delivery can take longer than the request window.

## Minimum and profit split

On Select, Prime, and Signature, the minimum is **\$100 of gross profit before
the split**. This pays \$80 with an 80/20 split or \$90 with a 90/10 split. The request form accepts your net share
and shows the gross account deduction before you confirm.

\$1K and \$2.5K Select prize accounts use their own terms: a 90/10 profit split
and a minimum request of **\$30** on \$1K or **\$50** on \$2.5K. Payout Terms on
the account shows the split and minimum that apply.

Elite accounts use an 80/20 split, or 90/10 with the upgrade, and a minimum of
1% of the account size before the split: **\$50** on \$5K, **\$100** on \$10K,
**\$250** on \$25K, and **\$500** on \$50K (\$40, \$80, \$200, and \$400 to you
on 80/20, or \$45, \$90, \$225, and \$450 on 90/10). A \$1K Elite prize
account has a \$30 minimum before the split (\$24 to you). See
[Elite Accounts](/guides/elite-accounts#payouts).

Select, Prime, Signature, and Elite have no minimum trading-day or
qualifying-day requirement, consistency gate, or payout count cap per account.
The lifetime payout cap below still applies.

## Lifetime payout cap

The lifetime payout cap is **\$100,000** per user, combined across every
account and model type (Select, Prime, Signature, and Elite), not per account.
It counts the payout amount you actually receive after the profit split, not
the gross amount deducted from the account. Purchasing new accounts or
resetting existing accounts does not reset it.

Once your combined payouts reach \$100,000, you have graduated from the
MyFundedPerps funded trader program and can no longer purchase new accounts.
Your active funded accounts are not closed: you can keep trading them and
taking payouts from them, even if those payouts take your total above
\$100,000.

The lifetime cap is separate from the per-request rules on this page. The
plan's gross minimum and, outside Elite, the daily request allowance still
apply to every request. It is also
separate from the \$100K funded allocation limit per model type, which limits
the starting size of your active funded accounts rather than the money you
receive.

The [Payout Split Calculator](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/tools/payout-split-calculator)
can help you compare hypothetical amounts. Its fee-refund option does not
promise a refund or confirm payout eligibility. Read the
[calculator guide](/guides/trading-calculators#payout-splits-and-evaluation-fees)
for an example and its limits.

## Complete Rise onboarding

Only payouts with a cash portion need Rise. If you choose 100% store credit,
you can submit without a Rise account or invitation. Store-credit-only accounts
skip Rise setup entirely.

For cash delivery, enter the email you want paid to, send the
invitation, then accept it and create the Rise account. The invitation email
comes from Rise after you select **Send Invitation**. Check your inbox and
spam folder, then follow the invitation to complete setup. The panel shows
when setup is accepted or needs attention. If the invitation could not be
completed, contact support from the panel.

If you have a payout waiting and haven't accepted the invitation yet, Rise
sends you a fresh invitation a day after the first one, then again on each of
the next two days. Each new invitation replaces the previous one, so accept
the most recent. We also email you on the first day with steps to find it, and
once more a few days later as a final reminder. Reminders stop as soon as you
accept the invitation.

You have one Rise account for every payout. Competition prize payouts use the
same Rise account and the same identity check; see
[Physical prize payouts](/guides/october-competition#physical-prize-payouts).

Check the email carefully. Approved payouts are delivered to the connected
Rise account. While [Streamer Mode](/settings/streamer-mode) is on, the Rise
email is blurred everywhere it appears, including the confirmation after the
invitation is sent and the payout panel once Rise is connected. Press and hold
**Hold to peek** next to the Rise Email field to check the address before you
send the invitation.

## Clear the payout gates

The request form explains the first condition that is not yet satisfied.
Before requesting:

* keep the funded account active;
* wait for any pending request to finish and, except on Elite, for the next
  daily window;
* close every open position;
* cancel resting orders and wait for working orders to settle;
* have at least the plan's minimum in available gross profit in the current
  cycle (\$100 on Select, Prime, and Signature).

Payouts use realized balance. Close positions and settle orders before relying
on the displayed request amount.

## Understand the amount

The requested amount is your profit-split share. The confirmation shows both
your requested amount and the gross amount deducted from the funded account.

New payout requests use whole cents. **Max** rounds your available share down
to the nearest cent. If you enter more than two decimal places, the submitted
amount rounds to the nearest cent; an exact half-cent rounds to the even cent.
For example, \$330.108976 becomes \$330.11. The rounded request must still fit
within your available share.

On approval, the full gross amount leaves the account balance and a new payout
cycle starts. Any undistributed profit retained below that new cycle baseline
is a balance buffer rather than available profit for another withdrawal. This
retained buffer cannot be withdrawn in later cycles. Elite accounts are the
exception: profit you leave in an Elite account stays available for a later
payout. See [Elite Accounts](/guides/elite-accounts#payouts).

## Permanent max loss limit after the first withdrawal

This lock applies to Select, Prime, and Signature. Elite accounts have no
lock: their MLL floor never moves, including after withdrawals. See
[Elite Accounts](/guides/elite-accounts#withdrawals-and-your-loss-cushion).

Before the first withdrawal, the max loss limit (MLL) is starting balance minus
the plan's static drawdown allowance. On the first withdrawal it becomes
**exactly the starting balance**, permanently. Later withdrawals never lower
or raise it. You receive an in-app notice and an email explaining the lock.

For example, a \$100K Signature account starts with an MLL floor of \$94,000.
After its first withdrawal the floor is \$100,000. Equity at \$100,000 is allowed;
equity at \$99,999 breaches and closes the account. Equity includes open-position
profit or loss. Withdrawing \$3,200 at an 80/20 split deducts \$4,000 gross from
the account, so withdrawing all \$4,000 profit leaves no loss buffer above the
locked floor.

The 3% daily loss rule continues to apply. The dashboard shows both loss floors.
Check them before opening another position.

Before submitting, review **Balance After Payout**, **Max Loss Floor After
Payout**, and **Loss Buffer After Payout** directly below the amount field.
Elite requests show the gross deduction and **Balance After Payout** only,
because their floor does not change.
The preview updates as you change the requested amount and appears again in
confirmation. The loss buffer is the projected balance minus the permanent
max loss floor, using the full gross deduction rather than just your share.

A zero-buffer warning appears when the payout leaves no room above the floor.
If the projected balance falls below the floor, an explicit breach warning
appears and submission is blocked, including when the entered amount exceeds
the available payout. Reduce your request to retain room for trading losses
and fees. This buffer
only measures the max loss floor; the daily loss rule still applies. Cash and
store-credit allocation do not change the buffer.

## Daily loss limit after a withdrawal

A withdrawal never counts as a daily loss. On plans with a daily loss limit,
a payout first uses up any profit you made earlier in the same trading day.
That withdrawn profit no longer adds room under the daily loss limit, so the
daily loss floor never drops below where it started that day.

For example, a \$5K account with a 3% daily loss limit (\$150) starts the day
at \$5,000, so its daily loss floor is \$4,850. It gains \$280, then withdraws
\$280 gross. The balance returns to \$5,000 and the daily loss floor stays at
\$4,850. If the withdrawal is larger than the day's profit, the floor moves
down only by the extra amount, so the withdrawal still does not count as a
loss.

## Split cash and store credit

**Yes, funded payouts can still be redeemed for store credit.** On most
accounts you can take 100% as cash through Rise, 100% as store credit, or any
split between the two.
Use the slider, a preset, or enter the store-credit amount. The request panel
shows each part before you confirm.
If you split a payout, the cash part must be at least \$1.00, the smallest
amount Rise can send. To take less than \$1.00 as cash, convert the whole
request to store credit instead.

Some accounts are paid in store credit only. \$1K and \$2.5K Select accounts,
for example, cannot take any part of a payout as cash. On these accounts the request panel
shows **Paid as Store Credit** in place of the slider, and the whole requested
amount is converted to store credit. Payout Terms lists the payout method as
**Store credit only**. These payouts do not receive the store-credit boost
because the accounts already have a 90/10 split, so a \$30 request grants \$30
in store credit. Eligible payouts from these accounts are automatically approved
when you submit, and the store credit is added immediately. The gross account
deduction and new payout cycle also take effect immediately. Requests that need
verification or have unresolved trading reviews remain pending for review.

On other accounts, the store-credit portion receives a 5% boost. For example, converting \$100 of
a payout grants \$105 in store credit. The boosted credit cannot be withdrawn
as cash. It is added when the payout is paid, while any cash portion is sent
through Rise.
Like all store credit, it expires 45 days after it is added. See
[Store Credit Expiry](/guides/challenge-lifecycle/billing-and-rewards#store-credit-expiry).

The full requested amount still counts toward the payout-cycle deduction. The
boost increases the store-credit value you receive; it does not increase the
amount deducted from the funded account.

If you chose store credit by mistake, contact support before spending any of
that credit.

## Submit and wait for review

Eligible \$1K and \$2.5K Select store-credit-only payouts complete on submission.
Other payout requests go through review. Requests may be reviewed
automatically or by staff. Frequent requests can take longer to review.
Requests submitted between 12:00 AM and 9:00 AM ET can also take a few extra
hours. If one is still pending after a few minutes, the request panel shows
when to expect an update. While a request is under review,
trading on that funded account is locked. Do not submit another request or try
to change the supporting balance.

Payout History shows the requested amount, cash and boosted store-credit parts,
request and decision dates, current status, and the gross deduction for a paid
payout. A paid payout can also show a certificate action. To earn a case by
sharing a paid payout, use
[Share to Claim](/guides/challenge-lifecycle/billing-and-rewards#share-to-claim)
on Rewards.

> [!NOTE]
>
> Eligibility is checked again when the request is submitted. If account state
> changed, review the updated blocker and try again only after it is resolved.

## Connect a payout leaderboard

Some partner competitions rank traders by how many payouts they have been paid
and how much.
If a partner asks you to connect your MyFundedPerps account, open the connect
link it gives you, sign in, and select **Get Connection Code**. Paste the code
on the partner's site within 10 minutes. Each code works once.

The partner sees only the payouts paid to you in the competition window: when
each was paid and its amount, including any part taken as store credit. It
does not see your email, Rise details, or trading accounts. To stop sharing, open the same connect link and select
**Disconnect**.


# Challenges and Rules
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/challenges-and-rules

Understand evaluation stages, profit targets, loss and drawdown rules, account states, funded progression, and payout-specific requirements.

Every sold challenge is a 1-Step evaluation. Select, Prime, and Signature use
one profit target, a 3% daily loss limit, and static maximum drawdown. Elite
uses one profit target and static maximum drawdown, with a choice of a 3% daily
loss limit (3% DLL) or no daily loss limit (No DLL) when you buy, and has its
own leverage, exposure, allocation, and payout terms; see
[Elite Accounts](/guides/elite-accounts). To see the market exposure caps and
maximum leverage for a specific product and account size, choose them on
[Market Exposure Caps](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/exposure-caps). There is
no minimum trading-day count
or evaluation time limit. All percentages use starting balance, never current
equity.

## Evaluation rules

| Plan | Profit target | Daily loss limit | Static maximum drawdown |
| - | - | - | - |
| Select | 9% | 3% | 3% |
| Prime | 12% | 3% | 5% |
| Signature | 10% | 3% | 6% |
| Elite, 3% DLL | 10% | 3% | 5% |
| Elite, No DLL | 10% | None | 5% |

The profit target and loss rules use account equity, including
open-position profit or loss. On plans with a daily loss limit, daily loss is
measured from start-of-day equity at midnight America/New\_York, including
daylight saving time, with a dollar allowance of 3% of starting balance.

Equity is checked every time the valuation price moves, not only when a trade
settles. A momentary touch counts in both directions: if equity reaches the
profit target for an instant, the evaluation passes, and if it reaches a loss
floor for an instant, the account fails, even if the price moves back right
after. Individual trades and candle wicks are not used, so a wick past a level
does not always reach it.

On Binance, Bybit, and Hyperliquid markets, the loss rules and profit target
value open positions at the order book midpoint (halfway between the best bid
and the best ask). That midpoint can differ from the venue's published mark
price in a fast move.

On mobile, the trade page's **Account** tab shows the equity floor for each
loss rule on your plan. When your account has both a daily loss limit and a
maximum drawdown, the floor your equity would reach first is listed first.
After a losing day that is often the daily loss limit, even though its
allowance is smaller.

### Select prize accounts

\$1K and \$2.5K Select accounts are prizes from giveaways and promotions. They
cannot be bought. They follow the Select rules above. On a \$2.5K
account, for example, the profit target is \$2,725 and the drawdown floor is
\$2,425. Funded payouts on these accounts use a 90/10 split and are paid
entirely as store credit. See
[Payouts](/guides/challenge-lifecycle/payouts#minimum-and-profit-split) for
their minimum request.

## Daily loss reset time

On Select, Prime, Signature, and 3% DLL Elite accounts, the daily loss limit resets at **12:00 a.m. (midnight) New York time**
(`America/New_York`) every day. This is **04:00 UTC during Eastern Daylight
Time (EDT)** and **05:00 UTC during Eastern Standard Time (EST)**. The reset
follows New York's daylight saving changes, so it is not a fixed UTC time.

The new trading day's equity, including open-position profit or loss, becomes
the daily-loss reference. The dollar loss allowance remains a percentage of
starting balance. A daily reset does not reopen a failed account or reset the
maximum loss limit.

The hourly swap fee charged at midnight covers the hour before the reset, so it
counts toward the trading day that just ended. The new day's reference equity
is taken after that fee is charged.

## Static drawdown and the withdrawal lock

The initial MLL floor is starting balance minus the static drawdown allowance.
It does not follow intraday or end-of-day highs. On the first withdrawal from
a Select, Prime, or Signature funded account, the floor locks permanently to
starting balance. It never moves again, including after later withdrawals.

Before this lock, reaching a loss floor breaches the account. After the lock,
equity exactly at the MLL floor is allowed; falling below it breaches. The
daily-loss floor remains inclusive. The dashboard shows both loss floors.
A withdrawal never restores the original buffer.

Elite has no withdrawal lock. An Elite account's MLL floor stays at starting
balance minus 5% for the life of the account, including after withdrawals, and
reaching it breaches the account. See
[Elite Accounts](/guides/elite-accounts#withdrawals-and-your-loss-cushion).

Loss-limit monitoring continues while the account is active, including after
trades settle or hourly swap fees are charged. A confirmed loss-limit breach
changes the account to Failed and stops further trading.

Through the API, a position closed by liquidation reports `close_reason`
`liquidation`, and a position closed because the account reached a final state
reports `system`. Resting exits canceled by a liquidation report
`cancel_reason` `liquidation`.

New Stop Loss orders follow the market's chart source: Last Price for Binance,
Bybit and Hyperliquid, and the venue's mid price for Veranta and Ostium, which
publish no trades. This does not change the price references used for
loss-limit or liquidation checks. Existing orders
keep their original trigger policy until canceled and replaced.

A detected Stop Loss crossing remains valid if the price moves back before
execution. The exit still needs a fresh execution price, so placing a stop does
not guarantee a fill before a loss-limit breach. See
[Take Profit and Stop Loss orders](/guides/trading-guide#add-take-profit-and-stop-loss-orders).

## Account states

Competition trading uses a separate market exposure allowance from your
purchased challenges. Matching competition accounts share a capped allowance
for each market, product, and size. Competition positions do not consume your
purchased-account allowance. See [Asset Exposure Limits](/guides/asset-exposure-limits)
for the calculation and rejection behavior.

| State | Meaning |
| - | - |
| Active | The account can trade, subject to its rules and any temporary locks. |
| Passed | The evaluation reached its passing conditions. Trading stops on the completed evaluation while the next stage is prepared. |
| Failed | A rule breach or authorized account decision ended the account. |
| Funded | The platform issued a funded-stage account after the required review, identity, and agreement flow. |
| Closed or archived | The account remains in history but is no longer active. |

## After an evaluation passes

The account switcher's **Active** filter keeps your passed evaluation visible
until its funded account is issued. The evaluation still shows **Passed** and
cannot take new orders. Once the funded account is issued, use the **Passed**
filter or clear the filters to find the completed evaluation.

A competition account counts as **Active** while the competition runs. To keep
it out of the account switcher, open **Filter** and check **Hide Competition
Accounts**. The account keeps trading and stays in the competition; uncheck the
option to show it again. API sandbox accounts work the same way with **Hide
Sandbox Accounts**.

Follow the action shown on the dashboard. Depending on the account and current
workflow, you may need to complete identity verification, review and sign the
customer agreement, or wait for a funding review before the funded account is
available in the account switcher.

## Maximum active evaluation allocation

You can hold **up to \$100K in active evaluations per model type**. Prime,
Select, Signature, and Elite each have their own allowance, and both Elite
options share the Elite allowance. Checkout adds the original sizes of your
active evaluations in that model, plus the order you are placing, and blocks an
order that would go over \$100K. Exactly \$100K is allowed.

For example, two active \$50K Elite evaluations use the whole Elite allowance,
so another Elite evaluation is blocked, but you can still buy Prime, Select, or
Signature. With \$75K of active Prime evaluations, a \$25K Prime purchase is
allowed and a \$50K one is not. When an evaluation passes or fails, its size
no longer counts, so you can buy again in that model.

Evaluation and funded allocation are separate. Holding \$100K funded in a
model does not reduce the \$100K you can hold in active evaluations of that
model, and it does not raise it either. This limit applies to new purchases
only; it never closes or fails an account you already have.

## Maximum funded allocation

You can hold **up to \$300K in total funded allocation**, with a maximum of
**\$100K per model type**. Prime, Select, Signature, and Elite are separate
model types. Original account sizes add together within each model, even when
you use several smaller accounts. A passed account that would exceed
either limit enters **Funding Review** after identity verification and agreement
completion instead of receiving automatic funding. If a funded account later
fails or closes and the waiting account then fits within both limits, it is
funded automatically.

For example, \$100K in Prime, \$100K in Select, and \$100K in Signature totals \$300K.
Another \$100K Prime account requires Funding Review. Passing an evaluation
never bypasses these limits.
See [Becoming Funded](/guides/challenge-lifecycle/becoming-funded).

## Funded accounts and payouts

The dashboard's Constraints panel shows Payout Rules only for funded accounts.
Evaluation and other non-funded accounts show their applicable trading rules
without the Payout Rules section.

A funded account can submit one payout request per Eastern calendar day, except
on Elite, which has no daily limit. The
minimum is \$100 before the profit split (\$80 to the trader on 80/20, or \$90
on 90/10). Elite minimums are \$50, \$100, \$250, and \$500 before the split
on its \$5K, \$10K, \$25K, and \$50K sizes, and \$30 on a \$1K Elite prize
account; see [Elite Accounts](/guides/elite-accounts#payouts).
A rejected request restores the allowance, and submitted requests
cannot be cancelled. Each account has its own allowance, even when one trader holds
several accounts.

Once your combined payouts across all accounts and model types reach
\$100,000, counted after the profit split, you have graduated and can no
longer purchase new accounts. Your active funded accounts keep trading and
paying out, even above \$100,000. Read
[Lifetime Payout Cap](/guides/challenge-lifecycle/payouts#lifetime-payout-cap).

Payout requests require a flat account and temporarily lock trading while the
request is pending. Read [Payouts](/guides/challenge-lifecycle/payouts) for the
window, gross deduction, and the permanent MLL lock on Select, Prime, and
Signature.

Read the [Challenge Lifecycle](/guides/challenge-lifecycle) for the steps from
purchase through evaluation, funding, and payouts.


# Commissions and Fees
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/commissions-and-fees

Check trading commissions by asset class, calculate entry and exit costs, and understand hourly swap fees.

## What are commissions?

Commissions are the execution fees charged when an order fills. You pay a fee
when opening or increasing a position and another fee when reducing or closing
it. The fee is charged on the amount that fills.

The fee is calculated from **fill notional**, which is the filled asset quantity
multiplied by its execution price. It is based on the full value traded, not
just the margin used to support the position.

## Commission rates

Maker and taker fills use the same rate within each asset class. The market's
asset category determines the rate, regardless of its source venue.

| Asset class | Commission per fill | Fee on a \$10,000 fill |
| - | - | - |
| Crypto | 0.03% | \$3.00 |
| Forex | 0.0025% | \$0.25 |
| Stocks, commodities, and indices | 0.005% | \$0.50 |

[Elite accounts](/guides/elite-accounts#fees) pay 0.001% per fill on
NAS100, SP500, Gold, and WTI Oil.

A maker fill comes from a passive limit order. A taker fill executes against
the opposing side of the market, such as a market order or a limit order that
crosses the spread. Choosing a limit order does not reduce the commission rate.

## Calculate entry and exit costs

**Commission = fill notional × commission percentage ÷ 100.**

For example, opening a crypto position with \$10,000 of fill notional costs
\$3.00 in commission. Closing it with \$10,000 of fill notional costs another
\$3.00, for **\$6.00 total commission**.

At the same \$10,000 entry and exit notionals, the total is \$0.50 for forex or
\$1.00 for stocks, commodities, and indices. If the exit price or quantity
differs, calculate the exit fee from that exit's actual notional.

Changing leverage does not change the commission on an otherwise identical
fill. Increasing the position's notional increases the fee. Commissions reduce
your account balance and therefore the headroom available under your loss rules.

## Hourly swap fees

Swap fees are holding costs in addition to execution commissions. An open
position pays its asset class's daily rate divided into 24 equal hourly
amounts. Both long and short positions pay this charge.

| Asset class | Daily swap rate | Charge frequency |
| - | - | - |
| Crypto | 0.03% | Every hour |
| Forex | 0.005% | Every hour |
| Stocks, commodities, and indices | 0.015% | Every hour |

[Elite accounts](/guides/elite-accounts#fees) pay a 0.01% daily swap rate on
NAS100 and SP500.

Each hourly charge uses the position size held at the hourly boundary and the
applicable mark price. Later size changes do not change that charge, and a
position pays at most one swap fee for the same hourly boundary.
For example, a crypto position worth \$10,000 at an hourly charge incurs \$0.125
(\$10,000 × 0.03% ÷ 24). If that notional remains unchanged for 24 charges, the
total swap fee is \$3.00.

A position closed before the next hourly charge does not pay that charge.
Closing after the boundary still pays the charge for the size held at that
boundary. When the charge is ready, it is applied before your order settles
without waiting for the scheduled hourly processing window. If the charge data
is still incomplete, the order remains pending until it can be settled safely.
During a scheduled TradFi market closure, the latest valid closing mark values
the hourly charge. Crypto uses a fresh mark because it trades continuously.

Venue funding rates do not change your balance or replace the fixed swap fee.

## Reduced Fees

Reduced Fees halves every commission and swap fee on Select, Prime, and
Signature accounts. It covers opening and closing fills, maker and taker fills,
close-outs, and the trading-fee part of a liquidation. Elite accounts are not
eligible and keep their own [Elite rates](/guides/elite-accounts#fees).

| Asset class | Commission per fill | Daily swap rate |
| - | - | - |
| Crypto | 0.015% (standard 0.03%) | 0.015% (standard 0.03%) |
| Forex | 0.00125% (standard 0.0025%) | 0.0025% (standard 0.005%) |
| Stocks, commodities, and indices | 0.0025% (standard 0.005%) | 0.0075% (standard 0.015%) |

Swap fees keep the same hourly schedule: each hourly charge is half the
standard amount. The liquidation penalty is not reduced. Reduced rates apply
to charges made while the account has Reduced Fees. Fees charged earlier are
not adjusted.

### Free launch week

From 9:00 a.m. Eastern Time on October 21, 2026 to 9:00 a.m. Eastern Time on
October 28, 2026, the Reduced Fees add-on was free at checkout on up to 3
Select, Prime, or Signature accounts per customer. The free launch week has
ended; new accounts can add Reduced Fees only as a paid add-on.

An add-on received free works exactly like a paid one: it stays with the
account for its life, including the funded account issued after you pass.

### Buy the add-on

Reduced Fees is an optional paid add-on at checkout for
every Select, Prime, and Signature account size. Read
[Buying a Challenge](/guides/challenge-lifecycle/buying-a-challenge#reduced-fees-add-on)
for pricing. The add-on stays with the account for its life, including the
funded account issued after you pass. Later pricing changes do not remove it
from an account that already has it.

An account with the add-on shows a **Reduced Fees** badge next to its name at
the top of the dashboard, whatever its status. On evaluation accounts, the
**Trading Fees** row under **Constraints** also shows that the account pays
50% less. No badge means the account pays standard fees.

## Other trading costs and rules

The examples above cover commissions and swap fees. Execution prices can also
be affected by the spread and slippage. Read the
[Trading Guide](/guides/trading-guide) for order execution and slippage details,
and [Breaches and Next Steps](/guides/challenge-lifecycle/breaches-and-next-steps)
for liquidation and close-out consequences.

Read [Challenges and Rules](/guides/challenges-and-rules#daily-loss-reset-time)
for the daily loss reset time, or [Payouts](/guides/challenge-lifecycle/payouts)
for payout windows and the store-credit option.


# Competitions
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/competitions

How the Competitions page shows the competition running now, what is scheduled next, and the results of every finished competition.

## What the page shows

[Competitions](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/competitions) lists every public trading competition in three parts:

| Section | What you see |
| - | - |
| **Current competition** | The competition running now: its countdown, trading window, participants, first-place prize, and the top of its leaderboard. When nothing is running, a competition that finished in the last three days shows its standings here instead, with each trader's return, the number of winners, and the top return. If you took part, your final rank, the top percentage you finished in, your return, and your prize appear there too. |
| **Upcoming** | Competitions that are scheduled or open for registration, soonest first, each with its first-place prize and a countdown to the next step (registration opening, trading starting, or registration closing, whichever comes first). |
| **Past Competitions** | Finished competitions with final standings. The most recent one shows its full prize structure and top standings; earlier ones show their top three traders. |

Competition dates and times show in your own time zone, followed by its abbreviation, such as PDT or SGT.

Standings on the Competitions page refresh on the same schedule as each competition's own leaderboard, and the leaderboard header shows when they were last updated.

## Joining and trading

Select a competition's name, **Join Competition**, **View Competition**, or **View Results** to open its own page. Joining, the full leaderboard, prizes, and rules all live on that page, and **Competitions** at the top of it returns you to the list.

If you have already joined the current competition, the Competitions page shows your rank, equity, and whether your rank wins a prize. **Trade Now** opens your competition account.

Some competitions require a linked X account. On those, the competition page shows **Link X Account** instead of **Join Competition** until you connect one. Linking takes you to X to approve the connection and then back to the competition page, where you can join. You can also connect X under **Connected Accounts** in [Profile settings](/settings/profile). Each X account can be linked to only one MyFundedPerps account.

Some competitions open registration before trading starts and create your competition account when trading begins. If you join one of these early, the competition page confirms you're registered and your account appears automatically within a few minutes of the start. You can't trade until then.

When a competition requires an eligible residence country, an approved
country exception applies only to that country on your account. You must
still meet the competition's other entry requirements.

On a competition that checks your residence country, the competition page
shows **Complete Account Details** instead of **Join Competition** until you
finish your account details. Completing them brings you back to the
competition page, where you can join.

## Disqualification

Breaking a competition's rules can lead to disqualification. A disqualified entry leaves the leaderboard and can't win a prize.

When an entry is disqualified, its competition account is closed:

* Open orders are cancelled.
* Open positions are closed at the market price.
* Your other accounts are not affected.

If your competition account is still open after your entry ends, it can only reduce or close positions. New trades that open or add to a position are rejected with a message that your competition entry has ended.

If a disqualification is reversed, your entry returns to the leaderboard and your competition account reopens. Orders and positions closed at disqualification are not restored, so the account starts again with no open positions.

> [!WARNING]
>
> If your MyFundedPerps account is banned, or banned from competitions, your
> active competition entries are disqualified and their competition accounts are
> closed. A winner whose account is banned, or banned from competitions, when
> results are finalized does not receive a prize.

## Provisional and final results

A competition's standings stay provisional for a short time after trading closes while closing scores settle. The page labels them **Provisional Standings** until results are final, then **Final Standings**. Prizes follow the final standings.

For up to six minutes after a competition ends, a ranked competition account can't place market orders while its closing score is recorded. Orders placed in that window are rejected with a message saying so. Your stop-loss and take-profit orders stay active. Try again once the window ends.

A prize shown as **To be determined** has not been announced yet. Its page updates when the prize is set, which happens before the competition ends.

For the rules, prizes, and daily case draws of the launch competition, see [Launch competition](/guides/launch-competition). For account paths and the free reset in the October Competition, see [October competition](/guides/october-competition). For entry tasks, doubled caps, and resets in the MyFundedPerps Weekly Blitz, see [MyFundedPerps Weekly Blitz](/guides/weekly-blitz).


# Copy Trading Guide
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/copy-trading-guide

Create a same-owner copy-trading group, choose a lead and followers, set risk multipliers, and understand independent follower checks.

Native copy trading coordinates orders across active challenge accounts owned
by the same MyFundedPerps user. Each group has one lead account and one or
more followers.

## Before you start

Every account in the group must be active, unarchived, and yours. An account can
belong to only one enabled group. Evaluation accounts can follow either stage,
but a funded account cannot follow an evaluation lead. Competition accounts
cannot lead or follow: the Competition Rules prohibit copying trades into or
out of a competition account. A group saved before this rule no longer copies
to or from a competition account, and you can still disable it.

> [!WARNING]
>
> Follower accounts are locked against manual trading while their group is
> enabled. Manage the strategy from the lead account, or disable the group to
> unlock followers for manual trading right away. When an account starts
> following, its open orders, including stop loss and take profit orders, are
> canceled, and its TWAP/VWAP schedules stop. Its positions stay open.

## Create a group

**1. Open Copy Trading settings**

Go to [Settings → Copy
Trading](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/settings?section=copy-trading).

**2. Choose the lead**

Select the account whose eligible orders should be copied.

**3. Add followers**

Choose active accounts that are not already part of another enabled group.

**4. Set each multiplier**

Use the minus and plus buttons to choose how much of the lead's
balance-adjusted quantity each follower should use. Each press changes the
multiplier by `0.05×`.

**5. Review and save**

Confirm the group composition and save it before placing lead orders.

## How follower size is calculated

Opening and increasing quantities are normalized by the lead and follower
starting balances, then adjusted by the follower multiplier. `1×` follows the
lead's relative size; lower values reduce it and higher values increase it. The
available range is `0.1×` through `2×`, in `0.05×` steps, so you can match
each follower to its own loss limits (for example `0.4×` or `0.85×`).

For example, with a \$50,000 lead:

| Follower | Multiplier | Lead opens 1 BTC | Follower opens |
| - | - | - | - |
| \$50,000 | `1×` | 1 BTC | 1 BTC |
| \$100,000 | `1×` | 1 BTC | 2 BTC |
| \$100,000 | `1.5×` | 1 BTC | 3 BTC |
| \$25,000 | `0.5×` | 1 BTC | 0.25 BTC |

At `1×`, every follower uses the same share of its balance as the lead. Use
**Try An Order** in Copy Trading settings to see the margin each account would
need for a lead order and which followers would reject it.

Reductions preserve the fraction of the lead position being reduced. The
platform rounds copied quantity down to the market's size step rather than
rounding a follower into more risk.

### Minimum order value

Every copied order must still meet the platform's minimum order value (quantity
times price), currently \$10, on the follower. A follower that is much smaller
than its lead can fall below it even when the lead's order is accepted. For
example, a \$1,000 follower of a \$25,000 lead at `1×` copies 4% of each order,
so a \$105 lead order becomes about \$4, and rounding down to the market's size
step can make it smaller still. That follower skips the order, and it also
skips the lead's later reductions and close for that position because it has
nothing to close.

For each follower smaller than its lead, Copy Trading settings shows the lead
order value below which that follower can't copy. To copy smaller lead orders,
raise that follower's multiplier or use larger lead orders.

A copied order uses the lead's leverage unless it is above the follower's own
maximum for that market. In that case, the copy uses the follower's maximum
instead. If the follower already holds the market, the copy keeps that
position's margin mode (cross or isolated).

Reversing a lead position reverses each follower too. The follower's whole
position on that side closes, and a new position opens on the other side at
the follower's normal copy size.
If the follower's position changes before its copy fills, for example because
one of its take profit orders filled first, the copy is resized so the follower
still ends on the new side at that same size. This also applies if the follower
was flat or already held the new side when the lead reversed. An existing
position on the new side keeps its size plus the copied opening size.

## Isolated margin

When you add or remove margin on an isolated lead position, each follower's
isolated position in the same market and direction is adjusted too. The
amount is scaled to the follower's position size, so every account carries
the same margin per unit and the liquidation prices stay in line. A follower
adds only what its free balance allows and removes only what it can release
safely. Follower accounts cannot adjust margin on their own while they follow
a lead.

## Trigger policy across updates

A copied order keeps the originating order's trigger policy, including when a
copy or an attached TP/SL is created after a platform update. Existing orders
keep their policy when you edit their price or size. A canceled order's new
replacement uses the current policy. See
[Take Profit and Stop Loss orders](/guides/trading-guide#add-take-profit-and-stop-loss-orders).

## Market order execution

Copied market orders wait for the lead market order to fill. If the lead
rejects or expires without filling, its pending market copies are canceled
without opening follower positions or charging trading fees.

Resting limit and trigger orders, including TP/SL exits, continue to execute
independently on each account. Their fills can occur in a different order.

## Independent follower checks

If a copied reversal is resized because the follower's position changed,
its collateral requirement is checked again before execution. It can be
rejected if the follower can no longer afford the intended position. A copy
can be resized up to three times. If the position changes again before filling,
the copy is rejected instead of continuing to retry.

Every follower order is validated against that follower's own:

* available collateral and current positions;
* challenge and funded-account rules;
* market and position limits;
* allowed stage pairing and current account status.

A follower can reject or reduce a copied instruction without blocking the lead
or other followers. Follower accounts can end with different fills, positions,
and performance from the lead.

After you submit an opening order, close, or reverse a position from the lead account,
the **Copy Results** panel briefly reports whether each follower copied the
instruction. A follower result does not change whether the lead instruction
succeeds.

## Monitor your followers

The **Accounts** tab under the trade chart lists every account in a group
together: the lead first, marked **Leader**, then each account marked
**Follower**, indented under the lead. On a phone, open **Positions** and then
**Accounts**: each group appears in its own box. Sorting a column reorders the
accounts freely and removes the indent.

Select an account's **Open Positions** count to see that account's open
positions (market, side, size, entry price, and unrealized PnL) without
switching to it. This view is read-only. Selecting a follower would make it
your active account, where manual trading is locked, so use this view to check
followers while you keep trading from the lead.

When a follower's open positions no longer match the lead's, its account number
is followed by **Differs from leader**. This can happen after a copy was
rejected or reduced to zero by a follower check. Expand the follower to see what differs:

| Message | Meaning |
| - | - |
| **Not copied** | The lead holds this position and the follower holds nothing in that market. |
| **Not held by the leader** | The follower holds a position in a market the lead does not. |
| **Opposite side to the leader** | Both accounts hold the market, on different sides. |

The comparison checks markets and sides only. Position sizes are expected to
differ because each follower's size is scaled to its own balance and multiplier.
The note appears only after a mismatch has lasted a few seconds, so the short
delay between the lead's fill and the copied fills does not trigger it.

### Loss limits in the Accounts tab

On a desktop, the **Accounts** tab also shows how close each account is to its
loss limits:

* **Daily Loss Remaining** and **Max Drawdown Remaining** show the dollars left
  before the account reaches that limit, next to the full limit, with a bar for
  the share already used. The bar turns amber once half of the limit is used
  and red once 80% is used. **No Limit** means the account's plan does not
  have that rule. A dash means the account is no longer active.
* **Breach At** applies to accounts holding the market on screen. It shows the
  price of that market at which the account would reach whichever loss limit
  it hits first, and how far that is from the current mark price. It uses the
  same calculation as the chart's loss-limit lines. Accounts without a position
  in that market show **No Position** with the market name.

A summary line above each group shows how many followers it has, the follower
with the smallest share of a loss limit left (**Tightest**), how many followers
differ from the lead, and the group's combined unrealized PnL. The summary is
hidden while the table is sorted by a column. Phone account cards do not show
these loss-limit details.

### Follower loss limits on the lead chart

A follower can hit its own loss limit before the lead does, for example when it
has a larger multiplier or has already lost more today. The lead account's
trade chart shows where each follower would breach on the market you are
viewing:

* Each follower is placed at the price where it would reach whichever loss
  limit it hits first: its daily loss limit (**DLL**) or its maximum drawdown
  (**MLL**). Like the lead's own loss-limit line, the price includes the
  estimated closing fee and maximum slippage and assumes the follower's other
  open positions stay at their current prices.
* The follower that would breach first gets a full line, labelled with its rule
  and account number, for example **DLL · FP-12345678**. It appears only when
  that follower would breach before the lead.
* Every other follower appears as a short tick on the price axis. Nearby ticks
  merge into one counted tick, and followers beyond the visible price range
  are summarized as **+N Below** or **+N Above**. Hover or tap a tick to see
  each account's rule and price.
* **N Not Mirrored** counts followers that hold no position in this market,
  for example because a copy was rejected. Hover or tap it to see which
  accounts.
* While you size an order in the ticket, the follower levels move to where
  they would be after the order fills and is copied (**Draft DLL**), using
  each follower's size and free margin.
* A lead stop loss placed beyond a follower's level turns amber and shows
  **Past** followed by the account number, because that stop would trigger
  only after the follower had already breached.

These levels are estimates. A price gap or a different follower fill can
breach an account at another price. Turning off **Loss Limit Line** in
**Settings > Trading > Chart Lines** hides them along with your own loss-limit
line.

## Stop or change a group

Disable a group before changing its lead or deleting it. When a lead passes,
fails, or is closed, the group stops automatically: resting follower orders are
canceled, follower positions are closed under the platform's terminal-close
policy, and manual trading unlocks only after cleanup completes. A copied order
still executing when the group stops is rejected with reason
`copy_lead_stopped`.

Editing an enabled group does not touch followers you keep at the same
multiplier: their copied orders, including stop loss and take profit orders,
stay in place and keep executing. Copied orders are canceled only on followers
you remove, followers whose multiplier you change, and every follower when you
turn the group off. Their positions stay open without those exits. Removed
followers unlock for manual trading. A re-scaled follower stays locked and
gets new exits only when the lead places new orders, which copy at the new
multiplier. The settings
form warns before a save would cancel copied orders, and the save confirmation
reports how many were canceled.

Stopped history remains visible until you remove it. See the
[Copy Trading settings reference](/settings/copy-trading) for control-by-control
details.

## Inspect follower access through the API

API integrations can call `GET /v1/accounts/{account_id}/trading-policy` with a
read or trade credential to inspect `copy_follower_locked` before sending a
manual instruction. A locked follower rejects manual entries, reductions,
closes, and protective-order changes.

Follower orders that copy trading canceled (because the account started
following a lead, the lead order changed or ended, the group was disabled or
changed, or the copy could no longer be applied) report `cancel_reason` `copy`
in API order responses. Orders the
follower canceled themselves report `user`.

The account's `copy_stop` record exposes `stopped_at`, `completed_at`,
`acknowledged_at`, and `reason`. It remains available after its group is deleted,
so a reconnecting client can still explain why copying stopped. Unset timestamps
are null; the record itself is null when the account has no stop notice. The API
does not expose a lead account ID outside the credential's account access.

The policy also reports `copy_scope_blocked` when an enabled group led by the
selected account contains a member the credential cannot access. Group coverage
requires the same live or sandbox environment and access to every configured
member. This coverage also applies when setting isolated margin on a lead
position, because that adjustment reaches its followers. Member IDs outside
the credential boundary are not returned. Stale
working copies from older configurations are checked separately for each
modification or cancellation.

This is an advisory snapshot. The trading engine checks the current lock again
when an instruction is placed or settled. See [Account trading policy](/trading-policy)
for the other restrictions and refresh guidance.


# Elite Accounts
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/elite-accounts

Elite plan sizes, prices, and daily loss limit options, evaluation and Funded rules, leverage and exposure caps, reduced fees, funded allocation limits, and payouts.

Elite is a 1-Step evaluation with a static maximum loss limit, no consistency
rule, and boosted leverage on NAS100, SP500, US30, gold, and oil. It comes in \$5K, \$10K,
\$25K, and \$50K account sizes, and every size has two options: **3% DLL**,
which adds a 3% daily loss limit at a lower price, or **No DLL**, which has no
daily loss limit. Passing leads to a Funded Elite account with the same
rules. Open the
[challenge selector](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/#pricing) and choose the
**Elite** tab to buy.

## Sizes and prices

| Detail | Elite \$5K | Elite \$10K | Elite \$25K | Elite \$50K |
| - | - | - | - | - |
| Starting balance | \$5,000 | \$10,000 | \$25,000 | \$50,000 |
| One-time price, 3% DLL | \$49 | \$95 | \$249 | \$495 |
| One-time price, No DLL | \$99 | \$194 | \$482 | \$965 |
| With 90/10 upgrade, 3% DLL | \$59 | \$114 | \$299 | \$594 |
| With 90/10 upgrade, No DLL | \$119 | \$233 | \$578 | \$1,158 |
| Funded accounts at the funded cap | 20 | 10 | 4 | 2 |

These are list prices. Checkout shows the current price and any discount before
you pay. The 90/10 upgrade is optional and chosen at checkout; its rows show the
total price with the upgrade. The funded count row assumes every account is the
same size; see [Funded allocation](#funded-allocation) for mixed sizes.

You can hold up to **\$100,000 of active Elite evaluations**, in any mix of
sizes and both DLL options, within the
[per-order account limits](#accounts-per-order). Checkout blocks an Elite order
that would go over it. When an Elite evaluation passes or fails, its size no
longer counts. See
[Maximum active evaluation allocation](/guides/challenges-and-rules#maximum-active-evaluation-allocation).
Elite No DLL purchases also have a limit of \$250,000 in total account size in
any rolling 7-day period; see [No DLL purchase limit](#no-dll-purchase-limit).
An Elite No DLL order must fit both limits. Funded Elite accounts have their
own limit; see
[Funded allocation](#funded-allocation).

## No DLL purchase limit

Elite No DLL evaluations have a weekly purchase limit of $250,000 in total
account size per rolling 7-day period. The limit covers all Elite No DLL
account sizes combined, so you could buy ten $25K accounts, five $50K accounts,
or any mix totaling $250,000 or less within any 7 days. An order that brings
the total to exactly \$250,000 is allowed.

* The limit counts account size, not price or number of accounts.
* Each purchase counts for 7 days (168 hours) from the time you bought it. You
  can buy again as earlier purchases roll out of the window; there is no fixed
  weekly reset.
* Failed, reset, or deleted accounts still count until 7 days after their
  purchase.
* Refunded purchases still count until 7 days after their purchase. A refund
  does not return any of the limit.
* Failed or abandoned payments do not count. If a payment marked failed later
  goes through, that purchase counts for 7 days from when it completed.
* Elite 3% DLL accounts are unaffected and stay under their usual limits.

If an order would go over the limit, checkout does not take payment. It shows
how much you bought in the last 7 days, how much remains, a countdown, and the
exact date and time in your timezone when the selected order fits. It also
offers a **Try Elite 3% DLL** button that switches checkout to the same size
with the 3% daily loss limit. Most traders buy well under this amount in a
typical week and will not notice any difference.

## DLL options

Elite pricing cards start with **3% DLL** enabled and keep that option until
you change it. Turn off the daily loss limit toggle on a card to choose
**No DLL** for that size. You can also choose the option at checkout. The two options
are identical except for the daily loss limit:

| Option | Daily loss limit | Everything else |
| - | - | - |
| 3% DLL | 3% of starting balance, measured from the day's starting equity | Same Elite rules on this page |
| No DLL | None | Same Elite rules on this page |

A 3% DLL account follows the same 3% rule as Select, Prime, and Signature:

* The floor is the day's starting equity, including open-position profit or
  loss, minus 3% of the starting balance. On an Elite \$50K account the
  allowance is \$1,500.
* Equity that reaches the floor breaches the account, fails it, and closes its
  positions.
* The day boundary matches the other plans; see
  [Challenges and Rules](/guides/challenges-and-rules#daily-loss-reset-time).
* The rule applies in both the evaluation and Funded stages, together with
  the static maximum loss limit.

> [!WARNING]
>
> The option is part of the account you buy. You cannot add or remove the daily
> loss limit after purchase.

### Elite prize accounts

Elite accounts can also be won in giveaways. A won Elite account follows the
same Elite rules as a bought No DLL account of its size, with no daily loss
limit. Giveaways can also award a
\$1K Elite account, which cannot be bought. On a \$1K Elite account the profit
target is \$100, the maximum loss limit is \$50, and the minimum payout
request is \$30 before the split (\$24 to you on 80/20).

## Evaluation rules

| Rule | Elite \$5K | Elite \$10K | Elite \$25K | Elite \$50K |
| - | - | - | - | - |
| Profit target (10%) | \$500 | \$1,000 | \$2,500 | \$5,000 |
| Maximum loss limit (5%) | \$250 | \$500 | \$1,250 | \$2,500 |
| Static loss threshold | \$4,750 | \$9,500 | \$23,750 | \$47,500 |
| Drawdown model | Static | Static | Static | Static |
| Daily loss limit, 3% DLL | \$150 | \$300 | \$750 | \$1,500 |
| Daily loss limit, No DLL | None | None | None | None |
| Consistency rule | None | None | None | None |

The profit target and the maximum loss limit (MLL) use account equity,
including open-position profit or loss. There is no minimum trading-day count
or evaluation time limit.

The plan adds no evaluation rules beyond this table. Platform-wide rules still
apply, including the [trading policy](/trading-policy), prohibited trading
activity, account inactivity, market exposure caps, and the platform terms.

### How static drawdown works

The loss threshold is the starting balance minus the MLL, and it is fixed for
the life of the account. It does not trail profits, intraday highs, or
end-of-day highs.

For example, an Elite \$25K account has a \$1,250 MLL, so its loss threshold is
\$23,750. If equity grows to \$27,000, the threshold stays at \$23,750, leaving
\$3,250 of room. Equity that reaches \$23,750 breaches the account, fails it,
and closes its positions.

## Leverage and exposure

Elite accounts use boosted leverage on NAS100, SP500, US30, gold, and oil. Each cap
is a multiple of the account's starting balance and applies to each account
separately, in both the evaluation and Funded stages:

| Markets | Maximum leverage | Elite \$5K exposure | Elite \$10K exposure | Elite \$25K exposure | Elite \$50K exposure |
| - | - | - | - | - | - |
| NAS100, SP500 | 40x | \$200,000 | \$400,000 | \$1,000,000 | \$2,000,000 |
| US30 | 25x | \$125,000 | \$250,000 | \$625,000 | \$1,250,000 |
| Gold (XAU) | 20x | \$100,000 | \$200,000 | \$500,000 | \$1,000,000 |
| Oil (CL, BRENTOIL) | 10x | \$50,000 | \$100,000 | \$250,000 | \$500,000 |

* Exposure is the full value of your open positions in that group, long plus
  short. NAS100 and SP500 share the indices cap, US30 has its own cap, and CL
  and BRENTOIL share the oil cap. Positions still open on the retiring GOLD
  market count toward the gold cap together with XAU.
* The account's total exposure across every market is capped at 40x its
  starting balance.
* Every other market keeps its normal maximum leverage, shown on the
  [Market Exposure Caps](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/exposure-caps) page.
  Choose **Elite** and your account size there to see the current group caps,
  account exposure limit, and market caps for that size.
* [Market exposure caps](/guides/asset-exposure-limits) still apply on top of
  the Elite caps. Each Elite account has its own market exposure cap: your
  other Elite accounts of the same size do not share or use up its capacity.

The order ticket shows the limit for the selected market as **Account
Exposure Cap**, and the leverage selector goes up to the Elite maximum for that
market. An order that would exceed the leverage or an exposure cap is
rejected. Reducing or closing a position is always allowed.

## Fees

Elite accounts pay reduced fees on four markets, in both the evaluation and
Funded stages:

| Markets | Elite commission per fill | Elite daily swap rate | Standard commission | Standard daily swap rate |
| - | - | - | - | - |
| NAS100, SP500 | 0.001% | 0.01% | 0.005% | 0.015% |
| Gold, WTI Oil | 0.001% | 0.015% | 0.005% | 0.015% |

* On a \$10,000 fill in NAS100, SP500, Gold, or WTI Oil, the Elite commission
  is \$0.10 instead of \$0.50.
* A NAS100 or SP500 position worth \$10,000 pays \$1.00 in swap fees over 24
  hourly charges, instead of \$1.50.
* Every other market, including other indices, other commodities such as
  silver and Brent, crypto, forex, and stocks, uses the standard rates.

Read [Commissions and Fees](/guides/commissions-and-fees) for how commissions
and hourly swap fees are calculated.

## Accounts per order

One order can include up to 10 accounts at \$5K or \$10K, up to 4 at \$25K, or
up to 2 at \$50K, all of the same size and option. You can place as many
orders as you like.

## Funded

Passing the evaluation leads to a Funded Elite account. It keeps the same
rules as the evaluation, without the profit target:

* the same starting balance;
* the same 5% static MLL and loss threshold, which does **not** move after a
  withdrawal;
* the same leverage and exposure caps;
* the same daily loss limit option: a 3% daily loss limit on a 3% DLL
  account, or none on a No DLL account;
* no consistency rule.

Funded accounts use simulated capital and simulated execution, like every
funded account.

### High-impact news restriction

The high-impact news restriction applies to Funded Elite accounts. During
the evaluation, news trading is not restricted.

| Time from the release | What you can do |
| - | - |
| More than 10 minutes before | Trade normally. A position already open can be held through the release. |
| 10 minutes to 2 minutes before | No new exposure in the affected market: no new positions, no adding, and no reversing. |
| 2 minutes before to 2 minutes after | No manual trades of any kind. Close or reduce a position before this window if you want to be flat. |

Restricted events are every event classified as high impact (red folder) on
the economic calendar, including FOMC decisions and statements, CPI, PPI,
Non-Farm Payrolls, GDP, Retail Sales, employment reports, PCE inflation, and
ECB, BOE, and BOJ rate decisions. For individual stocks and equity perpetuals,
the company's earnings announcements are restricted too. Read the full policy
in the FAQ under
[Is news trading allowed on funded?](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/faq#faq-p570qnsme0gdba0bvtmgxnpzj98e2epf).
Profit from trades that break the restriction can be excluded during payout
review.

### No Live stage

Elite has no Live stage and no promotion to live trading. Elite accounts
remain Funded.

## Funded allocation

Each customer can hold up to **\$100,000 of active Funded Elite
allocation**, summed by the original starting size of each funded Elite
account across every size and both options. That allows 20 × \$5K,
10 × \$10K, 4 × \$25K, 2 × \$50K, or any mix that totals \$100,000 or less. Profits, losses, and withdrawals do not
change the allocation an account uses. A funded account that fails or is
closed stops using allocation.

Elite is its own model type, so Elite allocation also counts toward the
[\$300K maximum funded allocation](/guides/challenges-and-rules#maximum-funded-allocation)
across all models.

Active Elite evaluations are limited separately from funded Elite allocation,
so you can pass more Elite evaluations than can be funded at once. When a
passed evaluation would take
your Elite funded allocation above \$100,000, or your total above \$300,000,
it keeps its **Passed** status and enters **Funding Review** after identity
verification and agreement signing, instead of being funded automatically.
Review does not guarantee funding, and any approval must still fit within both
limits. If a funded account fails or closes while the evaluation waits and it
then fits within both limits, it is funded automatically. See [Becoming Funded](/guides/challenge-lifecycle/becoming-funded).

## Payouts

| Payout term | Elite \$5K | Elite \$10K | Elite \$25K | Elite \$50K |
| - | - | - | - | - |
| Profit split | 80/20, or 90/10 | 80/20, or 90/10 | 80/20, or 90/10 | 80/20, or 90/10 |
| When you can request | On demand | On demand | On demand | On demand |
| Profit you can request | All profit | All profit | All profit | All profit |
| Minimum, before the split | \$50 | \$100 | \$250 | \$500 |
| Minimum you receive | \$40 (\$45 on 90/10) | \$80 (\$90 on 90/10) | \$200 (\$225 on 90/10) | \$400 (\$450 on 90/10) |

These payout terms are the same for the 3% DLL and No DLL options. The split is
80% to you and 20% to MyFundedPerps, or 90% to you with the 90/10 upgrade.

* **On demand:** you can request from your first day funded. Elite has no
  waiting period, minimum trading days, consistency requirement, or profit
  target before a request, and no daily request limit: you can request again
  as soon as your previous request finishes. The account must be flat with no
  pending request. See [Payouts](/guides/challenge-lifecycle/payouts#clear-the-payout-gates).
* **Requesting is not payment:** every request is reviewed, and trading on the
  account is locked while it is pending. Review and delivery take time, so a
  request does not mean an immediate transfer.
* **All profit:** you can request all of your profit above the starting
  balance. Profit you leave in the account when a payout is approved stays
  available, so you can request it in a later payout. For example, an Elite
  \$25K account at \$27,000 that withdraws \$1,000 gross keeps \$1,000 of
  profit that it can request next time.
* **Minimum:** the minimum is measured before the split, as the gross amount
  deducted from the account. On \$25K, a \$250 gross minimum pays you \$200.
* **90/10 upgrade:** choose it at checkout to receive 90% of each payout
  instead of 80%. It is part of the account you buy and cannot be added to an
  existing account.

Payouts remain subject to plan terms, eligibility, and review.

### Withdrawals and your loss cushion

A payout deducts its full gross amount from the balance, which reduces the room
above the loss threshold by the same amount. The threshold itself does not
move.

For example, an Elite \$25K account at \$27,000 equity with no open positions
has \$2,000 of profit and \$3,250 of room above its \$23,750 threshold.
Requesting all of it deducts \$2,000 gross and pays you \$1,600 (\$1,800 with
the 90/10 upgrade). The balance
returns to \$25,000, the threshold stays at \$23,750, and the room above it
returns to the original \$1,250.

Select, Prime, and Signature work differently: their loss threshold locks to
the starting balance on the first withdrawal. Elite never has that lock.

On a 3% DLL account, a withdrawal also never lowers the daily loss floor below
where it started that day. See
[Daily loss limit after a withdrawal](/guides/challenge-lifecycle/payouts#daily-loss-limit-after-a-withdrawal).

### Lifetime payout cap

Elite payouts count toward the
[\$100,000 lifetime payout cap](/guides/challenge-lifecycle/payouts#lifetime-payout-cap)
per user, combined across every plan and counted after the profit split. At
\$100,000 you have graduated and can no longer purchase new accounts, while
your active funded accounts keep paying out. This is separate from the
\$100,000 Elite funded allocation cap: the payout cap decides when you
graduate, while the funded cap limits the total
starting size of your active Funded Elite accounts.


# Getting Started
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/getting-started

Choose a challenge, understand its terms, open the trading workspace, and place your first simulated perpetual-futures trade.

MyFundedPerps combines real market data with simulated accounts, orders,
fills, positions, and balances. Nothing in the trading workspace places an
order on an external exchange.

The platform is operated by Funding Perpetuals Holdings, Inc., d/b/a
MyFundedPerpetuals.

## 1. Open MyFundedPerps

Open [MyFundedPerps](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/). You can choose a challenge
before signing in. Your profile, challenge accounts, settings, purchase history,
and trading activity belong to the account you verify at checkout.

**Sign In**, **Sign Up**, and the language picker are
in the header on every screen size, including phones.

## 2. Choose a challenge

Open the [challenge selector](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/#pricing) and compare
the available formats. Before checkout, review:

* account size and starting balance;
* profit target;
* maximum daily loss, if the plan has one, and static maximum drawdown;
* payout minimums and request rules;
* purchased profit split, price, discount, and total.

These values can differ by plan. The terms shown for the selected challenge are
the authoritative terms for that purchase.

Select **Start Challenge** to open checkout with your selected plan. If you are
signed out, enter your email and verify the six-digit code on the checkout
page. New and returning customers use the same email flow. If your account
requires a passkey, complete that verification too. Cloudflare may first ask
you to complete a browser security check.

On smaller screens, select **Order Summary** to expand the challenge details.
The selected challenge and base fee remain visible while the summary is collapsed.

New customers first enter their first and last name, residence country, and full
residential address. If your residence country is Afghanistan, India,
Indonesia, or Myanmar and your government issued ID shows a single name, leave
the last name blank. Confirm that your name is correct and matches your government
issued ID, then select **Continue** to choose your username in a separate step.
This step shows only your username, which identifies your public profile.
Use **Back** to review your address before finishing signup. Signup does not ask for your date of
birth; this is verified through Sumsub during identity verification. Customers with a completed profile skip this
step. Checkout retains your selected plan, discount or affiliate code, and
profit-split add-on through verification. Review the final total and billing
details before choosing a payment method.

Your residence country must be eligible for MyFundedPerps. If your account has
an approved country exception, that country is available during signup and
purchases. Always enter your actual residence; a country exception does not
replace identity verification or payment-provider requirements.

## 3. Find the account on your dashboard

After a completed purchase or account grant, open the
[dashboard](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/dashboard). Use the account switcher
to choose the challenge account you want to inspect or trade.

The dashboard shows account stage, status, balance/equity, rule progress, and
the next step in the challenge. Read [Challenges and Rules](/guides/challenges-and-rules)
before taking risk.

To tell your accounts apart, select the pencil button next to the account name
on the dashboard and enter a name of up to 32 characters. The name applies only
to that account and appears wherever you pick an account, including the account
switcher and the trading workspace. Leave the field blank, or choose
**Use Default Name**, to restore the original name.

Renaming never changes the account number. Hover over or focus the account name
to see its account number, or use the copy button beside the number in the line
under the name. Include the account number when you contact support.

## 4. Open the trading workspace

Go to [Trade](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/trade) and choose a market. Before
submitting an order, check:

1. the active challenge account;
2. market and direction;
3. order type and price conditions;
4. size unit, quantity, margin mode, and leverage;
5. attached Take Profit or Stop Loss instructions;
6. the order summary and estimated impact.

> [!WARNING]
>
> A platform safeguard can reject an order, but it does not replace your own
> risk plan. A challenge can still fail when account rules are breached.

## 5. Monitor and manage the position

Use the position and order panels to review open exposure, resting orders,
realized results, and account equity. Closing or reducing a position is also an
order and remains subject to current market conditions and platform rules.

Continue with the [Trading Guide](/guides/trading-guide), or configure your
[Trading settings](/settings/trading) before placing more orders.

To follow the account from evaluation through funding and payouts, read the
[Challenge Lifecycle](/guides/challenge-lifecycle).


# Glossary
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/glossary

Definitions for perpetual futures, challenge rules, trading controls, copy trading, and MyFundedPerps account states.

## Trading

**Asset unit**\
Quantity expressed in units of the market's underlying asset rather than USD.

**Cross margin**\
A margin mode where eligible account collateral supports cross-margin positions
together.

**Fill**\
The executed portion of an order. A fill has a quantity and execution price and
changes the simulated account position or realized result.

**Isolated margin**\
A margin mode where margin is managed for an individual position.

**Leverage**\
The ratio between position notional and assigned margin. More leverage magnifies
the effect of price movement relative to margin.

**Limit order**\
An order that rests at its limit price and fills its full size at that price once
the market reaches it. A limit placed at or through the current market fills
right away as a market order, never worse than its limit.

**Mark price**\
The venue's published reference price, shown next to the market name on the
trade page. Ostium and Veranta positions are valued at it. Binance, Bybit, and
Hyperliquid positions are valued for the loss rules and profit target at the
book midpoint instead: the average of the best bid and best ask. That midpoint
can differ from the mark price in a fast move.

**Market order**\
An instruction that executes immediately at top-of-book with maximum adverse
slippage capped against the mark by a size-based tier. Book prices inside the
cap are preserved; the fill is never better than the mark. A triggered Stop
Loss or Take Profit that fills at its touch quote can fill outside the cap when
the spread is wide.

**Notional value**\
The position or order quantity multiplied by price, before leverage converts it
to a margin requirement.

**Perpetual future**\
A derivatives contract without a fixed expiry date. MyFundedPerps simulates
trading these markets; it does not place exchange orders for the trader.

**Slippage**\
The difference between a reference or expected price and the final average
execution price. A position's **Slippage** total compares every fill with the
market reference (the midpoint for order-book markets) at execution. For a filled Stop Loss, Take Profit, or other triggered order,
your history shows **Slippage vs trigger**: the fill price compared with the
order's trigger price, multiplied by its size. A positive value means the fill
was worse than the trigger, and a negative value means it was better.

**Stop Loss / Take Profit (SL / TP)**\
Exit instructions triggered when a configured price condition is reached.

## Challenges and accounts

**Challenge account**\
A simulated account governed by a purchased or granted challenge plan.

**Equity**\
Account value including the effect of open positions at current marks.

**Evaluation**\
The stage in which a trader works toward the plan's target while respecting its
rules.

**Funded account**\
The post-evaluation simulated account issued after the required review,
identity, and agreement flow.

**Maximum daily loss**\
A plan rule limiting account loss relative to its daily reference.

**Maximum drawdown**\
The largest permitted decline below starting balance. Every current plan uses a
static maximum drawdown.

**Profit target**\
The gain required to pass an evaluation step.

## Copy trading and billing

**Follower**\
An account that receives eligible orders from a copy-trading lead and applies
its own independent risk checks.

**Lead**\
The account whose eligible trading instructions drive a copy-trading group.

**Multiplier**\
A follower-specific adjustment applied after copy size is normalized for the
lead and follower starting balances.

**Profit split**\
The purchased plan percentage used to divide eligible funded-account profit
under the applicable payout terms.

**Purchase status**\
The current state of a challenge order: paid, pending, failed, or refunded.


# Guides
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/index

Task-oriented guides for starting, trading, completing challenges, using copy trading, and solving common problems.

Use these guides to buy a challenge, place trades, manage risk, and resolve
common problems. For a field-by-field explanation of account preferences, use
the [Settings reference](/settings).

> [card] [Getting Started](/guides/getting-started)
>
> Go from sign-in to your first simulated trade.

> [card] [Trading Guide](/guides/trading-guide)
>
> Place and manage orders, set exits, and configure risk controls.

> [card] [Tradable Assets](/guides/tradable-assets)
>
> See every market you can trade, grouped by asset class.

> [card] [Asset Exposure Limits](/guides/asset-exposure-limits)
>
> Find current market leverage and exposure caps, and understand shared
> limits.

> [card] [Trading Calculators](/guides/trading-calculators)
>
> Estimate position size, drawdown, holding costs, and payout splits with
> clearly defined scenarios.

> [card] [Commissions and Fees](/guides/commissions-and-fees)
>
> Check execution commissions, entry and exit examples, and hourly swap fees.

> [card] [Trading Journal](/guides/trading-journal)
>
> Review closed trades and add notes, setups, tags, and ratings.

> [card] [Challenges and Rules](/guides/challenges-and-rules)
>
> Read your plan terms and understand account progression.

> [card] [Elite Accounts](/guides/elite-accounts)
>
> Elite plan sizes, daily loss limit options, boosted leverage, and payouts.

> [card] [Competitions](/guides/competitions)
>
> Find current, upcoming, and past competitions and how standings work.

> [card] [Launch Competition](/guides/launch-competition)
>
> Entry, rules, prizes, and daily case drops for the Launch Competition.

> [card] [October Competition](/guides/october-competition)
>
> Schedule, account paths, ranking, and the free reset for the October
> Competition.

> [card] [MyFundedPerps Weekly Blitz](/guides/weekly-blitz)
>
> Entry tasks, doubled caps, task-unlocked resets, and prizes for the Weekly
> Blitz.

> [card] [Challenge Lifecycle](/guides/challenge-lifecycle)
>
> Follow purchase, evaluation, funding, payouts, billing, and rewards from
> start to finish.

> [card] [Copy Trading Guide](/guides/copy-trading-guide)
>
> Coordinate trades across challenge accounts you own.

> [card] [Affiliate Program](/guides/affiliate-program)
>
> Apply, share your code, earn commission and tier rewards, and get paid.

> [card] [Troubleshooting and FAQ](/guides/troubleshooting-and-faq)
>
> Diagnose common trading, settings, copy, and billing problems.

> [card] [Glossary](/guides/glossary)
>
> Look up trading and MyFundedPerps terminology.


# Launch competition
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/launch-competition

Entry, trading rules, prizes, daily case drops, resets, and leaderboard sharing for the MyFundedPerps Launch Competition.

## Schedule and entry

> [!NOTE]
>
> The launch competition has ended. This page describes how it ran, for
> reference.

The **MyFundedPerps Launch Competition** ran from **September 15, 2026 at 10:00 AM** to **September 28, 2026 at 12:00 PM**, New York time (EDT, UTC−4).

Every platform user who registered before the start was automatically entered, regardless of account status. Users who registered after the start could join manually from the competition's page before it closed.

The competition now appears with finished competitions on [Competitions](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/competitions). Its [full page](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/competitions/myfundedperps-launch-competition) keeps the final standings, and winners find their prize redemption codes there (see [Top 100 prizes](#top-100-prizes)).

## Trading and ranking

Each participant receives a separate **\$100,000 competition account**. There is no profit target, drawdown limit, or daily loss limit that can end your run. Standard trading fees, swap fees, slippage, margin liquidation, leverage caps, and exposure caps still apply.

The highest account equity at close wins. Equity includes unrealized profit and loss. Equal equity is ranked by win rate; a higher win rate wins the tie. If both are equal, a stable participant identifier determines the order. Win rate is winning closed trades divided by all closed trades; an account without closed trades has a zero win rate.

Leaderboard positions refresh approximately every 15 minutes, and every three minutes during the final hour of the competition. Final results use closing equity, so prizes become available after closing scores have finished settling.

Standings count genuine, independent trading only. Operating more than one account, copying or coordinating trades across accounts, or exploiting stale prices and platform errors leads to disqualification and can end platform access. The full prohibited-conduct list is in the [Terms of Use](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/terms). For what disqualification does to your competition account, see [Disqualification](/guides/competitions#disqualification).

## Account resets

You can reset your competition account **three times in total**, with at least **24 hours between resets**. Close every open position and cancel working orders and TWAPs before resetting.

A reset restores equity to **\$100,000**. Trade statistics, leaderboard history, and case-drop eligibility and history are preserved. Resets are available only while the competition is live.

## Top 100 prizes

After results are finalized, launch competition trading accounts are archived and removed from your dashboard. Any remaining positions are closed and pending orders are canceled. Final standings, prize redemption codes, and reward cases remain available. Accounts received as prizes are separate from competition trading accounts and remain available.

Each winning rank receives both prizes below. All MyFundedFutures accounts are **Rapid** accounts.

| Rank | MyFundedPerps | MyFundedFutures Rapid | Combined account size |
| - | - | - | - |
| 1 | Signature 100K | 150K | 250K |
| 2 | Prime 100K | 150K | 250K |
| 3–5 | Select 100K | 150K | 250K |
| 6–10 | Select 100K | 100K | 200K |
| 11–15 | Select 100K | 50K | 150K |
| 16–40 | Prime 50K | 50K | 100K |
| 41–70 | Select 50K | 50K | 100K |
| 71–100 | Prime 25K | 25K | 50K |

There are **100 accounts from each provider**, totaling **\$10 million in account funding**. Account sizes describe trading-account balances, not cash payments.

Winning users see both redemption codes on the competition page when final results are available. Redeem the MyFundedPerps code through the platform's existing code-redemption flow. Only the winning user can redeem that code. Redeem the Rapid code with MyFundedFutures.

## Daily case drops

A daily draw runs at **10:00 AM New York time**, from **September 16 through September 28**, for 13 drops. Each draw uniformly selects distinct participants from the **top 1,000 at its leaderboard snapshot**.

| Case | Per daily drop | Across 13 drops |
| - | - | - |
| Eclipse | 1 | 13 |
| Obsidian | 3 | 39 |
| Diamond | 4 | 52 |
| Gold | 7 | 91 |
| Silver | 10 | 130 |
| Bronze | 25 | 325 |
| Iron | 200 | 2,600 |
| **Total** | **250** | **3,250** |

You can receive at most one case in each drop, but you can win again on other days. If fewer than 250 participants are eligible, each eligible participant receives one case. Cases appear in your existing rewards inventory.

## Share your leaderboard card

Choose **Share Leaderboard Card** to generate an image, then **Download image**. The card includes your current rank, equity at capture, total traded volume, win rate, current prizes, username, avatar, and MyFundedPerps branding. Equity uses live market marks; the rank follows the leaderboard's refresh cadence.


# October competition
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/october-competition

Entry, account paths, ranking, the free reset and its unlock tasks, and claiming a physical prize payout for the MyFundedPerps October Competition.

## Schedule

All times are New York time.

| Event | Time |
| - | - |
| Registration opens | October 1, 2026 at 12:00 AM |
| Trading opens | October 5, 2026 at 12:00 PM |
| Registration and trading close | October 31, 2026 at 12:00 PM |

You can join until trading closes. Joining late leaves less time to trade, and
no adjustment is made. The competition page shows these times in your own time
zone.

## Entry

The **October Competition** has its own page under [Competitions](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/competitions), with the schedule, prizes, and leaderboard. Join from that page while registration is open.

The free Trade Case task list for following MyFundedPerps on X also shows an
optional **Enter Competition** step while registration is open. Entry is free
and does not affect your Trade Case.

When you claim the free Trade Case for following MyFundedPerps on X, you are entered automatically if registration is open and you meet the competition's entry requirements. The claim confirmation says **You're in the October Competition** and links to the competition page. If automatic entry is not possible, the confirmation invites you to join manually instead.

## Choose your path

Before your first trade, choose a path on the competition page. The path sets your starting balance and how your leverage and exposure caps are scaled.

| Path | Starting balance | Leverage and exposure caps |
| - | - | - |
| Blitz | \$50,000 | 4x the standard caps |
| Classic | \$100,000 | Standard caps |
| Whale | \$150,000 | Half (0.5x the standard caps) |

Scaled leverage rounds down to a whole number and never drops below 1x. For example, a market with a 5x leverage cap allows 20x on Blitz and 2x on Whale.

You choose a path once. Your account starts with the Classic balance and caps, and trading before you choose keeps those terms and closes the choice. Close positions and cancel working orders before choosing. After the free reset, you can choose a path again.

## Trading and ranking

There is no profit target, drawdown limit, or daily loss limit that can end your run. Standard trading fees, swap fees, slippage, margin liquidation, and your path's leverage and exposure caps apply.

The highest account equity wins. Equity includes unrealized profit and loss. The return shown beside each trader is measured against their own path's starting balance, so a Whale account at \$151,500 shows +1%. Equal equity is ranked by win rate; a higher win rate wins the tie. Win rate is winning closed trades divided by all closed trades. You appear on the leaderboard after your first fill.

Standings count genuine, independent trading only. Operating more than one account, copying or coordinating trades across accounts, or exploiting stale prices and platform errors leads to disqualification and can end platform access. The full prohibited-conduct list is in the [Terms of Use](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/terms). For what disqualification does to your competition account, see [Disqualification](/guides/competitions#disqualification).

## Free reset

You get **one free reset**. It unlocks after you complete three tasks on the competition page:

1. **Post about the competition on X** using the prepared post.
2. **Follow** MyFundedPerps on [YouTube](https://www.youtube.com/@MyFundedPerps) and [Instagram](https://www.instagram.com/myfundedperps_/). Open each profile, follow it, then choose **Confirm Follows**. Confirmation becomes available 15 seconds after you start the task.
3. **Repost the competition post** on X.

To reset, close every open position and cancel working orders first. A reset returns your account to \$100,000 on the Classic path, and you can choose a path again before your next trade. Resets are available only while the competition is live, and the reset cannot be undone.

### Bonus reset

Until October 6, 2026 at 06:00 UTC, every entrant could take **one extra free reset** with no tasks required. That window has closed, so the task reset is now the only free reset. If you used the bonus reset, you can still unlock and use the task reset, starting 24 hours after your bonus reset.

## After the competition

After results are finalized, October Competition trading accounts are archived and removed from your dashboard. Any remaining positions are closed and pending orders are canceled. Final standings and prizes remain available. Select accounts received as prizes are separate from competition trading accounts and remain available.

## Physical prize payouts

The physical prizes for ranks 1 to 11 are paid as their value instead of shipped. The Select evaluation account in each of these prizes is issued as usual.

| Rank | Prize | Payout value |
| - | - | - |
| 1st | iPhone Duo | \$2,000 |
| 2nd | PS5 | \$500 |
| 3rd to 4th | M1 MacBook | \$600 |
| 5th to 6th | iPhone 14 | \$500 |
| 7th to 11th | AirPods | \$150 |

Once results are final, winners see a **Claim Prize** button on the competition page. To claim:

1. **Verify your identity** with Sumsub, the same check funded payouts use. If you already passed it for a funded account or affiliate payouts, this step is already complete.
2. **Choose your split.** Move the slider to choose how much of the payout value you take as store credit. The rest is paid as cash through Rise. You can take it all as cash, all as store credit, or any whole-dollar mix. Store credit is not boosted.
3. **Enter your Rise email** if you take any cash and do not already receive payouts through Rise, then accept the Rise invitation sent to that email.
4. Choose **Claim Prize Payout**.

You can claim once. Every claim is reviewed by our team. Store credit is added when your claim is approved, and the cash is sent through Rise after that. The claim page shows your claim's status.


# Second Chance Offer
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/second-chance

The Second Chance offer is closed to new submissions. Covers what happens to submissions already made, approved codes, review, and the offer terms.

> [!NOTE]
>
> The Second Chance offer is closed to new submissions. If you already
> submitted, the [Second Chance
> page](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/second-chance) still shows your status,
> and any approved code works under the terms below.

The Second Chance offer gave traders who had bought an account at another
crypto, perpetuals, or CFD prop firm a one-time code for 35% off their first
MyFundedPerps account, after our team approved proof of that purchase.

## Submissions already made

A team member reviews every submission by hand. You get an email once a
decision is made, and the Second Chance page shows the status:
**Pending Review**, **Approved**, or **Not Approved**. If approved, your code
appears on the Second Chance page and is emailed to your verified email. Enter
it at checkout and select **Add Code**.

## Your code

* 35% off one account purchase.
* Tied to your MyFundedPerps account and usable once.
* Expires 72 hours after it is issued. The Second Chance page shows the exact
  expiry and whether the code is unused, used, or expired.
* Cannot be combined with other promotions. Percentage discounts do not stack;
  see [Buying a challenge](/guides/challenge-lifecycle/buying-a-challenge) for
  how codes apply at checkout.

> [!WARNING]
>
> An expired code is not reissued, so buy within 72 hours of approval.

## If your submission is not approved

The Second Chance page shows the decision and the reason. The decision is
final, because each account can submit once. Submitting does not guarantee
approval. Unverifiable, duplicate, or ineligible evidence may be rejected.

## Offer terms

* Open to traders who have purchased an account at another crypto,
  perpetuals, or CFD prop firm.
* Evidence must be genuine, readable, and enough to show that the account is
  yours and that you purchased it.
* AI-generated, edited, fabricated, or stolen images and receipts are not
  accepted.
* You may redact unrelated sensitive information, but the firm, the purchase, and
  the identifying details needed for review must stay visible.
* Each account can submit once and receive one approved offer.
* A code issued on fraudulent evidence may be revoked.


# Tradable Assets
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/tradable-assets

Every market you can currently open positions on, grouped by asset class, with the names and symbols shown on the trade page.

This page lists all 117 markets currently enabled for trading on MyFundedPerps. The **Market** column matches the market name on the trade page, and **Symbol** is the ticker you can search for.

List last changed: 2026-11-01.

> [!NOTE]
>
> This list is updated from the platform's market configuration after markets
> are added or removed, so it can briefly trail the app. The [Markets
> page](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/markets) and the trade page always show
> current availability. Markets that follow [trading
> hours](/guides/trading-guide#trading-hours) stay listed while they are closed.

Maximum leverage and exposure caps for each market are listed on [Market Exposure Caps](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/exposure-caps). See [Asset Exposure Limits](/guides/asset-exposure-limits) for how those caps apply to your accounts.

## Crypto

63 markets.

| Market | Symbol |
| - | - |
| 1000BONK-USD | 1000BONK |
| 1000PEPE-USD | 1000PEPE |
| 1000SHIB-USD | 1000SHIB |
| AAVE-USD | AAVE |
| ADA-USD | ADA |
| AERO-USD | AERO |
| APT-USD | APT |
| ARB-USD | ARB |
| ASTER-USD | ASTER |
| ATOM-USD | ATOM |
| AVAX-USD | AVAX |
| BCH-USD | BCH |
| BNB-USD | BNB |
| BTC-USD | BTC |
| CRV-USD | CRV |
| DASH-USD | DASH |
| DOGE-USD | DOGE |
| DOT-USD | DOT |
| ENA-USD | ENA |
| ETC-USD | ETC |
| ETH-USD | ETH |
| ETHFI-USD | ETHFI |
| FARTCOIN-USD | FARTCOIN |
| FET-USD | FET |
| FIL-USD | FIL |
| GRAM-USD | GRAM |
| GRASS-USD | GRASS |
| HBAR-USD | HBAR |
| HYPE-USD | HYPE |
| ICP-USD | ICP |
| INJ-USD | INJ |
| JTO-USD | JTO |
| JUP-USD | JUP |
| LDO-USD | LDO |
| LINK-USD | LINK |
| LIT-USD | LIT |
| LTC-USD | LTC |
| MON-USD | MON |
| NEAR-USD | NEAR |
| ONDO-USD | ONDO |
| OP-USD | OP |
| PENDLE-USD | PENDLE |
| PENGU-USD | PENGU |
| POL-USD | POL |
| PUMP-USD | PUMP |
| PYTH-USD | PYTH |
| RENDER-USD | RENDER |
| SEI-USD | SEI |
| SOL-USD | SOL |
| SUI-USD | SUI |
| TAO-USD | TAO |
| TRUMP-USD | TRUMP |
| TRX-USD | TRX |
| UNI-USD | UNI |
| VVV-USD | VVV |
| WIF-USD | WIF |
| WLD-USD | WLD |
| WLFI-USD | WLFI |
| XLM-USD | XLM |
| XMR-USD | XMR |
| XPL-USD | XPL |
| XRP-USD | XRP |
| ZEC-USD | ZEC |

## Stocks

31 markets.

| Market | Symbol |
| - | - |
| AAPL-USD | AAPL |
| AMD-USD | AMD |
| AMZN-USD | AMZN |
| ANTHROPIC-USD | ANTHROPIC |
| AVGO-USD | AVGO |
| BABA-USD | BABA |
| BMNR-USD | BMNR |
| COIN-USD | COIN |
| CRCL-USD | CRCL |
| CRWV-USD | CRWV |
| DRAM-USD | DRAM |
| GOOGL-USD | GOOGL |
| HOOD-USD | HOOD |
| INTC-USD | INTC |
| META-USD | META |
| MRVL-USD | MRVL |
| MSFT-USD | MSFT |
| MSTR-USD | MSTR |
| MU-USD | MU |
| NBIS-USD | NBIS |
| NVDA-USD | NVDA |
| OPENAI-USD | OPENAI |
| ORCL-USD | ORCL |
| PLTR-USD | PLTR |
| SAMSUNG-USD | SAMSUNG |
| SKHYNIX-USD | SKHYNIX |
| SNDK-USD | SNDK |
| SPCX-USD | SPCX |
| TSLA-USD | TSLA |
| TSM-USD | TSM |
| WDC-USD | WDC |

## Indices

7 markets.

| Market | Symbol |
| - | - |
| EWY-USD | EWY |
| JP225-USD | JP225 |
| NAS100-USD | NAS100 |
| QQQ-USD | QQQ |
| SOXL-USD | SOXL |
| SP500-USD | SP500 |
| US30-USD | US30 |

## FX

6 markets.

| Market | Symbol |
| - | - |
| AUD-USD | AUD |
| EUR-USD | EUR |
| GBP-USD | GBP |
| USD-CAD | USDCAD |
| USD-CHF | USDCHF |
| USD-JPY | JPY |

## Commodities

10 markets.

| Market | Symbol |
| - | - |
| BRENTOIL-USD | BRENTOIL |
| CL-USD | CL |
| COPPER-USD | COPPER |
| NATGAS-USD | NATGAS |
| PALLADIUM-USD | PALLADIUM |
| PLATINUM-USD | PLATINUM |
| XAG-USD | XAG |
| XAU-USD | XAU |
| XPD-USD | XPD |
| XPT-USD | XPT |


# Trading Calculators
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/trading-calculators

Estimate perpetual futures position size, liquidation price, drawdown, swap fees, and payout splits, and understand which inputs are hypothetical.

MyFundedPerps provides free calculators for comparing trading scenarios. They
use the inputs on the page and do not read your account balance, validate a
trade, or determine whether you qualify for a payout.

## Choose a calculator

| Calculator | What you can estimate |
| - | - |
| [Liquidation Price](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/tools/liquidation-price-calculator) | A long or short position's liquidation price from entry price, leverage, margin mode, and maintenance margin. |
| [Position Size](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/tools/position-size-calculator) | Position size from a dollar risk budget and the distance between entry and stop. |
| [Drawdown Breach](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/tools/drawdown-breach-calculator) | Remaining room above daily and overall loss floors under the scenario you enter. |
| [Swap Fee](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/tools/swap-fee-calculator) | Holding costs using the published fee schedule for the selected market category. |
| [Payout Split](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/tools/payout-split-calculator) | Your share of gross profit and your net result after an evaluation fee. |
| [Consistency Rule](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/tools/consistency-rule-checker) | Your best day's share of total profit against a percentage you choose. |

## Enter the terms for your scenario

The opening values are examples. Replace balances, prices, percentages, and
fees with the values you want to compare. The selected challenge's order
summary and your account dashboard remain the references for your actual
terms. Read [Buying a Challenge](/guides/challenge-lifecycle/buying-a-challenge)
before purchasing.

### Position size and liquidation

The position-size calculator works back from your risk budget and stop
distance. A stop price is not a guaranteed execution price. Commissions,
holding costs, slippage, and market conditions can change the final result.
Read the [Trading Guide](/guides/trading-guide) for order execution and risk
controls.

The liquidation calculator is an estimate. Maintenance-margin tiers, other
positions, fees, and the venue's rules can change the liquidation price.
Its cross-margin scenario is not a complete simulation of a portfolio.

### Drawdown and consistency

The drawdown calculator offers static, end-of-day trailing, and intraday
trailing scenarios. These choices do not mean your challenge supports all
three. Its daily-loss calculation uses the day-start balance you enter; it
does not reproduce every account rule or the permanent loss-floor lock after
a Select, Prime, or Signature funded withdrawal.

Use the dashboard's enforced loss floors when deciding how much room an
account has left. Read [Challenges and Rules](/guides/challenges-and-rules)
for daily resets, drawdown, and the withdrawal lock.

The consistency checker compares daily profit and loss with a threshold you
enter. It is a hypothetical rule check, not confirmation that your current
challenge has a consistency requirement. Your selected plan's terms determine
which rules apply.

### Swap fees

Choose the market category before entering notional size and holding time.
Category-specific pages, including the
[Forex Swap Fee Calculator](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/tools/forex-swap-fee-calculator),
use the same calculator with that category selected.

Enter the full position value in USD, not just its margin. For index positions,
do not enter index points or the number of futures contracts. Convert commodity
quantities such as ounces or barrels into their USD value first.

The examples below each category's fee schedule use an explicitly illustrative
rate. Their calculation is position notional multiplied by the daily rate and
the holding period in days. They do not state the current platform rate.
Forex examples use the platform's fixed hourly model rather than a broker's
swap points or triple rollover. Stock examples do not model dividends or
share-borrow costs.

The published schedule supplies the starting rate. If you change the rate,
the result becomes your own scenario. Swap fees are holding costs; they do
not include entry or exit commissions. Read
[Commissions and Fees](/guides/commissions-and-fees) for the complete cost model.

### Payout splits and evaluation fees

Enter gross profit, your profit-split percentage, and the evaluation fee to
compare your share with the cost of the evaluation.

For example, \$1,000 gross profit at an 80% split gives you an \$800 profit
share. With an example \$100 evaluation fee and no fee refund, the net result
after that fee is \$700. These are illustrative inputs, not a plan price or
an approved payout.

The fee-refund checkbox models a hypothetical refund. It does not establish
that your challenge includes one. Review the
[Refund Policy](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/refund-policy) and
[Payouts](/guides/challenge-lifecycle/payouts) for the applicable terms,
eligibility checks, gross account deduction, and withdrawal lock.

## Continue with your account

When you have finished comparing scenarios, review the
[challenge selector](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/#pricing) or browse
[Markets](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/markets). Before placing an order or
requesting a payout, check the current account and the values shown in the
corresponding order or payout form.


# Trading Guide
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/trading-guide

Understand simulated order execution, sizing, margin, leverage, Take Profit and Stop Loss, and the safeguards around each trade.

MyFundedPerps uses real market data and venue order books to simulate
orders and fills. The server validates account rules, available collateral,
market constraints, and execution protection before applying a fill to your
simulated account.

## Compare account P\&L

Open **Accounts** in the trade page's activity panel to compare accounts
without switching dashboards. **Today's P\&L** shows each account's equity
change since midnight New York time, including unrealized gains and losses.
It updates as balances and position prices change and appears on both desktop
rows and mobile account cards. You can sort the desktop column or hide it
through **Columns**.

A dash means today's baseline is unavailable. Accounts with no open positions
and no activity since the daily reset show zero.

On a desktop, **Daily Loss Remaining** and **Max Drawdown Remaining** show how
much of each account's loss limits is left, and **Breach At** shows the price on
the market you are viewing at which an account holding it would reach its
nearest loss limit. See
[Loss limits in the Accounts tab](/guides/copy-trading-guide#loss-limits-in-the-accounts-tab).

## Forex and index markets

Gold (XAU) trades on Binance, and the S\&P 500 (SP500) and Nasdaq-100 (NAS100)
on Hyperliquid, around the clock. Where offered, SP500 and NAS100 can also
trade on Ostium with standard market hours; see
[Markets with two trading-hour options](#markets-with-two-trading-hour-options).
The following markets price from oracle
venues that quote one bid and one ask with no depth behind them:

| Markets | Venue |
| - | - |
| EUR/USD, USD/JPY, GBP/USD, AUD/USD, USD/CAD, and USD/CHF | Veranta |
| Dow Jones 30 (US30) | Ostium |

On these markets, and on SP500 and NAS100 on Ostium, the Order Book tab shows
the two prices instead of a ladder.
Buy / Long fills at the ask and Sell / Short fills at the bid, plus a
slippage charge that grows with order size; see
[Veranta and Ostium fills](#veranta-and-ostium-fills). The tab also shows the
spread between them, the spread cost of the order in your order ticket, and the spread cost per \$100K of order value. The
spread cost is what you give up by opening at one price and closing at the
other; trading fees are charged separately. Select Buy / Long or Sell / Short to
set that side on your order ticket. On a phone, this opens the order ticket.

US30 prices are index points. One unit of size is worth \$1 per
point, the same as every other market on the platform. Take Profit, Stop Loss,
and other price triggers on these markets follow the venue's mid price. Check
the order ticket for each market's current leverage and size requirements.

### Trading hours

These markets follow their venue's trading sessions instead of trading around
the clock. Times are New York time:

| Markets | Weekly session | Daily break |
| - | - | - |
| EUR/USD, USD/JPY, GBP/USD, AUD/USD, USD/CAD, USD/CHF | Sunday 17:15 to Friday 17:00 | 17:00 to 17:15, Monday to Thursday |
| US30, and SP500 and NAS100 on Ostium where offered | Sunday 18:00 to Friday 17:00 | 17:00 to 18:00, Monday to Thursday |

The forex daily break is the market's daily rollover. In the weeks when the
United States and Europe change their clocks on different dates, it moves to
18:00 to 18:15 New York time. Venues also close early or for the full day on
some holidays. The trade page shows a **Market Closed** notice whenever a market
is outside its session.

Open positions stay open through a daily break; see
[While a market is closed](#while-a-market-is-closed) for what you can do
during one.

A badge beside the market name marks these markets in the trade page header,
the market picker, search, and the Markets page, so you can tell they do not
trade around the clock before you open one. FX pairs show **24/5**, since they
trade from Sunday to Friday with only a 15-minute daily rollover. Markets with
an hour-long daily break, such as US30, show **23/5**. On the trade page, markets
without a **Trading Hours** picker show a **Venue** field next to the market
name with the venue that supplies the market's prices.

### Markets with two trading-hour options

Some markets trade on two venues: one that keeps **Standard Market Hours**
and one that trades **24/7**. On these markets, the **Trading Hours** picker
in the market bar (or at the top of **Market Details** on a phone) switches
between them. Hover the info icon beside each option, or read the line under
it on a phone, for what that option means.

* **Standard Market Hours** follows the sessions in the table above. While the
  market is closed, prices freeze and new positions wait until it reopens.
  Positions on this option close automatically before the weekend; see
  [Weekend auto-close](#weekend-auto-close).
* **24/7** trades around the clock, including nights, weekends, and holidays.
  Outside regular market hours, its price can move away from the underlying
  market.

The trade page opens on your default trading hours, which start as
**Standard Market Hours**. If you hold an open position in that market, it
opens on the option your position uses instead. You can hold a market on only
one option at a time; close the position before trading the other.

To make **24/7** your default, open the **Trading Hours** picker and choose
**Set 24/7 as default** below the options, or change **Default Trading Hours**
in [Trading settings](/settings/trading#order-defaults). The picker marks your
default with a **Default** tag. Choosing an option in the picker without
setting it as default changes only the market you are viewing.

### While a market is closed

* Prices, the chart, and the order book show the last quote before the close.
* Market orders and position closes are rejected with a market closed
  message. Nothing on the market can fill until it reopens.
* You can still place, edit, and cancel limit, Take Profit, and Stop Loss
  orders. They stay open and can trigger or fill at the reopening price.
* On markets that also trade **24/7**, the order ticket offers a **Switch to 24/7**
  link while the market is closed. It moves the page to the 24/7 option,
  which is open. The two options are separate markets with their own prices,
  so a position you hold on one stays there.
* Open positions keep counting toward your account at the last quote during a
  daily break or holiday closure. If your account is liquidated or closed out
  while a market is closed, those positions close at that last quote.

Prices can open far from the last quote after a daily break or holiday. A Stop
Loss that the reopening price crosses fills at the first available price,
which can be worse than its trigger price.

### Weekend auto-close

You cannot hold positions on these markets over the weekend. Every open
position on them closes automatically 15 minutes before the market's scheduled
weekend close. This applies to every account type, in both the evaluation and
funded stages, and it happens whether or not you are online.

* **When it happens:** 15 minutes before the Friday close in the
  [Trading hours](#trading-hours) table. The time follows New York time, so it
  moves with daylight saving time. For example, a market that closes at
  Friday 17:00 New York time closes its positions at 16:45.
* **Warning:** during the final hour before the auto-close, the trade page
  shows the exact auto-close time in your time zone with a countdown, and the
  market status above the chart counts down to it.
* **How positions close:** at the market price at that moment, with the normal
  trading fee. Realized profit or loss is applied to your balance, and the
  account's rules are checked against the result, the same as for a close you
  make yourself.
* **Open orders:** limit and stop entry orders on the market are canceled.
  Take Profit and Stop Loss orders are canceled when their position closes.
* **New positions:** from the auto-close time until the market reopens on
  Sunday, you cannot open or add to a position on the market. Orders that only
  reduce a position are still accepted. Trading resumes at the next scheduled
  opening.
* **Trade history:** a closed position shows the reason **Weekend Auto-Close**,
  with its exit price and realized profit or loss. Its closing fill appears in
  order history as a **System Close**.

The 24/7 option of a market with two trading-hour options is not affected.
Daily breaks and holiday closures do not close positions.

## Browse markets

The [Markets page](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/markets) shows cached prices
and statistics so browsing does not wait for every data source. Prices on the
current page update live, and each row's 24h change follows its price. If live
prices are unavailable, prices refresh every 30 seconds instead, and the note
under the table says which applies. Updates pause in hidden tabs.
A recent listing and its other statistics are reused for ten minutes; an older
cached listing can appear while a replacement loads. Overview cards and
historical charts load independently from the market list.

Open Filters to narrow the list by asset class (Stocks, Crypto, Indices,
Commodities, FX) and other criteria. Selected filters stay in the page URL so
a refined view can be shared or refreshed.

Open a market to see current trading data. Orders use current execution checks,
not the cached prices on the Markets page.

### Retiring markets

A market that is being retired is reduce-only. It no longer appears in search
or on the Markets page, and you cannot open a new position or add to an
existing one. Positions you already hold stay open: open them from the
Positions tab or the Dashboard to reduce, close, or set Take Profit and Stop
Loss orders, which keep working until you close the position. The market's
trade page shows a notice with a link to its replacement.

Gold now trades on [XAU](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/trade/XAU?asset=tradfi).
The previous GOLD market is retiring, so open new gold trades on XAU.

[EUR/USD](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/trade/EUR?asset=tradfi) and
[USD/JPY](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/trade/JPY?asset=tradfi) now trade on
Veranta, which follows the [trading hours](#trading-hours) above. The previous
Hyperliquid EUR/USD and USD/JPY markets are retiring. Positions you hold there
stay on Hyperliquid: open one from the Positions tab to see its Hyperliquid
chart, where you can reduce, close, or protect it. The EUR/USD and USD/JPY
pages show Veranta prices, so a new order there opens a separate Veranta
position instead of reducing your Hyperliquid one. If you still hold a
Hyperliquid position, those pages show a notice that links to its chart.

## Save markets to your watchlist

Star a market on Markets or in the Trade symbol picker to add it to your
watchlist. Both views and the bottom-bar Watchlist use the same saved list,
with a shared limit of 25 markets. Removing a star in either view frees a
slot everywhere. Crypto and traditional instruments that share a ticker are
separate markets.

The symbol picker reopens on the tab you last chose, such as Watchlist, All,
or a category. Your choice is saved to your profile, so it follows you across
devices.

The picker's Watchlist tab lists markets in your saved order. Drag a market by
its handle to move it; the new order applies everywhere your watchlist
appears. Choosing a column or sort sorts the list for now and hides the
handles. Choose the same column a third time to return to your saved order.

Open Configure Watchlist from the bottom-bar Watchlist to remove markets or
drag them into your preferred order. Your watchlist is saved to your profile
and follows you across trading accounts.

On the trading terminal, use the source menu on the scrolling market ticker to
show Trending markets, the standard Tickers list, Top Volume, or your Watchlist.
Watchlist markets appear in your saved order, including markets from different
venues. The ticker source you choose is remembered in this browser. When your
watchlist is empty, the ticker prompts you to add markets.

## Chart preferences and templates

The chart's timeframe menu offers minute timeframes from 1 to 45 minutes, hour
timeframes from 1 to 12 hours, and daily, weekly, and monthly candles. The exact list
depends on the market. Timeframes such as 45 minutes, 2 hours, 3 hours, and 6 hours are
combined from shorter candles, so they start at midnight UTC and reach as far
back in history as the shorter candles they combine.

Index and forex markets follow their exchange trading day instead of the UTC
day. An index day runs from the 6:00 PM New York open to the 5:00 PM close, and
a forex day rolls over at 5:00 PM New York. Their daily candles cover that
session, hour timeframes count from its open, and weekly candles start at the
Sunday open, so daily studies such as Pivot Points match the exchange session.

Star a timeframe in the menu to add it to the chart header. The chart opens on
the timeframe you used last.

The candle countdown follows server time while the price connection is
available, so an incorrect device clock does not add extra time to the current
candle. Quiet Hyperliquid markets can wait for the next trade before showing
a new candle.

Charts automatically reload their history when the live candle feed resumes
after an interruption that may have skipped candles. Returning to the page,
tapping the chart, or a quiet market does not trigger a reload by itself.
Live candles keep updating until the reload starts and pause only while it
runs; drawings and chart settings stay in place. If the price connection
drops, the chart shows the connection status, such as **Reconnecting**, until
prices resume. If recovery repeatedly fails, the chart shows a loading error
instead of silently continuing with a gap. A price jump by itself does not
trigger a reload.

Your chart preferences and templates stay saved when you switch markets.
Chart customization such as colors, chart style, and scale settings follows
you to every market, while drawings stay on the market where you drew them.
When another tab or device has synchronized a template change, your next
template edit uses that updated collection. If two tabs save conflicting
changes at the same time, the app rejects the older change to protect the
newer saved version.

To change a drawing's settings, such as the levels, colors, and labels of a
Fibonacci retracement, right-click the drawing and choose **Settings…** at the
top of the menu, or double-click one of its lines. When the chart is tall
enough, the toolbar that appears after you select a drawing also shows a
settings icon.

To undo a chart change, such as deleting a drawing by mistake, select the
undo arrow in the chart header or press Ctrl+Z (⌘Z on Mac) while the chart is
focused. The redo arrow beside it reapplies the change.

A new **Fixed Range Volume Profile** drawing shows its developing point of
control (POC) and developing value area as step lines across the range. The
upper and lower value-area lines track the value area high (VAH) and value
area low (VAL) bar by bar. At the end of the range they match the final VAH
and VAL for the whole range. Past the end of the range, the lines continue
flat at those final levels: candles after the range are not counted. To hide
either line, open the drawing's settings and turn off **Developing Poc** or
**Developing VA** on the **Style** tab. Change the share of volume the value
area covers with **Value Area Volume** on the **Inputs** tab. Profiles you drew
before this change keep their own settings.

## Trade on a phone

On a phone, the trade page uses a single header row: the menu, the market
picker, the current mark price with its 24h change, and your notifications.
While [One-Click Trading](#one-click-trading) is on, the header also has a
lightning button that shows or hides the One-Click window.
The page fills the screen, including the space Safari frees when you hide its
toolbar.

* Tap the mark price, or the info icon beside the market name, to open
  **Market Details**. When the market trades on more than one venue, the
  **Venue** picker at the top switches between them (shown as **Trading
  Hours** when the choice is between standard market hours and 24/7). Below it are mark price,
  24h change, open interest, 24h volume, and any notes about the market, such
  as its trading hours. It also opens **Trading Data**, **Market Info**, and
  **Market Depth**. While one of those views is open, the tabs above it take
  you back to **Chart**.
* The chart's drawing tools start collapsed. Tap the arrow at the chart's left
  edge to show them.
* Tap **Focus Chart** (the full-screen icon in the header) to give the chart
  the whole screen. The header and bottom tabs hide, leaving one bar under the
  chart with your open position for the market, **Buy / Long**, **Sell /
  Short**, the One-Click lightning button while One-Click Trading is on, and
  **Exit Focus**, which restores the full layout. Focus applies
  only to the price chart and is remembered on that device.

## Net PnL percentage

Position Net PnL % on the trading terminal, dashboard, and position PnL cards
is calculated as **Net PnL ÷ position margin × 100** for every market,
including forex. For example, a \$25 net profit on \$250 of margin is a 10%
return.

Open positions include unrealized PnL, realized PnL from earlier reductions,
paid fees, swap fees, and, by default, the estimated fee to close the remaining position.
Their percentage uses the current reserved margin plus the margin committed
to earlier closed portions. Fully closed positions use the accumulated margin
of all closed portions. Older positions without that history use the final
remaining size's entry margin as a fallback.

## Estimated close fees in Net PnL

Use **Include Estimated Close Fees** in the Positions header on the
[trading terminal](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/trade). You can
also find it under **PnL Display** in [Settings > Trading](/settings/trading).
The switch is on by default. Turn it off to view open-position Net PnL
without deducting the estimated fee to close the remaining position.
Paid fees, realized PnL from reductions, and swap fees still count.
Estimated close fees use your account's rate, so an account with the
[Reduced Fees](/guides/commissions-and-fees#reduced-fees) add-on, paid or
added free during the launch week, estimates half the standard commission.

The setting updates open-position totals, row values and percentages,
breakeven prices, and chart position PnL labels together. Your choice is saved
to your user settings and synced across devices, browsers, the dashboard, and
the trading terminal when you are signed in.
It changes displayed values only: execution fees, close-order estimates,
account equity, challenge rules, and closed trade history are unchanged.

## One position per market

Each account holds one net position per market. Every fill on that market
updates the same position, so an order in the opposite direction trades
against what you already hold instead of opening a separate position.

| Opposite-side order size | Result |
| - | - |
| Smaller than your position | Reduces the position. The rest stays open at the same entry price. |
| Equal to your position | Closes the position completely. |
| Larger than your position | Closes the position and opens one on the other side using only the size left over (a flip). |

For example, selling 0.5 BTC while you hold a 0.5 BTC long closes the long:
it does not leave you holding a 0.5 BTC long and a 0.5 BTC short. Selling
0.8 BTC instead closes the long and opens a 0.3 BTC short.

Hedge mode is not supported. You cannot hold a long and a short on the same
market in the same account at the same time.

One exception comes from the retiring Hyperliquid EUR/USD and USD/JPY markets.
A position you still hold there is separate from the Veranta market of the same
name, so a new EUR/USD or USD/JPY order opens or changes a Veranta position
and does not reduce the Hyperliquid one. See [Retiring markets](#retiring-markets).

When a position closes or flips, its Take Profit and Stop Loss orders are
canceled automatically, because the position they protected no longer
exists. Set new exits for a flipped position if you want them. When a
position is only reduced, any exit larger than the remaining size is reduced
to fit it.

Use **Reduce Only** (described below) when an order should only shrink or
close your position and never flip it.

### Reverse a position

**Reverse Position** closes your position and opens the same size on the other
side, or the largest size your margin allows. Holding a 1 BTC long and
reversing leaves you with a 1 BTC short when your margin covers it. On the
chart it is the up and down arrow on the position's line. In the Positions tab
it is the **Reverse** button in each row, and on a phone it is the **Reverse
Position** button on each position card.

A reversal is one market order that closes your whole position and opens the
new side, so both sides happen in a single fill:

* **Smaller size when margin is short.** Closing a position in a loss lowers
  your balance, so a position using most of your margin may not be able to
  reopen at the same size. The new position then opens at the largest size your
  remaining margin covers, after the realized loss, the trading fee, and your
  [Max Market Slippage](/settings/trading#max-market-slippage-setting). For
  example, a 1 BTC long might reverse into a 0.8 BTC short. The review shows
  the estimated size; the final size is set when the order fills. If not even
  the smallest size fits, the reversal is rejected.
* **All or nothing.** If the new position would break a challenge rule, exceed
  your exposure limits, or exceed your Max Market Slippage, the order is
  rejected and your original position stays open unchanged. You are never left
  flat by a reversal that only half worked.
* **Same settings.** The new position uses the leverage and margin mode of the
  position you reversed.
* **Fees and slippage.** The trading fee applies to the full reversed size,
  the same as closing and then opening separately. Market slippage is
  estimated for the full order size.
* **Exits.** The position's Take Profit and Stop Loss orders are canceled, as
  with any flip. Set new exits for the reversed position if you want them.
* **Current position only.** If the position changes before the order fills
  (for example, a Take Profit partly closes it, you add to it, or you change
  its leverage), the reversal is rejected instead of reversing something other
  than what you saw. Try again with the updated position.
* **Copy trading followers.** Reversing a lead account reverses its followers.
  If a follower's position changes before filling, its copy is resized to reach
  the intended position on the new side. The follower still needs enough
  available collateral and must pass its own trading checks. See
  [Copy Trading](/guides/copy-trading-guide#how-follower-size-is-calculated).

Reverse Position opens a short review first, so you can check the market, the
new side, and the estimated price before anything is sent. To reverse as soon
as you click, turn off
[Confirm Reverse Position](/settings/trading#trade-confirmations) in Trading
settings. Copy trading leads always see the review so they can follow each
follower's result.

To remove the button everywhere, turn off
[Show Reverse Position](/settings/trading#trade-confirmations) in Trading
settings.

## One-Click Trading

One-Click Trading places market orders from a small window on the trade page.
It is on by default in
[Trading settings](/settings/trading#one-click-trading); turn it off there to
remove the window.

* **On desktop**, select **One-Click** in the bottom bar to show or hide the
  window. With [multiple charts](#multiple-charts) open, it trades the chart
  you last clicked and names that market in its header. Drag it anywhere on the trade page and resize it; its position and
  size are remembered in that browser. **Sell** and **Buy** grow with the
  window, so a larger window gives you larger buttons.
* **On a phone**, tap the lightning button in the trade header. Drag the window's
  header to move it around within the chart. Its position is remembered in
  that browser. Tap the handle to switch between the top and bottom edges.
  In Focus mode, the lightning button is in the bar under the chart.
* **In full screen**, the window stays on the chart when you use the chart's
  full-screen button, on desktop and on Android phones. iPhone browsers do
  not offer chart full screen, so the chart hides that button there; use
  **Focus Chart** instead. If the window is hidden,
  select **One-Click** at the lower left of the chart to show it. The window
  appears only when the chart in full screen shows the market it trades.

The window shows **Sell** at the bid and **Buy** at the ask, with the size
between them, and **Flat** below. You can also turn on percent buttons from the
gear in the window's header.

* **Buy** and **Sell** send a market order for the size shown as soon as you
  tap. There is no review step, even if you confirm orders in the order ticket.
  Orders use your saved leverage, margin mode, and Max Market Slippage.
* A saved Stop Loss and Take Profit attach only when the order opens a new
  position. Adding to a position lets its existing exits resize with it, and an
  opposite order reduces the position.
* **Flat** closes your whole position in that market and cancels the market's
  open orders. You can hide it with **Show Flat Button** in Trading settings.
* When turned on, the percent buttons under **Sell** open a short and the ones under **Buy**
  open a long, sized as a share of your available margin at your saved
  leverage. 100% uses all of your available margin.
* The **Close** percent buttons close that share of your position in the
  market at market. Unlike **Flat**, they leave your open orders in place.
  They are available only while you have a position in that market.

Percent buttons are off by default. Select the gear in the window's header and
turn on **Show Percent Buttons** to add them, then choose the three open
percentages and the three close percentages. Changes apply as you type and are
saved to your account, so they follow you to every device.

Use the size controls to change the amount, or edit it to choose a unit: USD,
the asset, or Minis and Micros on supported index and commodity markets. A size
you type is kept when you select **Done**, press Enter, or select outside the
editor; press Escape to discard it. A size you change is saved for that market
on all your devices, so other markets keep their own size. Each market's Stop
Loss and Take Profit are edited under **One-Click Trading by Market** in
Trading settings. Markets without their own settings start from your Quick Size
amount and your TP/SL preset.

> [!WARNING]
>
> One-Click orders are sent immediately. Fills can differ from the price shown
> when the market moves fast. Challenge rules, exposure limits, and order
> validation still apply.

## Choose an order type

| Order | What it does | Main tradeoff |
| - | - | - |
| Market | Fills the full size using the execution model described below. | Adverse slippage is capped by the market's published tier. |
| Limit | Rests at your price and fills in full there once the market reaches it. A limit placed through the market fills right away as a market order. | Controls price but may remain unfilled if the market never reaches the limit. |
| Stop / Take Profit | Watches a trigger and submits the configured exit behavior when reached. | A trigger is not a guaranteed fill price; execution still uses current market conditions. |
| Triggers on Veranta and Ostium markets | Take Profit, Stop Loss, and other price triggers follow the venue's mid price. | The fill still uses the bid or ask, so it can differ from the mid price that triggered it. |
| Scheduled or advanced order | Breaks or manages an instruction using the controls shown in the order ticket. | Each generated order still passes the ordinary account and execution checks. |

Check the order ticket for the order types available on the selected market.

Select **Reduce Only** to cap an order at closing or shrinking an existing
position in the opposite direction. It is offered on every order type except
Take Market: a reduce-only take exit belongs on the position's Take Profit
instead. When an account restriction requires it, the option is locked on and
oversized requests are capped at the open position size.

### How limit orders fill

A limit order always fills its whole size. It never fills partially and does not
depend on how much size is showing at its price. What price it fills at depends
on whether the order rests first.

* A buy limit is reached when the best ask is at or below the limit price. A
  sell limit is reached when the best bid is at or above it.
* A limit placed at or through the current market does not rest. It fills right
  away as a standard market order: the whole size at the best ask for a buy or
  the best bid for a sell, under the same mark-based slippage cap as any market
  order, and never worse than your limit price. The order ticket asks you to
  confirm this before submitting.
* A limit resting in Open Orders fills at exactly its limit price once the
  market has reached that price on two order book checks in a row. It never
  fills at a better price than the limit. If the market moves back off the
  price between those checks, the order keeps waiting and the count starts
  over. The first missed confirmation can retry sooner; repeated misses
  wait longer between attempts. A brief touch still does not guarantee a fill.
  A fresh book showing the market
  strictly beyond your resting limit can fill it immediately at the limit
  price. If that book is too old, the order uses the usual confirmation checks.
  Exact touches can start confirmation immediately after the order is
  triggered, but still need a newer book that reaches the limit. If an
  execution attempt is interrupted, the order can return to waiting and retry;
  it does not fill using an old touch alone.
* A Limit take profit or stop loss follows the same rule after it triggers: it
  rests at its price and fills in full at that price once the market reaches
  it, so it can remain unfilled. If the market has already passed the limit
  when it triggers, it fills right away as a market order instead.

### Start a limit order from the chart

Hover the chart and a **+** button appears beside the price label on the price
scale. Click it to start a limit order at that price. A level above the current
price starts a sell limit and a level at or below it starts a buy limit. You
can switch the side in the order ticket.

The order ticket switches to **Limit** with the price filled in, and the chart
draws a dashed draft line at that level. The draft is not placed yet: drag the
line to adjust the price, set the size in the order ticket, then submit the
order there.

You can also right-click the chart and choose **Buy Limit at** or **Sell Limit
at** the price under the pointer.

### Edit a waiting order

In **Open Orders**, click or tap a waiting order's price or size to open
**Edit Order**. You can change the price, the size, or both, then confirm once.
Take profit and stop loss orders open the same editor.

* The size must be a whole number of the market's size steps. If it is not,
  the editor shows the step and keeps **Confirm** disabled.
* After an edit, the order's fill checks start over. Only market activity after
  the change counts toward filling it.
* A resized order must still meet the minimum order value. A reduce-only order
  is capped at your open position, and a take profit or stop loss cannot grow
  past the part of the position it can still close.
* On a partially filled order, the size you enter is the amount still left to
  fill. The amount already filled does not change.
* While an order is executing, its size cannot be changed. Try again once it
  fills or goes back to waiting. If a partial fill is still executing for the
  order or one of its copies, price and size edits must wait too.
* Chase orders and trailing stops cannot be edited. Cancel them and place a new
  order instead.

## How market orders fill

Market orders fill their whole size at the best ask for buys or the best bid
for sells, with maximum adverse slippage capped against the current mark
reference. Each published tier is a **worst-case bound, not a fixed fill offset**. If the book
offers a price inside the cap, your order receives that price. A fill is never
better than the mark itself: buys fill at or above the mark and sells at or
below it, even when the book momentarily sits through the mark.

For buys, the fill is the lower of the best ask and mark × (1 + tier / 10,000),
and at least the mark. For sells, it is the higher of the best bid and
mark × (1 - tier / 10,000), and at most the mark. For example, with a mark of
\$100 and a 1 bps cap, a best ask of \$100.005 fills at \$100.005; a best ask of
\$100.02 fills at the \$100.01 cap; a best ask of \$99.99 fills at the \$100 mark.

Liquidations, automatic close-outs, and Stop Loss or Take Profit market exits
that use ordinary current-quote execution follow the same rule. A Stop Loss or
Take Profit market exit that fills at its touch quote is different: when the
spread is wider than the cap, it fills at the touch bid or ask, which can be
further from the mark than the cap. See
[How triggered Stop Loss and Take Profit exits fill](#how-triggered-stop-loss-and-take-profit-exits-fill).

Forex markets on other venues use the same rules with the forex slippage tier
as the cap. The tier is selected from order notional at the mark. FX limits
retain their price protection: a resting limit needs both the real opposing book price and
the mark to reach its limit, and marketable limits use market-style pricing,
never worse than their limit.

Other instruments retain their maximum adverse slippage caps. Larger notional
and lower open interest may widen those caps; a better opposing book price
within the cap is preserved.

The pricing schedule, in basis points of the reference price. Each value is the maximum adverse slippage, a worst-case cap rather than a fixed spread, including for Forex. Veranta and Ostium use their own charge instead; see [Veranta and Ostium fills](#veranta-and-ostium-fills).

**Major indices and commodities** (NAS100, SP500, XAU, GOLD, SILVER, XAG, CL, BRENTOIL)

| Order notional | Maximum slippage |
| - | - |
| Up to \$100,000 | 0.25 bps |
| Up to \$200,000 | 0.5 bps |
| Up to \$1,000,000 | 0.75 bps |
| Above \$1,000,000 | 1.00 bps |

**Forex**

| Order notional | Maximum slippage |
| - | - |
| Up to \$100,000 | 0.05 bps |
| Up to \$200,000 | 0.08 bps |
| Up to \$1,000,000 | 0.12 bps |
| Above \$1,000,000 | 0.15 bps |

**All other instruments**, by the instrument's current open interest at order
time:

| Open interest | Up to \$100,000 | Up to \$500,000 | Above \$500,000 |
| - | - | - | - |
| Above \$500M | 0.8 bps | 1.2 bps | 2.0 bps |
| \$100M to \$500M | 1.2 bps | 1.8 bps | 3.0 bps |
| \$25M to \$100M | 2.0 bps | 3.0 bps | 5.0 bps |
| \$10M to \$25M | 3.5 bps | 6.0 bps | 9.0 bps |
| Below \$10M | 6.0 bps | 10.0 bps | 16.0 bps |

When an instrument's open interest cannot be observed, the most conservative
band sets the cap; book prices inside the cap are still preserved. Resting
limit orders fill at exactly the limit price once both the opposing top of
book and the mark reference reach it. A limit placed through the market fills as a market order under this same
schedule, never worse than its limit.

### Veranta and Ostium fills

Forex on Veranta, and NAS100, SP500, and US30 on Ostium, fill at the venue's
ask for buys or bid for sells, moved against you by a slippage charge. There is
no cap from the mark, and a fill is never better than the mark. For buys, the
fill is ask × (1 + charge / 10,000); for sells, it is bid × (1 - charge /
10,000).

The charge depends on order notional at the mark. It rises in a straight line
between the amounts below and stays flat above \$2,000,000. For example, a
\$50,000 NAS100 order pays 0.075 bps, and a \$150,000 EUR/USD order pays
0.065 bps.

**NAS100, SP500, and US30 on Ostium**

| Order notional | Slippage charge |
| - | - |
| \$0 | 0 bps |
| \$100,000 | 0.15 bps |
| \$1,000,000 | 0.30 bps |
| \$2,000,000 | 0.60 bps |

**Forex on Veranta**

| Order notional | Slippage charge |
| - | - |
| \$0 | 0 bps |
| \$100,000 | 0.05 bps |
| \$200,000 | 0.08 bps |
| \$1,000,000 | 0.12 bps |
| \$2,000,000 | 0.15 bps |

## Understand trading fees

Commissions apply to each fill's notional when you enter or exit a position.
Maker and taker fills use the same rate within each asset class. Open positions
also incur an hourly swap fee.
[Elite accounts](/guides/elite-accounts#fees) pay reduced rates on NAS100,
SP500, Gold, and WTI Oil only.

Read [Commissions and Fees](/guides/commissions-and-fees) for the rate tables,
entry and exit examples, and how hourly holding costs are calculated.

## Size the order

You can start order tickets in USD or asset units. On Forex markets, asset
units are the base currency, so 100,000 EUR on EUR/USD is the same exposure as
one standard lot. The size slider range changes the shortcuts shown in the
ticket; it does not prevent you from typing another otherwise-valid size.

The order estimates appear below the **Buy / Long** or **Sell / Short** button,
including contract quantity where applicable, price, notional value, margin,
liquidation price, slippage, fees, and exposure limits.

For USD sizing, **Estimated Size** shows the corresponding asset quantity and
symbol, rounded to the market's supported size increment. **Margin Required**
appears for every sizing unit and shows the estimated additional margin needed
for the order, excluding the separately listed fees. It shows zero when the
order only releases margin, and is highlighted when it exceeds your available
balance. These estimates update with the ticket and are checked again at execution.

For market, limit, stop, take-profit, and conditional entry orders, an
**Insufficient Margin** warning above the submit button shows the estimated
shortfall, including trading fees. Reduce your order size when this warning
appears. Orders that only reduce a position do not show this warning. For
resting orders, margin is checked again at execution: price or account changes
can still cause rejection even if the estimate fits when you submit.

When your open positions already reserve your whole balance, a **No Margin
Available** notice appears above **Size** before you enter an amount. It shows
how much margin your open positions use and names the position using the most,
with **Reduce** and **Close** shortcuts. **Reduce** opens the close dialog at
50% of that position and **Close** opens it at 100%, so you can review the exit
before sending it. While the notice shows, market orders cannot be submitted
and the submit button reads **No Margin Available**. Limit, stop, take-profit,
and conditional orders can still be placed, but they are rejected if margin is
still unavailable when they fill. Orders that reduce or close a position in the
same market never show this notice, because they release margin.

Each market remembers the size you last entered on its ticket, in the unit
you entered it, so switching to another market and back, or reloading the
page, keeps it. The size is saved in this browser only. Reduce-only sizes are
not saved. With **Clear Size After Order** on, an accepted order also clears
the saved size for that market.

The percentage slider's maximum reflects the smaller of the size your
available margin can support and the remaining per-user market exposure
capacity for that asset, so a full-slider order stays inside both limits.

Oil, Gold, Silver, NAS100, and SP500 can also use whole mini or micro
futures-equivalent contracts. The platform back-solves a perpetual position
with the same dollar-per-point exposure as the selected CME/COMEX contract.
This changes order sizing only; it does not create or settle an
exchange-traded futures contract.

| Market | Mini contract | Mini exposure | Micro contract | Micro exposure |
| - | - | - | - | - |
| NAS100 | NQ | \$20 per point | MNQ | \$2 per point |
| SP500 | ES | \$50 per point | MES | \$5 per point |
| Gold | QO | \$50 per point | MGC | \$10 per point |
| Silver | QI | \$2,500 per point | SIL | \$1,000 per point |
| WTI Crude Oil | QM | \$500 per point | MCL | \$100 per point |

Mini and micro modes use the market's maximum leverage to calculate required
margin. The resulting platform position rounds down to the market's supported
size increment. The contract slider uses whole numbers; its saved range changes
the visible shortcuts, while direct entry can use a larger whole-contract
amount. Markets without a maintained mapping show only USD and asset units.

Review both size and leverage before submitting. Higher leverage reduces the
margin assigned to the same notional position but leaves less room for adverse
movement before liquidation or a challenge-rule breach.

Each market remembers the leverage you last confirmed on its order ticket, so
setting 3x on one market does not change another. A market you have not set
uses your open position's leverage there, or 1x if you have none. A saved
choice above the market's current maximum is lowered to that maximum.

An open position normally keeps its leverage until an order adds to it. To
change an open **Cross** position's leverage without trading, turn on **Apply
Leverage to Open Cross Positions** in **Settings > Trading**. Confirming a new
leverage on that market's order ticket then updates the position at once: its
size, entry price, and balance stay the same, and only its margin changes.
Raising leverage frees margin. Lowering it needs enough available margin and is
refused if it would put your cross positions at liquidation; your order ticket
still keeps the new leverage for future orders. Isolated positions are not
changed.

Hover over a market's leverage badge, such as **10×**, to see **Maximum
Leverage** and **Maximum Position Size** for your selected account. The position
size is shown in USD and uses the lowest applicable per-position, account-wide,
and per-user market exposure ceiling for that asset, account model, and account
size. The same tooltip appears in the trade header, market picker, Markets
table, and search results. Sign in and select an account to see its limit.

This is a configured ceiling, not your remaining buying power. Available
margin, your other positions, and exposure in your own matching accounts using the market
limit can reduce how much you can open. Orders still pass the trading engine's
checks when placed and filled.

Read [Asset Exposure Limits](/guides/asset-exposure-limits) for how per-user
market caps work and a link to the current market-by-market limits.

## Choose a margin mode

| Mode | Meaning |
| - | - |
| Isolated | Margin is managed for the individual position. The selected mode is stored on that position. |
| Cross | Eligible account collateral supports cross-margin positions together. Losses can consume more of the account's shared balance. |

Changing the default affects newly opened positions. It does not rewrite the
margin mode of an existing position.

An order that adds to an open position, or reverses it, must use that
position's margin mode. If the order ticket is set to the other mode, it names
the position's mode, offers a one-click switch, and keeps the order button
unavailable until the modes match. Orders that only reduce or close the
position can use either mode.

## Add Take Profit and Stop Loss Orders

Chart TP/SL gain and loss estimates include entry and estimated exit trading
fees, including while a triggered exit is waiting to fill. They are estimates
at the trigger price: market movement and the spread can change the final loss.

Take Profit and Stop Loss instructions help define exits before an order is
submitted. You can show their estimated gain or loss in percent or USD, and
save a TP/SL preset that fills the same gain and loss on every market (see
[Trading settings](/settings/trading)). Review
the trigger, direction, quantity, and whether the exit uses market or limit
behavior where the ticket offers that choice.

In the Take Profit and Stop Loss window for an open position, a new Take Profit
starts with the **Market** or **Limit** option you picked last time. Choosing
the other option saves it as your new starting choice. Stop Loss always starts
at **Market**, and existing orders keep their own setting.

For a new order, you can enter either a trigger price or an estimated gain or
loss. The last field you edit controls the target. If you enter a USD amount or
percentage, the draft trigger price updates with the estimated entry price,
size, leverage, and fees until you submit. If you enter or drag the trigger
price, that price stays fixed and the gain or loss estimate updates instead.
If you switch between Long and Short, a fixed Take Profit or Stop Loss price
moves to the other side of the entry price at the same distance, so it still
protects the new direction. Once submitted, the order uses its saved trigger
price.

You can attach a Take Profit and Stop Loss to market, limit, Stop Market, Stop
Limit, Take Market, and Take Limit entries. On a limit, stop, or take entry, the
TP/SL waits with the order and is placed only when the entry fills, so it cannot
trigger before you have a position. A TP/SL on a Stop Market or Take Market
entry is checked against its trigger price, and on a Stop Limit or Take Limit
entry against its limit price. If the entry fills at a price that would put the
Take Profit or Stop Loss on the wrong side of your entry, the order is rejected
instead of opening an unprotected position. You can change or remove a waiting
TP/SL from **Open Orders** until the entry fills. Reduce-only orders cannot
carry a TP/SL.

While you draft a limit, Stop Market, Stop Limit, Take Market, or Take Limit
order, its draft line on the chart shows **TP** and **SL** handles once its
prices are filled in. Drag a handle up or down to set that Take Profit or Stop
Loss price. The ticket turns on TP/SL and fills in the price, and the draft
line stays in sync with the ticket as you edit either one. Nothing is placed
until you submit the order. A handle is hidden once its level is set, and the
SL handle is hidden while a trailing stop is selected. The selected amount is
an estimate, not a guaranteed final profit or loss.

The same handles appear on the line of a placed limit, stop, or take entry
while it waits to fill. Releasing one sets that order's waiting TP/SL, just
like editing it from **Open Orders**.

Each draft **TP** and **SL** line shows the estimated profit or loss in USD
next to its price, after estimated fees, once the order has a size. For a
market order the estimate follows the live price until you submit.

A dragged Take Profit or Stop Loss is kept on the correct side of the entry it
will protect: the trigger price of a Stop Market or Take Market order, or the
limit price of a limit, Stop Limit, or Take Limit order.

New Take Profit, Stop Loss, and other conditional orders use the market's
standard chart source:

| Venue | Trigger source |
| - | - |
| Binance, Bybit, Hyperliquid | Last traded price |
| Veranta (forex), Ostium | Mark price (venue mid) |

For Last Price triggers, one actual trade touching your level is enough,
including a small trade. The platform does not wait for the candle to close
or for the mark price to reach the same level. Liquidation and account loss
monitoring use their separate price references.

Orders placed before this update keep their original trigger policy. Editing
a trigger price or size does not switch that policy. To use the new policy,
cancel the old conditional order and place a replacement. Attached TP/SL also
keeps the policy of its entry order if that entry fills after the update.

### How triggered Stop Loss and Take Profit exits fill

When a Stop Loss or Take Profit market exit triggers, the platform looks up the
first recorded best bid and ask at or after the moment the trigger was touched.
If that touch quote is available and the order and position have not changed
since, the exit fills from the touch quote, and that price stays fixed while
the fill is processed:

* A sell (closing a long) fills at the best bid seen at the touch. A buy
  (closing a short) fills at the best ask seen at the touch.
* The slippage cap is measured from the touch quote's midpoint (the average of
  its bid and ask). When the touch bid or ask is inside the cap, you get that
  price. The fill is never better than the midpoint.
* When the spread is wider than the cap, the exit fills at the touch bid or ask
  itself, not at the capped price. That fill can be further from the midpoint
  than the published tier. The exit is not repriced from a later quote.
* If the touch bid or ask is beyond the order's own slippage tolerance from
  the midpoint, the touch quote is not used and the exit uses ordinary
  current-quote execution instead.

For example, a long position's Stop Loss at \$28,501.99 on NAS100 triggers
during a fast sell-off. The touch quote is a \$28,499 bid and a \$28,533 ask, so
the midpoint is \$28,516. A 1 bps cap from that midpoint would be \$28,513.15,
but no buyer was bidding that price. The stop fills at the \$28,499 bid.

Wide spreads are most common in thin conditions: fast moves, low liquidity,
and the **24/7** option of index and commodity markets outside regular market
hours, including weekends. In those conditions a triggered exit can fill well
away from the midpoint.

Orders that keep the original trigger policy, recent edits or position
increases, and missing quote history use ordinary current-quote execution, which applies the capped rule in
[How market orders fill](#how-market-orders-fill) to the current quote. If a
current quote is too old or predates the trigger, execution waits for a newer
quote. The trigger price is not a guaranteed fill price, and fast moves or
temporary data delays can affect the result. Limit exits continue to require
their limit-price conditions.

The first recorded quote can be up to one second after the touch on Hyperliquid
and up to half a second on Binance and Bybit. If the gap in quote history exceeds
the venue's limit, the order uses ordinary current-quote execution.

### Reading slippage on a closed position

A closed position can show two slippage figures, measured against different
prices:

| Figure | Measured against | What it includes |
| - | - | - |
| **Slippage** | The market reference (the midpoint for order-book markets) at the moment each fill executed | Every entry and exit fill on the position, combined. |
| **Exit slippage vs trigger** | The closing Stop Loss or Take Profit order's trigger price, times its size | Only that closing order. |

In order history, a filled Stop Loss, Take Profit, or other triggered order
shows **Slippage vs trigger** for the same comparison. For both figures, a
positive value means the fill was worse than its reference and a negative value
means it was better. Both are already included in your PnL and are separate
from fees.

The two can differ a lot. In the NAS100 example above, the stop filled
\$2.99 per unit below its trigger but \$17 per unit below the touch midpoint, so the position's
**Slippage** total is larger than its **Exit slippage vs trigger**. A large
**Slippage** figure on a stopped-out position usually reflects a wide spread
at the touch, not a fill far from your stop.

### Adding to a position with attached TP/SL

When you add to a position you already hold and attach a Take Profit or Stop
Loss to the new order, the attached exit covers your full resulting position,
not only the added size. Your existing exits in the same group (stop losses
for a stop loss, take profits for a take profit) overlap that coverage, so the
order ticket asks you to confirm before it submits. The review lists each
existing exit that will be canceled and the new exit that replaces it. If you
confirm, the replacement happens in the same transaction as the fill; for a
limit order, that is when the order fills. If you decline, nothing is
submitted and your existing exits stay in place.

For example, adding 0.115 BTC to a 0.115 BTC long with a take profit at
\$88,000 and confirming a new take profit at \$89,000 replaces the old take
profit with one covering the resulting 0.230 BTC position when the entry
fills. The same confirmation applies to stop losses and short positions.

Without confirmation the platform never cancels a protective order on your
behalf. An exit that is executing at that moment is never replaced, so the
order can still be rejected until that exit settles.

When you add to a position without attaching a new Take Profit or Stop Loss,
your existing exits grow with the position so they keep covering the same
share of it. You can turn this off with
[Resize TP/SL With Position](/settings/trading).

Before you place an order that adds to a position with a Take Profit or Stop
Loss, the order ticket shows **TP/SL after this order**: your estimated average
entry after the fill and, for each existing exit, its trigger price, its size
before and after the fill, and its estimated profit or loss at the trigger after
fees. Trigger prices do not change; the profit or loss changes because the
position's size and average entry change. An exit the new order would replace
shows its reduced size, or **Canceled**. These figures are estimates: the final
entry depends on the actual fill price.

Once the server detects your trigger price on the market's price feed, a move
back across that level does not cancel the trigger. An eligible market exit keeps
its accepted touch-time quote through retries; otherwise execution uses a fresh
market book and still applies the order's execution protections. Editing the
order resets its trigger, so an earlier crossing cannot fire the edited order.

> [!WARNING]
>
> A Stop Loss reduces risk but cannot guarantee a particular fill price. Fast
> markets, gaps, available liquidity, and the configured exit type still affect
> execution.

## Use execution protection

The Trading settings include:

* **Max Market Slippage**, a server-enforced limit for ordinary market orders
  and individual position closes;
* separate **Non-Forex** and **Forex leverage caps** for the order ticket;
* **Warn Without Stop Loss** for orders that can increase exposure;
* **Resize TP/SL With Position** to keep existing exits sized to a position
  you add to;
* confirmation controls for new orders and TP/SL chart drags;
* **One-Click Chart Close** for closing a position from the chart's position
  line without the close dialog;
* **Show Reverse Position** and **Confirm Reverse Position** for the
  [Reverse Position](#reverse-a-position) button and its review;
* **One-Click Trading**, which sends market orders from a small Buy, Sell,
  percent, and Flat window with no review step;
* account-synced keyboard execution for placing orders, managing focused
  positions, canceling focused orders, and the reviewed Cancel All and Close
  All actions.

Read the complete [Trading settings reference](/settings/trading) to configure
these defaults.

## Customize the terminal layout

On desktop widths the trading terminal is rearrangeable. The chart stays in
the center with the activity tabs below it; the order book and order ticket
can move between the zones around them.

The **Layout** button (the layout icon in the market stats bar) opens the
terminal layout menu:

* **Colour Scheme**: start with Graphite, Midnight, or Aubergine, then choose
  **Customize Colours** to adjust each terminal background, surface, text,
  accent, border, input, and chart colour individually. Drag the swatch
  picker, or type or paste a hex value such as `#c084fc` into the field beside
  it (the `#` is optional, and three-digit shorthand like `#abc` works too).
  The terminal palette does not change the theme used by the rest of the
  app. Each preview shows
  the chart, data rows, and order ticket in your current light or dark mode.
  The chart has its own quiet canvas, order tickets use a raised surface,
  and inputs are recessed. The Layout menu and its colour, save, and import
  dialogs follow the terminal palette. Buy/Sell and gain/loss colours keep
  their trading meanings.
* **Pro**: the complete terminal with the chart, order book, order ticket,
  and activity tabs. This is the default.
* **Simple**: a leaner terminal that keeps the order book hidden until you
  need it.
* **Saved Layouts**: your own named arrangements. Use **Save Current Layout**
  to name the arrangement on screen; select a saved layout to reapply it, or
  delete it from the same menu. You can save up to 8 layouts.
* **Edit Current Layout**: enter edit mode to rearrange panels. Panel
  dragging is disabled outside edit mode so chart and order entry
  interactions remain unchanged.
* **Copy Layout Code** and **Import Layout Code**: export your arrangement as
  a shareable code string, or paste another trader's code to replicate their
  exact layout.
* **Reset to Default**: restore the platform default arrangement and panel
  sizes in one click.

Choose **Edit Current Layout** to enter edit mode. The edit toolbar takes the
place of the market stats bar while you edit, so the terminal stays where it
is. In edit mode, drag any panel by its handle onto a highlighted zone: an
existing column, or a strip at the edge where a new column will appear.
Hovering a zone outlines where the panel will land and names the zone. You
can also use the panel's **Move To** menu. Each panel header also has a hide
button. Panels glide into their new places, and rearranging never reloads the
main chart. The edit toolbar keeps the arrangement with **Done**, restores
the layout you selected before editing with **Reset**, or names the
arrangement with **Save as Layout**.

### Narrower windows

In a narrower window, such as a split screen, the chart sits above the order
book and order ticket. Drag the divider under the chart to change its height,
and double-click the divider to restore the default height. Drag the divider
between the order book and order ticket to resize them. The collapse button in
the order book's header, or dragging the order book narrow enough, collapses it
to a slim strip; click the strip to reopen it. Your sizes are remembered on that
device.

### Multiple charts

On a desktop-width window, the chart layout buttons beside **Terminal Layout**
in the market stats bar, or the **Chart Layout** section of the **Terminal
Layout** menu, split the chart area into **One Chart**, **Two Charts** side by
side, or **Four Charts** in a grid. Every chart is a full
chart with your indicators, drawing tools, saved chart layouts, and position
and order lines for the market it shows.

* The first chart always shows the market in the address bar. Picking a
  different market in its header opens that market's trade page.
* Each other chart has its own market picker in its header and keeps its own
  timeframe, so you can watch different markets, or the same market on
  different timeframes. Changing its market or timeframe does not retarget the
  other charts. Markets with
  [two trading-hour options](#markets-with-two-trading-hour-options), such as
  SP500 and NAS100, follow the **Trading Hours** picker in the market bar on
  every chart, so the same market shows the same prices on each. A chart the layout shows for the first time starts on the market in the address
  bar, on the 1h, 4h, or daily timeframe.
* Saved chart customizations are shared across charts. Charts showing the same
  market also share saved drawings. If you edit drawings in both, the latest
  save is kept.
* Click a chart to trade its market. The active chart gets a highlighted
  border, and the order ticket, order book, and One-Click window switch to its
  market. When that market differs from the address bar, the ticket and book
  show a "Following chart" strip with the market name, and the buy and sell
  buttons name the market, so you can confirm it before you submit. While two
  or four charts show, the One-Click window's header names the market its
  **Sell** and **Buy** buttons trade, with its trading hours (**Standard
  Market Hours** or **24/7**) when the market has both. Click the first chart, or open a
  different market, to return them to the market in the address bar.
* Starting a limit order from the chart's context menu works in the first
  chart only.
* Drag the line between charts to make one larger and the other smaller. In
  the four-chart grid, the line between columns and the line between rows each
  move on their own. Double-click a line to split the space evenly again.
  Chart sizes are saved to your account, so they follow you to other browsers.

Choose **One Chart** at any time to return to the single chart. The layout and
each chart's market and timeframe are remembered per browser. Charts you are
not showing are closed and do not load market data. Phone and narrow-window
layouts always show one chart.

### Widgets

The **Widgets** row in the edit toolbar lists every panel that is not on
screen; scroll it sideways when it holds more widgets than fit. Drag a widget
chip onto a highlighted zone, or open its **Place in** menu and pick a zone,
and it joins the terminal there. Hiding a placed widget returns it to the
row. Widgets you can place:

* **Market Chart**: a compact chart with its own market picker and timeframe
  chips, so you can watch one market while trading another. While it is
  placed, the bottom-bar **Chart** button shows "Docked in the terminal"
  instead of opening a floating window; the widget and the floating window
  share the same market and timeframe. Click the docked chart to trade its
  market: the order ticket and order book switch to it, both show a
  "Following chart" strip with the market name, and the chart gets a
  highlighted border. Click the main chart, or open a different market, to
  return the ticket to the market in the address bar. The address bar, stats
  bar, and main chart never change with focus.
* **Advanced Chart**: a second full chart like the main one, with its own
  market picker plus the same indicators, drawing tools, saved layouts,
  and position and order lines for the market it shows. It
  starts on the market in the address bar until you pick another. Unlike
  Market Chart it never moves the order ticket or order book: they stay on
  the market in the address bar no matter which market this chart displays.
* **Watchlist** and **Top Volume**: the same lists as the bottom-bar windows,
  kept in view.
* **Calculator**: the trading calculator with its own market picker. It starts
  on the market you are trading and then keeps whatever market you choose.
* **Account Stats**: the active account's live metrics.
* **Market Map**: the markets page heat map, with tiles sized by open interest
  and coloured by 24h change. Click a tile to trade that market.
* **Open Interest & Volume**: the market-wide open interest and 24h volume
  figures with their trend charts, stacked vertically in narrow panels.
* **Market Movers**: the top gainers and losers across the listed markets.
  The header chips switch between 1h, 24h, and 7d change, and the dropdown
  narrows the list to one asset class. Your picks are remembered per browser.
* **Market Sentiment**: the Fear & Greed index, altcoin season score, average
  RSI, and total market cap from the markets overview.

Widgets can sit in either rail or, except for the calculator and account
stats, beside the chart. Several panels in one zone stack vertically with a
draggable divider between them. Hidden widgets never load market data.
Widgets are part of your saved layouts and shared layout codes, and a code
that names a widget your app does not recognize simply leaves it out.

Layout choices and saved layouts, including their colour scheme, are stored on
your account and follow you across devices. Shared layout codes include the
colour scheme too. Panel sizes (column widths and chart height) are remembered
per browser. Phone and narrow-window layouts keep the standard responsive
arrangement while using the selected terminal colour scheme.

Panels have no minimum size. Drag any divider to make a column, the chart, or
the activity table as narrow or as short as you like; content inside scrolls or
clips instead of pushing the divider back. Dragging the order book below its
collapsed strip snaps it closed, and the strip's expand button restores it. The
activity table keeps its tab strip visible so you can always drag the chart
back down, and **Reset to Default** restores the standard sizes. Floating
windows such as the calculator, mini chart, and account stats can likewise be
shrunk down to just their title bar.

To share only your colours, open **Customize Colours** and choose **Copy Code**.
The colour code contains the editor's current colours, including unsaved changes.
You can also select the code and copy it manually. The same palette produces the
same code, and codes do not expire.

To try a shared palette, paste its complete code into **Import Colour Code** and
choose **Preview Colours** (or press Enter). The editor previews the imported
colours without changing your panel arrangement. Choose **Save Colours** to keep
them, or close the editor to discard the preview. Invalid codes leave your colours
unchanged. Colour codes preserve the sender's exact colours even if you use a
different light or dark theme.

The editor changes the colours of the theme you are using now: switch between
light and dark mode to customize each one separately. Chart lines such as bid,
ask, buy, sell, take profit, stop loss, and liquidation have their own colours
below the interface colours.

The colour editor warns when a text and background combination may be hard to
read. **Reset Dark Mode** or **Reset Light Mode** removes every individual
override for the current theme while keeping the selected built-in scheme and
the other theme's colours. Chart canvas, grid, and text overrides become the
TradingView defaults, while colours changed directly in TradingView remain
unchanged.

> [!NOTE]
>
> Hiding the order ticket removes the order entry form until you show it again
> from customize mode or apply another arrangement.

## Automatic closure after an evaluation pass

When the server confirms that your evaluation equity reaches its profit
target and the other pass requirements are clear, the account automatically
passes and closes its open positions. Open profit and loss count toward
equity, so you do not need to close trades yourself to realize the target.
Closing fees or slippage can leave the final balance slightly below target
without changing the passed result. See
[Evaluation Progress](/guides/challenge-lifecycle/evaluation-progress).

## Understand rejections

An order can be rejected when it would violate account rules, collateral or
position limits, current market availability or
[trading hours](#trading-hours), execution protection, a pending payout lock,
or copy-follower restrictions. Read the message attached to the
rejected order, confirm the active account, then change only the condition that
caused the rejection.

Copy trading accounts can belong to only one enabled group at a time. If
saving copy settings reports a membership conflict, resolve the existing group
before reusing the account. See [Copy Trading Settings](/settings/copy-trading#group-controls)
for the explicit controls and order-cancellation consequences.

Do not repeatedly resubmit an unchanged order. If the reason remains unclear,
use [Troubleshooting and FAQ](/guides/troubleshooting-and-faq).

### Hourly opening limit

Each account can open or add to positions worth up to \$25,000,000 in order
value per market in any rolling hour. A reversal (closing a position and
opening the other side in one order) counts at its full order value. Reducing
or closing a position is never limited.

When less than 20% of the limit is left, or the order you entered would not
fit, the order form shows an **Hourly Opening Limit** row with the remaining
room and when more frees up. An order over the limit is rejected with the
amount available now and about how long until it fits. Room frees up on its
own as earlier orders pass the one-hour mark, so you do not need to contact
support.

### Unconfirmed market orders

If the connection drops or the page reloads while a market order is on its
way, the app may not learn whether the order went through. A notice above your
positions then shows the order as unconfirmed. Within about 30 seconds of
sending it, the app checks with the server once: an order the server received
is settled and appears in your positions and order history, and an order that
never arrived is cleared. Either way the notice disappears.

While an order is unconfirmed, new market orders that open a position on the
same account wait, so a reload cannot place the same trade twice. Closing a
position, **Close All**, and **Flat** are never held back. If the notice stays,
check your positions and order history, then choose **Retry original** to
resend the same order (it cannot fill twice) or **Dismiss** to clear it.

## Today's fill statistics

The dashboard counts fills on the day they settle, even if you placed the order
on an earlier day. Today's fees, realized PnL, traded volume, and fill win rate
use the same fills. The day runs from midnight to midnight in America/New\_York,
including daylight saving changes. Unfilled orders and historical fills with no
recorded settlement time are excluded from these daily statistics.

## Today's P\&L

Today's P\&L measures the change in equity since midnight in America/New\_York.
It includes changes in unrealized profit or loss, trading fees, and swap fees,
so it can differ from the profit on trades closed today. The swap fee charged
at midnight belongs to the day that just ended, so it is not part of today's
P\&L.

If you closed all positions before today's reset and have had no activity
since, today's P\&L is \$0.00. Yesterday's gain or loss is already included in
your balance. A page left open checks the current day once per minute without
requiring a refresh. If you have open positions and today's starting equity
is not yet available, the daily P\&L value and its share action remain
unavailable until that value arrives.


# Trading Journal
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/trading-journal

Review auto-logged closed trades, R multiples, hold-time tags, and add notes, setups, tags, mistakes, and ratings.

## Open the journal

The journal lives on the dashboard at
[myfundedperpetuals.com/dashboard/journal](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/dashboard/journal).
Every trade you close on the selected challenge account appears there
automatically: entry and exit prices, size, leverage, fees, funding, and close
reason all come from your trading history. There is no manual trade entry and
nothing to sync.

## What is logged for each trade

A journal trade is one complete position lifecycle (open to fully closed).
Each row shows:

* Close time, market, side, and leverage.
* Entry size and lifecycle entry/exit prices (volume-weighted when the
  position filled in parts).
* Hold time, with an automatic bucket: Scalp (under 15 minutes), Intraday
  (under 24 hours), or Swing (24 hours or longer).
* Net P\&L (realized P\&L minus fees, plus funding).
* R multiple, when the trade has one (see below).

## R multiple

The R multiple expresses net P\&L as a multiple of the risk you defined at
entry: the distance from your entry price to the stop loss attached when the
order was placed, times the entry size.

> [!NOTE]
>
> A trade only has an R multiple when a stop loss was attached to the entry
> order. Trades without an attached stop, and trades opened before this feature
> shipped, show no value instead of an estimated one. Moving the stop after
> entry does not change the recorded initial risk.

## Reviewing a trade

Select any row to open its dedicated trade review page. The page opens with a
candlestick chart of the trade's hold window: the entry and exit are marked on
the candles, and the entry, exit, initial stop, and initial target levels are
drawn as horizontal lines. The chart picks a candle interval that fits the
hold, from one-minute candles for a scalp up to daily candles for a long
swing.

Trade facts (prices, fees, funding, initial stop and target, hold time) are
read-only. You can add:

* **Notes**: free-form review text, up to 2,000 characters.
* **Setup**: a short label for the strategy or pattern you traded.
* **Tags** and **Mistakes**: separate lists so errors stay visible. Up to 12
  of each, added with Enter. Both inputs suggest the labels you used on
  recent entries, so a recurring setup or mistake keeps one consistent name.
* **Execution rating**: 1 to 10. Ratings saved on the earlier 1 to 5 scale
  are shown doubled so they stay comparable.

Select Save Journal to store the entry; a confirmation appears when the save
lands. Clearing every field and saving removes the entry, which marks the
trade **Not Journaled** again. Only closed trades can be journaled, and only the
account owner can write entries.

## Share a trade publicly

Turn on **Public Trade** from a trade's review page to create a public,
read-only link. Anyone with the link can see the trade facts, chart, and saved
journal entry. They cannot edit the notes, labels, rating, chart layout, or any
other trade data. Challenge account identifiers and owner identity are not
included in the public view.

Use **Copy Link** after enabling visibility. Turn **Public Trade** off at any
time to revoke access immediately. A trade is private by default, and clearing
its journal review does not change the visibility choice.

## Replay a trade

Select **Replay** on a closed trade's review page to download a short MP4
video of the trade: the candles play forward from entry to exit with your
entry and exit levels marked. The button shows its progress while the video
renders. **Replay** is also available in the PnL card dialog for a closed
trade.

## Working through the queue

The review page includes Previous and Next controls that step through your
recent trades in close order, and Save & Review Next stores the current entry
and jumps straight to the next trade without a journal entry. Each trade in the
table shows **Not Journaled** until you save an entry for it, then
**Journaled**. These labels track your own notes only; they are not a review by
MyFundedPerps and do not affect your account. The journal table shows how many
trades are not journaled yet, and the Journal filter narrows the table to just
those.

## Filters and history depth

Filter the table by journal status, or search it. The table loads
your most recent trades first and loads older trades as you page toward the
end, until your whole history is loaded. While older trades remain, the row
count shows a plus sign, such as **200+ rows**, and the page indicator shows
only the current page. Search and the journal filter apply to the trades
loaded so far. The performance tiles and P\&L calendar above the table use
the same analytics ranges as the
[Performance page](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/dashboard/performance).
The P\&L calendar places each trade on the New York trading day it closed in,
the same day your daily loss limit uses. That day starts at midnight New York
time, so a trade closed in the evening in the Americas counts toward that same
date.

Select **Download CSV** to export the account's complete journal history. The
file includes every closed trade, not only the rows currently loaded in the
table, together with trade facts, calculated results, journal status, setup,
tags, mistakes, execution rating, and notes.


# Troubleshooting and FAQ
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/troubleshooting-and-faq

Find commission rates, daily reset times, and payout options, and diagnose common trading, account, and billing problems.

Start with the message shown in the app. MyFundedPerps attaches a specific
reason or support reference when an operation cannot be completed.

## What are the trading commissions?

Commissions are execution fees on each fill, including entry and exit. The rate
is 0.03% for crypto, 0.0025% for forex, and 0.005% for stocks, commodities, and
indices. Maker and taker rates are the same. Read
[Commissions and Fees](/guides/commissions-and-fees) for examples and the
separate hourly swap fees.

## Can I pay lower trading fees?

Yes, on Select, Prime, and Signature accounts. Reduced Fees halves every
commission and swap fee on accounts that have the add-on. It costs 10% of the
challenge price after discounts, with a \$10 minimum. Elite accounts are not
eligible. Read [Reduced Fees](/guides/commissions-and-fees#reduced-fees).

## What time does the daily loss limit reset?

At **12:00 a.m. (midnight) New York time**, with daylight saving time applied.
Elite 3% DLL accounts follow it; No DLL accounts have none. Read [Daily Loss Reset Time](/guides/challenges-and-rules#daily-loss-reset-time)
for UTC equivalents and what the reset changes.

## What time do payout requests reset?

Each funded account's daily request allowance resets at **12:00 a.m.
(midnight) New York time**. Elite accounts have no daily limit. A pending
request must finish before another can be submitted. Read [Daily Payout Window](/guides/challenge-lifecycle/payouts#daily-payout-window)
for the full rules.

## Where are the Elite rules?

Elite has its own sizes, prices, daily loss limit options, static loss limit,
leverage and exposure caps, funded allocation limit, and payout minimums. Read
[Elite Accounts](/guides/elite-accounts).

## Is there a lifetime payout limit?

Yes. Once your combined payouts across all MyFundedPerps accounts reach
**\$100,000**, counted after the profit split, you have graduated and can no
longer purchase new accounts. Your active funded accounts are not closed: you
can keep trading them and taking payouts from them, even above \$100,000.
Purchasing new accounts or resetting existing accounts does not reset the
total. Read
[Lifetime Payout Cap](/guides/challenge-lifecycle/payouts#lifetime-payout-cap).

## Can I redeem a payout for store credit?

Yes. You can convert all or part of a funded payout to store credit with a
**5% boost**. Converting \$100 grants \$105 in store credit when the payout is
paid. That credit cannot be withdrawn as cash and expires 45 days after it is
added. Read
[Split Cash and Store Credit](/guides/challenge-lifecycle/payouts#split-cash-and-store-credit).

## Does store credit expire?

Yes. Store credit expires 45 days after it is issued. Checkout uses the credit that
expires soonest first. Select **Expiry Schedule** under your balance on
[Rewards](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/rewards?tab=credit) to see each expiry
date. Read
[Store Credit Expiry](/guides/challenge-lifecycle/billing-and-rewards#store-credit-expiry).

## Do FP Points expire?

Yes. FP Points expire 90 days after they are earned, and points earned before
September 11, 2026 expire at 11:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time on December 9, 2026 (04:00 UTC on
December 10). Opening a case spends the points that expire soonest first.
Select **Expiry Schedule** on the FP Points tab of
[Rewards](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/rewards?tab=points) to see each expiry
date. Read
[FP Points Expiry](/guides/challenge-lifecycle/billing-and-rewards#fp-points-expiry).

## Can I hold forex and index positions over the weekend?

No. All open positions on markets that follow trading hours (the forex and
index markets marked **24/5** or **23/5**) close automatically 15 minutes
before the market's scheduled weekend close. A warning on the trade page shows
the upcoming auto-close time during the final hour. New positions cannot be
opened on those markets after the auto-close time until the market reopens.
Auto-closed positions show **Weekend Auto-Close** in your trade history. See
[Weekend auto-close](/guides/trading-guide#weekend-auto-close).

## A tool or footer is unavailable

If the market picker, calculator, chart panel, layout switcher, footer, or
bottom toolbar cannot load, the rest of the page stays available. Select
**Refresh** beside the unavailable item to reload the page and try again.
You can also close a failed market picker to continue viewing the current
market. The footer's legal, support, and cookie-preference links remain
available in its fallback view.

After an app update, the next page you open loads the new version. A page you
stay on may refresh automatically once to load the new files, or show an
**Update Available** prompt with a refresh button. Repeated loading failures show a manual refresh option instead of
immediately refreshing again. If the whole page shows **Something Went Wrong**,
include its error reference when contacting support.

## The chart or prices do not load

If prices stop updating, the chart shows **Reconnecting** while the app tries
again on its own. If it cannot reconnect, you may see **Stream Unavailable**,
**Chart Unavailable**, or **Prices Can’t Load**. Your account, orders, and fills
are not affected.

A working connection alone does not mean fresh prices are arriving. While the
page is visible, about a minute without fresh price updates shows
**Stream Unavailable** if the upstream feed connection also stops responding,
even when your browser connection still works.
The app attempts one reconnect within the next 30 seconds and clears the warning
when fresh updates or upstream connection responses return. The chart can keep
its last displayed prices during this time; do not treat them as current. Quiet
or closed markets alone do not trigger this warning. After returning from a
background tab, the app allows a fresh grace
period before showing this warning.

If you’re using an ad blocker or VPN, try turning it off. Then select
**Retry**. If the chart still does not load, contact support and include the
error ID shown on the chart, such as `CH-202`.

## An order was rejected

1. Confirm the active account, market, direction, size, leverage, and order
   type.
2. Read the rejection shown in order history or the notification.
3. Check available collateral, open positions, challenge-rule headroom, and
   current market availability.
4. Check whether the account is locked by copy trading, a pending payout, or a
   terminal account state.
5. If the rejection mentions execution protection, review your Max Market
   Slippage or leverage-cap settings.

Do not repeatedly submit the same unchanged instruction. A rejected order does
not mean the platform will accept it on the next click.

If a rejection mentions unavailable or stale market data, the server could not
obtain a fresh execution book. **Connected** describes your live market-data
connection; it does not guarantee that an order can execute. For quiet Binance
markets, the server can attempt one fresh venue snapshot before rejecting a
missing or stale book, including when submitting an order or closing a
position. This recovery allows up to two seconds, including waiting for a live
update and the snapshot request. Orders sharing a recovery do not trigger
automatic retries. If fresh data still cannot be obtained, wait briefly before
trying again.

## A follower did not copy a trade

Confirm that the group is enabled and cleanup is not pending. Then verify that
the follower is active, belongs to the same user, has an allowed stage pairing,
and has enough independent rule and collateral headroom. A follower can reject
an order while the lead continues normally.

Read [Copy Trading Guide](/guides/copy-trading-guide) for the full model.

## I cannot trade a follower manually

This is expected while the account belongs to an enabled copy-trading group or
while stop cleanup is still closing positions and canceling orders. Disable the
group, wait for cleanup to complete, then retry.

## A setting is unavailable or does not save

Confirm that you are signed in and online. Account-synced settings cannot be
persisted for a signed-out visitor. Refresh after connectivity returns; if the
app shows a support reference, include it when asking for help.

## A page fails to load

On **Something Went Wrong**, select **Try Again** to reload the current page.
The reload keeps its address, including any filters in the URL, and retries
loading the page's data and files. If it still fails, include the displayed
error reference when contacting support.

The app automatically tries to reconnect and reload the same page once per
browser tab when a protected page loses its session. If your session has
expired, the app returns home so you can sign in again. If you still see
**Session Unavailable**, select **Try Again** to reconnect manually or
**Back to Home**. Automatic recovery requires browser session storage; the
manual options remain available when storage is blocked. This message is
separate from a permissions rejection.

## Sounds or notifications are missing

Check both the event toggle and the selected sound under
[Notifications settings](/settings/notifications). Confirm the master volume,
browser tab audio permission, and device volume. Custom uploads must be audio
files within the size accepted by the uploader.

## App installation is unavailable

Install support depends on the browser and device. On iPhone or iPad, use the
in-app instructions to add MyFundedPerps to the Home Screen. Other browsers
may show a native install prompt or an install action in their own menu.

## Checkout says I reached a purchase limit

You can hold up to \$100K in active evaluations per model type (Prime, Select,
Signature, and Elite). If an order would go over that, checkout says how much
room the model has left. Choose another model with enough room, or wait until
one of your active evaluations in that model passes or fails. See
[Maximum active evaluation allocation](/guides/challenges-and-rules#maximum-active-evaluation-allocation).

Elite No DLL purchases are also limited to \$250,000 in total account size in
any rolling 7-day period. If an Elite No DLL order would go over that, checkout
shows when the order fits and offers **Try Elite 3% DLL**, which is not
affected by that limit. See
[No DLL purchase limit](/guides/elite-accounts#no-dll-purchase-limit).

A **Purchase Limit Reached** notice appears only when an individual purchase
limit applies to your account. It names the limit and, when
waiting helps, the time you can purchase again; no payment was taken. Contact
support if you have questions about the limit on your account. Read
[Purchase limits](/guides/challenge-lifecycle/buying-a-challenge#purchase-limits)
for details.

## A purchase or invoice is missing

Open [Purchase History](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/settings?section=purchases),
clear search and status filters, and load older rows if needed. Invoices appear
only on purchases for which the invoice action is available. Pending, failed,
and refunded orders remain visible with their current status.

## Still need help?

Open [Support](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/contact). **Before You Contact Us**
shows the published FAQ first. Search the questions and answers, filter by topic,
and expand answers in place. You can also browse the full
[FAQ](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/faq).

If you still need help, use **Message Support** below the FAQ to contact our
team. Select **View Conversations** to return to your Intercom conversations.
Sign in to associate conversations with your account. The contact options
remain available even when the FAQ cannot load or has no matching answer.

Include your account ID, order or purchase reference, approximate time, and
any error message. Never share passwords or authentication codes.

If chat cannot open, email
[support@myfundedperpetuals.com](mailto:support@myfundedperpetuals.com).
Phone support remains available at [+1 (302) 401-1179](tel:+13024011179)
as a secondary contact option.


# MyFundedPerps Weekly Blitz
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/weekly-blitz

Schedule, entry tasks, doubled leverage and exposure caps, task-unlocked resets, and prizes for the MyFundedPerps Weekly Blitz.

## Schedule

All times are New York time.

| Event | Time |
| - | - |
| Trading opens | November 2, 2026 at 9:30 AM |
| Registration and trading close | November 6, 2026 at 5:00 PM |

You can join until trading closes. Joining late leaves less time to trade, and
no adjustment is made. The competition page shows these times in your own time
zone.

## Entry

The **MyFundedPerps Weekly Blitz** has its own page under [Competitions](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/competitions), with the schedule, prizes, and leaderboard. To join, choose **Join Competition** and complete four steps in the join window:

1. **Follow** MyFundedPerps on [X](https://x.com/MyFundedPerps).
2. **Subscribe** to MyFundedPerps on [YouTube](https://www.youtube.com/@MyFundedPerps).
3. **Post** about the Weekly Blitz on X. The link opens a ready-to-send post with a link to the competition.
4. **Like and repost** the [Weekly Blitz post](https://x.com/MyFundedPerps/status/2117272899220578540) on X.

Choose **Open Link** for each step, then **Confirm**. Confirmation becomes available 5 seconds after you open the link. **Join Competition** unlocks once all four steps are confirmed.

If you join before trading opens, your competition account appears within a few minutes of the start.

## Account and caps

Every entrant starts with a \$100,000 competition account.

Leverage and exposure caps are doubled on every market. Doubled leverage rounds up to the next multiple of 5 and is capped at 100x. For example, a market with a 2x leverage cap allows 5x, a 3x cap allows 10x, a 10x cap allows 20x, and a 40x cap allows 80x. Per-market and account-wide exposure caps are exactly doubled.

## Trading and ranking

There is no profit target, drawdown limit, or daily loss limit that can end your run. Standard trading fees, swap fees, slippage, margin liquidation, and the doubled caps apply.

The highest account equity wins. Equity includes unrealized profit and loss. You appear on the leaderboard after your first fill.

Standings count genuine, independent trading only. Operating more than one account, copying or coordinating trades across accounts, or exploiting stale prices and platform errors leads to disqualification and can end platform access. The full prohibited-conduct list is in the [Terms of Use](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/terms). For what disqualification does to your competition account, see [Disqualification](/guides/competitions#disqualification).

## Resets

You can reset your account up to **three times**, at most once every 24 hours. Each reset unlocks with its own task on the competition page:

| Reset | Task |
| - | - |
| 1st | Follow [@0xDevin\_](https://x.com/0xDevin_) on X |
| 2nd | Follow [@drippy\_eth](https://x.com/drippy_eth) on X |
| 3rd | Follow [@YahnTrades](https://x.com/YahnTrades) on X |

Choose **Open Link**, then **Confirm** once it becomes available 5 seconds later. **Reset Account** then unlocks.

To reset, close every open position and cancel working orders first. A reset returns your account to \$100,000 with the same doubled caps. Resets are available only while the competition is live, and a reset cannot be undone.

## Prizes

| Rank | Prize |
| - | - |
| 1st | Signature \$100K + Select \$100K + Prime \$100K + Matt's Golden Ticket |
| 2nd | Signature \$100K + Eclipse Case |
| 3rd | Select \$100K + Eclipse Case |
| 4th to 5th | Select \$100K + Obsidian Case |
| 6th to 10th | Select \$100K + Diamond Case |
| 11th to 15th | Select \$50K + Diamond Case |
| 16th to 25th | Select \$25K + Diamond Case |
| 26th to 50th | Select \$10K + Diamond Case |

Prizes follow the final standings and are delivered to your MyFundedPerps account after results are final.


# Idempotency
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/idempotency

Retry order creation without accidentally placing a duplicate order.

Every order creation and position-close request must include an
`Idempotency-Key` header. This includes `POST /v1/orders`,
`POST /v1/twap-orders`, `POST /v1/scaled-orders`, and
`POST /v1/positions/{position_id}/close`. Use a unique value for each intended
operation and reuse that same value only when retrying the identical request
on the same endpoint.

Standard orders and position closes also accept an optional `client_order_id`
in the JSON body. The two values serve different purposes:

* `Idempotency-Key` identifies one HTTP operation and prevents duplicate
  placement when that operation is retried.
* `client_order_id` identifies the resulting order in your own system. It is
  returned with the order and can be used to retrieve that order without its
  server-assigned `id`.

```http theme={null}
Idempotency-Key: 01J6Y6K4ZKQ9R0M3YQ59P8M0PC
```

The key may contain printable ASCII characters and may be up to 128 characters.
MyFundedPerps binds it to the API key, endpoint, and a hash of the request.
The binding is written in the same database transaction as the order, so two
concurrent retries cannot create two accepted orders.

The first accepted request returns `201 Created`. A retry with the same key and
payload returns `200 OK` with the order's current state. That state may have
advanced since the first response, for example from pending to filled, so use
the `status` returned by the retry.

A trading-rule rejection returns `422` on both the original request and every
matching retry. The error keeps the original `order_id`, rule code, and details,
so a lost response cannot turn a rejected placement into an apparent success.

Reusing an idempotency key with a different account, market, side, size, or
other order field is rejected. Generate keys with enough entropy, such as a
UUIDv4 or ULID, and retain them alongside your local order record.

## Reconcile by client order ID

Set `client_order_id` before sending an order, then persist it with your local
order intent. It may contain non-space printable ASCII characters and may be up
to 128 characters. IDs are unique across your MyFundedPerps user, including
orders submitted with a different API key.

```json theme={null}
{
  "client_order_id": "strategy-7:entry-42",
  "account_id": "YOUR_ACCOUNT_ID",
  "market_id": "binance|BTCUSDT"
}
```

If a response is lost, retrieve the order directly:

```bash theme={null}
curl --get "https://developers.myfundedperpetuals.com/v1/orders" \
  -H "Authorization: Bearer $FP_API_KEY" \
  --data-urlencode "client_order_id=strategy-7:entry-42"
```

The response uses the normal order-page shape with either one matching order or
an empty `data` array. You may also send `account_id` to require the match to
belong to a particular account. Do not combine `client_order_id` with `status`,
`limit`, or `cursor`.

Reusing a client order ID with the identical placement returns the existing
order, even after API key rotation. Reusing it for a different payload returns
`409 client_order_id_conflict`.


# MyFundedPerps Documentation
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/index

Learn how to start a challenge, trade simulated perpetual futures, manage risk, configure your account, and use the developer API.

MyFundedPerps is a paper-trading platform for crypto perpetual futures in
the funded-challenge model. You trade simulated accounts against real market
data and order books. Fills, balances, positions, and payouts remain part of
the MyFundedPerps simulation.

> [card] [Getting Started](/guides/getting-started)
>
> Choose a challenge, understand its terms, and place your first trade.

> [card] [Trading Guide](/guides/trading-guide)
>
> Learn order types, sizing, margin, execution protection, and exits.

> [card] [Challenges and Rules](/guides/challenges-and-rules)
>
> Understand targets, drawdown, account states, and funded progression.

> [card] [Challenge Lifecycle](/guides/challenge-lifecycle)
>
> Follow purchase, evaluation, funding, payouts, billing, and rewards.

> [card] [Settings](/settings)
>
> Configure your profile, trading defaults, API keys, sounds, and billing
> history.

> [card] [API Reference (Beta)](/api-reference)
>
> Build programmatic paper-trading integrations with the beta REST API.
> Breaking changes may be introduced at any time.

> [!NOTE]
>
> Always use the challenge selector and the rules inside your account for the
> current targets, limits, profit splits, and payout terms.

## Quick links

* [Open the trading platform](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/trade)
* [Review challenge options](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/#pricing)
* [Open your dashboard](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/dashboard)
* [Search troubleshooting and FAQ](/guides/troubleshooting-and-faq)
* [Look up a term in the glossary](/guides/glossary)
* [Create an API key](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/settings?section=api-keys)


# Market data streaming
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/market-streaming

Subscribe to live prices, order books, trades, and candles over the public WebSocket API.

## Connect

Open `wss://api-stream.myfundedperpetuals.com/v1/market-data`. Market data is
public: no API key, cookie, or authentication frame is required. Use this dedicated endpoint for developer integrations. Never send your trading API key to this
socket. Live and sandbox trading use the same market feed.

Send one JSON object per WebSocket text frame. Enable `permessage-deflate`
compression in your WebSocket client: books, trades, and candles are several
times smaller compressed. Keep one long-lived connection and multiplex your
subscriptions on it; do not reconnect to poll for a fresh snapshot. This stream carries market
observations; submit orders through the [REST API](/api-reference).
Market prices do not guarantee the price or size of a simulated fill.

```javascript theme={null}
const socket = new WebSocket(
  "wss://api-stream.myfundedperpetuals.com/v1/market-data",
);
const subscriptions = new Map();
socket.onopen = () =>
  socket.send(
    JSON.stringify({
      op: "sub",
      id: 1,
      channel: "ticks",
      payload: { symbols: ["BTCUSDT"], providers: ["binance"] },
    }),
  );
socket.onmessage = ({ data }) => {
  const frame = JSON.parse(data);
  if (frame.op === "sub_ok") subscriptions.set(frame.sub, frame.id);
  if (frame.op === "events") {
    for (const event of frame.events)
      console.log(subscriptions.get(frame.sub), event);
  }
  if (frame.op === "sub_err" || frame.op === "err") console.error(frame.error);
};
// Stop subscription 1 when finished:
// socket.send(JSON.stringify({ op: "unsub", id: 1 }));
// Close the socket when no longer needed:
// socket.close();
```

This minimal example shows framing. Add the reconnection and recovery handling
below before using it in a long-running client.

## Market identity and filters

Use the exact `coin` and `provider` returned for your selected market by
`GET /v1/markets` or `GET /v1/markets/{market_id}` in the [REST API](/api-reference).
Pass `coin` in the subscription's `symbols` array. REST's `symbol` is a display
label: for Binance BTC, `symbol` is `BTC` and `coin` is `BTCUSDT`, so subscribe
to `symbols: ["BTCUSDT"]` with `providers: ["binance"]`. Provider values
are `hyperliquid`, `binance`, `bybit`, `veranta`, `ostium`, `lighter`, `fpx`,
and `synthetic`. FX uses `veranta` (for example `EURUSD` and `USDJPY`). The
retiring Hyperliquid EUR/USD and USD/JPY markets (`xyz:EUR` and `xyz:JPY`)
keep publishing while positions remain on them. The historical `fpx` and
`lighter` identities are retired and no longer publish market data.

Every market subscription requires `symbols` with 1 to 32 exact symbols.
`providers` is optional, but specify it to avoid mixing venue prices.
Omitting it uses the compatibility provider set, so explicitly name new
providers. `status` accepts only `providers` and needs no symbols.

| Channel | Payload fields | Event type |
| - | - | - |
| `ticks` | `symbols`, optional `providers` | `tick` |
| `books` | `symbols`, optional `providers` | `book` |
| `trades` | `symbols`, optional `providers` | `trade` |
| `candles` | `symbols`, optional `providers`, `intervals`, `historyLimit` | `candle` |
| `marketStats` | `symbols`, optional `providers` | `marketStats` |
| `status` | Optional `providers` | `providerStatus` |

For candles, request explicit intervals such as `intervals: ["1m"]`.
Accepted interval names are `1s`, `1m`, `3m`, `5m`, `15m`, `30m`, `1h`,
`2h`, `4h`, `8h`, `12h`, `1d`, `3d`, `1w`, and `1M`. Availability depends
on the provider. `historyLimit: 0` skips retained candle replay; a positive
value limits it. Omitting it replays the retained backlog. Use
`candles.history` for a specific historical window.

## Frames and subscription lifecycle

Allocate positive integer IDs, unique among active requests and subscriptions
on a connection. Keep them within JavaScript's safe integer range. Do not
reuse an ID until its prior operation finishes. Treat the server's `sub`
string as opaque: equivalent filters share it, and event frames use it instead
of your request ID.

| Server frame | Meaning |
| - | - |
| `{"op":"sub_ok","id":1,"sub":"...","snapshotBoundary":true}` | Subscription accepted; record the ID-to-`sub` mapping. |
| `{"op":"events","sub":"...","events":[...]}` | Retained snapshot events followed by live events, possibly batched. |
| `{"op":"snapshot_end","id":1}` | Initial replay finished when `snapshotBoundary` was advertised. It does not mean history is complete. |
| `{"op":"sub_err","id":1,"error":{...}}` | Subscription rejected. Surface its `reason`; fix invalid filters or reduce subscriptions before retrying. |
| `{"op":"end","id":1}` | Server ended the subscription. Re-establish it if still needed. |
| `{"op":"draining"}` | Server is replacing this connection; establish a replacement and resubscribe. |
| `{"op":"res","id":2,"result":...}` | One-shot request completed. |
| `{"op":"err","id":2,"error":{...}}` | One-shot request failed. |

Send `{"op":"unsub","id":1}` to cancel a subscription or in-flight
request. Cancellation is idempotent. Ignore unknown server operations for
forward compatibility.

## Event fields

Prices and quantities in ticks, trades, candles, and books are decimal
**strings**. Use decimal arithmetic when calculating with them. Market
statistics use JSON numbers or null. Numeric `time`, `openTime`, and
`closeTime` fields are Unix milliseconds; `receivedAt` is a timestamp string.

| Event | Fields |
| - | - |
| `tick` | `provider`, `symbol`, `kind` (`mark`, `mid`, or `last`), `price`, `time`, `receivedAt` |
| `book` | `provider`, `symbol`, `time`, `bids`, `asks`, `receivedAt`; each level has `px`, `sz`, and nullable order count `n` |
| `trade` | `provider`, `symbol`, `tradeId`, `side` (`buy` or `sell`, the aggressor), `price`, `size`, `time`, `receivedAt` |
| `candle` | `provider`, `symbol`, `interval`, `openTime`, `closeTime`, `open`, `high`, `low`, `close`, `volume`, nullable `quoteVolume` and `trades`, `isFinal`, `receivedAt` |
| `marketStats` | `provider`, `symbol`, `time`, `receivedAt`, plus optional statistics described below |
| `providerStatus` | `provider`, `state` (`idle`, `connecting`, `connected`, `closed`, or `error`), nullable `reason`, `receivedAt` |

Books are complete snapshots, with bids descending and asks ascending. Replace
your previous book; do not apply them as deltas. Each book subscription
receives at most one snapshot per market every 150 ms, always the newest; a
snapshot superseded within that window is not sent. Candles replace the existing
bar identified by provider, symbol, interval, and `openTime`. Trade IDs are
unique within a provider and symbol; deduplicate retained replay accordingly.
Tick kinds represent different price observations, so do not overwrite a mark
with a midpoint without an explicit pricing policy.

Market statistics are patches. Omitted fields preserve the previous value;
null explicitly clears it. Fields include `markPx`, `change24hPct`,
`fundingHourly`, `fundingRate`, `fundingIntervalHours`, `nextFundingTime`,
`openInterestUsd`, and `dayNtlVlm`. Optional `fundingSnapshot` contains an atomic
funding observation: decimal strings `fundingRate` and `fundingPrice`, numeric
`fundingIntervalHours`, `nextFundingTime`, and `observedAt`, and
`fundingPriceKind` (`mark` or `oracle`). It may also be null.

## Historical candles and heartbeat

```json theme={null}
{
  "op": "req",
  "id": 2,
  "method": "candles.history",
  "payload": {
    "provider": "binance",
    "symbol": "BTCUSDT",
    "interval": "1m",
    "limit": 100
  }
}
```

`result` is an array of candle events. Optional `startTime` and `endTime`
select a millisecond window; `priceKind` is `trade` (default) or `mark`.
History is bounded by provider availability and retention; an empty or short
result is possible. A `HistoryFetchFailed` error includes `provider` and
`message`; `source: "transport"` can be retried with backoff. Provider failures
may require a different window or interval.

Send `{"op":"req","id":3,"method":"ping"}` for an application heartbeat.
The response result is the stream server's current Unix time in milliseconds.
Measure round-trip latency using your own monotonic clock. Servers also send
WebSocket protocol pings every 30 seconds; your WebSocket library must process
and answer these. Connections with no inbound frames or pongs for 75 seconds
are closed. Browser WebSocket implementations answer protocol pings for you.

A ping response may also include `upstreamReadAgeMs` beside `result`. This is
elapsed milliseconds since the upstream market-data connection received a frame,
including protocol heartbeats; a negative value means that connection is
unavailable. The field is optional: absence means unknown upstream health.
It helps distinguish a quiet market from an unresponsive feed connection, but
a small value does not prove that an individual market's prices are fresh.
Continue checking event timestamps, and tolerate additional response fields.

`status.get` is also available as a one-shot request with no payload. Prefer
a `status` subscription for continuous monitoring instead of polling it.

## Recovery and limits

There is no durable replay cursor or exactly-once guarantee. On disconnect,
clear connection-local IDs and mappings, reconnect with exponential backoff
and jitter, and re-establish subscriptions. Restore books and prices from the
new snapshot, backfill missing candles with `candles.history`, and reconcile
account trading state through the trading API. A market trade tape cannot be
used as your account fill ledger. A slow client can lose superseded state or
be disconnected; always monitor freshness.

On `draining`, connect a replacement, subscribe, wait for its initial snapshot
boundaries, and then close the old socket. Deduplicate overlapping events.
If the replacement fails, keep reading the old socket until it ends and retry
with backoff. Avoid unlimited reconnect loops on permanent filter errors.

| Bound | Behavior when exceeded |
| - | - |
| 256 active subscriptions per connection | New subscription rejected. |
| 32 symbols and 6 providers per subscription | Invalid filter rejected. |
| 64 distinct provider/symbol leases across candle, book, and trade subscriptions per connection | New subscription rejected. |
| 16 concurrent requests, including at most 4 history requests per connection | Excess request returns an error; heartbeat pings are excluded. |
| 512 active connections per source address | Upgrade rejected with HTTP 429. |
| 30 connection admissions per minute per source, with a burst of 10 | Excess upgrades return HTTP 429 with `Retry-After: 60`. |
| Shared process connection, memory, and upstream budgets | Upgrade may return HTTP 503 or subscription/request may be rejected. Retry transient capacity failures with backoff. |

These budgets belong to the developer stream and are separate from the website feed.
The service also limits simultaneous history work and one-shot status requests;
prefer a `status` subscription and back off when capacity is exhausted. Keep one multiplexed socket per
client, unsubscribe unused views, cache closed candles, and avoid polling REST
quotes for every price update. Market streaming adds no REST quota usage.

Account balances, positions, orders, and fills are available through REST.
Private account streaming is not available.


# MCP Server
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/mcp-server

Connect AI assistants and agents to the MyFundedPerps REST API through the hosted Model Context Protocol server.

## What is the MCP server?

The Model Context Protocol (MCP) is an open standard that lets AI
applications such as Claude, Claude Code, and other MCP-capable agents call
external APIs as tools. MyFundedPerps hosts an MCP server that exposes
the REST trading and read operations as tools, so an assistant can list your challenge
accounts, quote markets, place and manage orders, and inspect positions and
fills on your behalf.

The server speaks the current stateless MCP revision (2026-07-28) over
Streamable HTTP:

```
https://mcp.myfundedperpetuals.com
```

There is nothing to install or run yourself. You sign in through OAuth in
your browser, and each tool call then runs as one authenticated REST request
under your own session, so everything in [Idempotency](/idempotency) and
[Errors and rate limits](/errors-and-rate-limits) applies unchanged.

> [!WARNING]
>
> Tools placed under an AI assistant's control can cancel orders and close
> positions. Configure the client to request the `read` scope when the assistant
> only needs to observe, and prefer a sandbox key while you evaluate an agent.

## Documentation and connection URLs

This guide is at `/mcp-server` on the documentation site. The documentation
site's `/mcp` path belongs to Mintlify's documentation-search service and can
return `401 Unauthorized` when opened in a browser. Use
`https://mcp.myfundedperpetuals.com` in your trading MCP client.

See [API capabilities](/api-capabilities) for the supported operations and
features that still require the website.

## Sign in with OAuth

OAuth is the sign-in method for the MCP server. There is no key to copy:
connect the server and your MCP client opens a browser page where you review
what the client is asking for and approve it with your normal MyFundedPerps
sign-in.

1. Add the server to your MCP client (examples below) and start it.
2. The client discovers the authorization flow automatically and opens
   `myfundedperpetuals.com/mcp/auth` in your browser.
3. Review the client name, access level, and expiry, then choose **Approve**.
4. The client receives its own session and starts calling tools.

Sessions minted this way:

| Property | Value |
| - | - |
| Access | Trade on all accounts, or read-only if the client requests `read` |
| Expiry | 90 days after approval |
| Ceiling | 5 active sessions; a new approval revokes the oldest |

> [!NOTE]
>
> API keys are for direct REST API calls, not for MCP. A live `fp_live_` key
> sent to the MCP server is refused with a prompt to sign in with OAuth, and an
> MCP session cannot be replayed against the REST hosts.

### Sandbox

The sandbox has no OAuth flow. To point an MCP client at your
[sandbox](/sandbox) accounts, send an `fp_test_` key as a bearer header
instead (created in
[API Key Settings](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/settings?section=api-keys)
under the Test environment):

```
Authorization: Bearer fp_test_...
```

## Connect a client

### Claude Code

```bash theme={null}
claude mcp add --transport http funding-perpetuals \
  https://mcp.myfundedperpetuals.com
```

The first tool use prompts the OAuth sign-in in your browser.

### Other MCP clients

Any client that supports Streamable HTTP with OAuth can connect:

```json theme={null}
{
  "mcpServers": {
    "funding-perpetuals": {
      "type": "http",
      "url": "https://mcp.myfundedperpetuals.com"
    }
  }
}
```

Clients register themselves automatically: the server supports both Client ID
Metadata Documents and Dynamic Client Registration, so no manual client setup
is needed. For sandbox testing, add the `Authorization` header with an
`fp_test_` key instead.

## Tools

The two CLI authentication endpoints are excluded
because MCP uses its own OAuth flow. Each exposed operation is one tool, named
after the matching
[fperp CLI](/cli) command: `list-accounts`, `get-market-quote`,
`create-order`, `cancel-order`, `close-position`, and so on. Tool arguments
use the same snake\_case names as the REST API's path, query, and body fields,
and each tool's schema includes nested objects and arrays, required fields,
enums, and numeric constraints. Protective-exit batches expose the complete
`expected_orders` snapshot and the cancel, modify, and place operation shapes,
including OCO pairing. The REST API still enforces trading rules and current
account state.

Results are JSON with three parts:

| Field | Meaning |
| - | - |
| `status` | The HTTP status of the underlying REST call |
| `request_id` | The `X-Request-Id` of the call, for support and debugging |
| `body` | The REST response, including `data` or the API error envelope |

Failed calls are reported as tool errors carrying the standard error envelope
with `error.code` and per-field `error.details`, so an agent can correct its
input and retry. Responses with status 429 include `retry_after_seconds`.

### Idempotency and bulk operations

Tools for operations that require an `Idempotency-Key` header require an
`idempotency_key` argument. Generate a UUID or other unique printable ASCII key
(up to 128 characters) and persist it with the exact arguments **before the
first call**. Missing, empty, whitespace-only, or malformed keys are rejected
before an upstream request is sent. The server echoes your key in the result.
Clients that previously omitted this argument must now supply it.

Retry a lost response with the same key, identical arguments, and the same
credential. Never generate a replacement key for an uncertain outcome: that
starts a new operation and can create duplicate exposure. Reconcile ordinary
orders through `client_order_id` when available. See [Idempotency](/idempotency)
for the endpoint's replay behavior.

Bulk operations (`cancel-all-account-orders`, `close-all-account-positions`)
can return status 202 while work remains. Retain the original arguments and
key, wait for `retry_after_seconds`, then repeat the call to advance it.

All trading writes advertise `destructiveHint: true` and
`idempotentHint: false`. These conservative hints cover both exposure changes
and removal or replacement of protective orders. An HTTP PUT method alone
does not make a mutable exit batch safe to repeat. For writes without an
idempotency key, read current state and reconcile an uncertain outcome before
submitting another write. Read tools advertise read-only and idempotent hints.

## Rate limits

The MCP host applies the same per-address limit as the REST hosts: about 300
requests per minute from one source IP address. Account-wide cancel and close
operations share the budgets described in
[Errors and rate limits](/errors-and-rate-limits). A rejected request returns
status 429 with a `Retry-After` header and is always safe to retry.


# Pagination
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/pagination

Walk recent order history with a bounded opaque cursor.

`GET /v1/orders` returns newest orders first. Set `limit` from 1 to 100; the
default is 50.

When `has_more` is true, send `next_cursor` as the next request's `cursor`
parameter. Treat the cursor as opaque and URL-encode it:

```bash theme={null}
curl --get "https://developers.myfundedperpetuals.com/v1/orders" \
  -H "Authorization: Bearer $FP_API_KEY" \
  --data-urlencode "account_id=ACCOUNT_ID" \
  --data-urlencode "limit=50" \
  --data-urlencode "cursor=$NEXT_CURSOR"
```

The same cursor pattern is used by filled orders, closed positions, scaled
orders, and completed or canceled TWAP and VWAP history (`GET /v1/twap-orders`
with a `status` of `completed` or `canceled`). Each endpoint returns its own opaque cursor. Never reuse a cursor with
a different endpoint, account, or filter.

The opaque cursor preserves the exact sort position, so orders sharing the same millisecond are not skipped. The server reads at most
`limit` indexed rows for each page, regardless of the account's total order
history.

A `client_order_id` lookup is not paginated. Send
`GET /v1/orders?client_order_id=...` to receive the normal page shape with zero
or one order and `has_more: false`. Do not send `limit` or `cursor` with that
lookup.


# Quickstart
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/quickstart

Create an API key, get a quote, and submit a market order.

> [!WARNING]
>
> The developer API is in beta. Breaking changes may be introduced at any time.

See [API capabilities](/api-capabilities) for coverage and features that
still require the website.

## 1. Create an API key

Open [API Key Settings](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/settings?section=api-keys),
name the key, and copy the secret when it appears. MyFundedPerps stores
only its cryptographic hash, so the secret cannot be shown again.

```bash theme={null}
export FP_API_KEY="fp_live_..."
```

## 2. List your accounts

```bash theme={null}
curl https://developers.myfundedperpetuals.com/v1/accounts \
  -H "Authorization: Bearer $FP_API_KEY"
```

`GET /v1/accounts/{account_id}` adds a fresh risk snapshot with equity,
unrealized P\&L, reserved margin, available balance, gross exposure, loss floors,
room above each floor, and remaining profit target. When any open position lacks
a fresh mark, mark-dependent values are `null` and `marks_complete` is false.

Copy the `id` of the challenge account you want to trade.

## 3. Find a market and request a quote

```bash theme={null}
curl https://developers.myfundedperpetuals.com/v1/markets
```

Each market lists its trading granularity. Sizes are in base-asset units, so
`contract_size` is always 1. Order sizes are multiples of `size_step`, at least
`min_size`, and worth at least `min_notional` USD. Prices are accepted to
`tick_size` (eight decimals) and are not rounded to the venue's tick.

The list has one row per instrument, on its default venue. Add `?venues=all`
to include alternate venues; see [Trading with the API](/trading-with-api).

Market IDs contain a pipe character. URL-encode it when it appears in a path:

```bash theme={null}
curl --get "https://developers.myfundedperpetuals.com/v1/markets/binance%7CBTCUSDT/quote" \
  --data-urlencode "side=buy" \
  --data-urlencode "size=0.001" \
  -H "Authorization: Bearer $FP_API_KEY"
```

Providing both `side` and `size` returns `estimated_fill_price` (top-of-book bounded by the mark-based
slippage cap), `slippage_bps` (the market's maximum adverse slippage tier),
`estimated_notional`, and `estimated_fee`. `fillable` is false when the
requested size is not valid at the market's size precision.

## 4. Place a market order

Use the quote's `mid` as `expected_price`. This value records what your client
observed; the server still prices and validates the order from a fresh,
authoritative book.

```bash theme={null}
curl https://developers.myfundedperpetuals.com/v1/orders \
  -X POST \
  -H "Authorization: Bearer $FP_API_KEY" \
  -H "Content-Type: application/json" \
  -H "Idempotency-Key: order-$(date +%s)" \
  -d '{
    "client_order_id": "quickstart-entry-1",
    "account_id": "YOUR_ACCOUNT_ID",
    "market_id": "binance|BTCUSDT",
    "side": "buy",
    "size": 0.001,
    "expected_price": 118000,
    "leverage": 2,
    "margin_mode": "cross"
  }'
```

An accepted order begins as `pending`. Read the order endpoint until it becomes
`filled` or `rejected`; use a sensible backoff and observe the documented rate
limits. If the placement response is lost, use
`GET /v1/orders?client_order_id=quickstart-entry-1` to recover the server order.

## 5. Place advanced orders

The same `/v1/orders` endpoint also accepts limit, chase, stop, take, and
external conditional orders. TWAP, VWAP, and scaled ladders use their own
parent resources. Continue with [Trading with the API](/trading-with-api) for
request shapes and lifecycle operations.

For continuous market updates, connect to [market data streaming](/market-streaming)
instead of polling prices. For order, fill, position, and balance changes on
your accounts, connect to [account streaming](/account-streaming); REST
remains available for snapshots and lookups.


# Sandbox and test keys
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/sandbox

Build and test your API integration against free paper accounts before pointing it at a real challenge account.

The sandbox is a test environment for the MyFundedPerps REST API. It runs
the same engine, endpoints, order types, rate limits, and trading rules as the
live API, against real market data, but every request is served on its own
hostname and can only reach dedicated sandbox accounts:

```text theme={null}
https://sandbox.myfundedperpetuals.com
```

Use it to develop and verify an integration without touching a challenge
account. A test order can never reach a real account: test keys are bound to
sandbox accounts, and live keys cannot see sandbox accounts.

## Who can use it

Sandbox access is included with a challenge purchase and stays active for 90
days after each purchase. Buying another challenge extends the window. Access
is checked continuously: when the window lapses, sandbox requests return `403`
with the error code `sandbox_access_expired` until a new purchase refreshes
it.

Temporary sandbox access may also be provided for a fixed period without a
challenge purchase. The same account and test-key limits apply. Access ends at
the stated expiry unless a recent challenge purchase still qualifies you.

## Set up

1. Open [API Key settings](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/settings?section=api-keys).
2. Select **Create API Key** and choose the **Test (Sandbox)** environment.
   Test keys begin with `fp_test_` and automatically cover every sandbox
   account you own.

If you have no active sandbox account, one is created for you when the test
key is created. Sandbox accounts start with a \$100,000 simulated balance and
follow the same trading rules as evaluation accounts, so they can breach. A
new account is created automatically the next time you create a test key
if none of your sandbox accounts are active and you have not reached the
ten-account lifetime limit. Existing accounts remain available.

Then point your client at the sandbox host:

```bash theme={null}
curl https://sandbox.myfundedperpetuals.com/v1/accounts \
  -H "Authorization: Bearer fp_test_..."
```

The response lists only your sandbox accounts. Every endpoint documented in
the [API reference](/api-reference) behaves the same way on both hosts.

## Create more sandbox accounts

In [API Key settings](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/settings?section=api-keys),
find **Sandbox Accounts** and select **Create Sandbox Account**. You can create
another account while your other sandbox accounts are still active, without
creating another API key. Each starts with a \$100,000 simulated balance.
The panel lists each account's name, account number, and status.

Every existing test key automatically gains access to the new account. Use the
account ID returned by `GET /v1/accounts` to select it in API requests.

The ten-account lifetime limit includes active, passed, failed, and closed
sandbox accounts. Creating more accounts requires the same active sandbox
access as creating test keys. When access lapses or the limit is reached,
**Create Sandbox Account** is unavailable and the panel explains why.

## Sandbox account emails

Sandbox accounts do not send breach or status emails by default, so a test
breach never looks like a problem with a real challenge account. To receive
them, turn on **Sandbox Account Emails** in the **Sandbox Accounts** panel.
In-app notifications for sandbox accounts are unaffected.

## Differences from live

* Test keys authenticate only on `sandbox.myfundedperpetuals.com`; live keys
  authenticate only on `developers.myfundedperpetuals.com`. Using a key on the
  wrong host returns `401` with a message naming the correct host.
* The [account stream](/account-streaming) works the same way: test keys
  connect to `wss://account-stream.myfundedperpetuals.com/v1/sandbox/stream`
  and receive only sandbox accounts.
* Sandbox accounts never appear in live API responses, and challenge accounts
  never appear in sandbox responses. This applies to direct position, order,
  TWAP/VWAP, and scaled-order IDs, client order IDs, modifications, cancellations,
  and idempotent retries. A known ID does not grant access across environments
  or outside the accounts selected for the credential. Inaccessible individual
  resources return `404`; a client order ID lookup returns an empty list.
* Archived accounts and their orders, positions, and strategy history are
  unavailable through trading endpoints in either API environment, including
  previously successful trading-request replays.
* Sandbox accounts are excluded from analytics, leaderboards, certificates,
  and payouts. They exist only for integration testing. In the web app they
  carry a **Sandbox** badge in the account switcher, and their dashboard
  never shows funded-stage progression because a sandbox account cannot
  become funded. To keep them out of the account switcher, open **Filter**
  and check **Hide Sandbox Accounts**; uncheck it to show them again.
* Sandbox trading still enforces evaluation rules, so a sandbox account can
  breach. That is useful for testing how your integration handles rejections
  and account failure.
* Reaching the profit target ends a sandbox account as passed. A sandbox pass
  does not lead to identity verification, an agreement, or a funded account.

## Go live

When your integration works in the sandbox, create a live key with the same
access level, point your client at
`https://developers.myfundedperpetuals.com`, and select the challenge accounts
it should reach. No other code changes are needed.


# API Key Settings
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/settings/api-keys

Create, copy, and revoke credentials for programmatic trading through the MyFundedPerps REST API.

> [!WARNING]
>
> The developer API is in beta. Breaking changes may be introduced at any time.

[Open API Key settings](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/settings?section=api-keys)

## Create a key

Select **Create API Key** to open the creation dialog. It walks through four
steps:

1. Choose an environment, an access level, and an account boundary. The name
   is optional. If you leave it blank, MyFundedPerps uses a name in the
   format `Key generated on Month Day, Year`, using the UTC date.
2. Review the exact access granted to the key and confirm all three security
   and responsibility statements. Select **Back** to change the access.
3. Select **Continue** to send a six-digit verification code to your account
   email, then enter that code. The code expires after 10 minutes.
   Verification-code requests share the email limit used for sign-in: up to
   five codes per rolling minute and ten per rolling hour. If you reach either
   limit, the request control remains unavailable while an inline message
   counts down until you can request another code.
4. Select **Create API Key**.

The credential appears in a dialog after creation and is hidden by default.
Use **Show API Key** to reveal it or **Copy API Key** to copy it without
revealing it. MyFundedPerps stores only its cryptographic hash, so the
full key cannot be recovered or shown again after you close the dialog.
While [Streamer Mode](/settings/streamer-mode) is on, the credential stays
blurred even after **Show API Key**, and **Copy API Key** still works.

Choose **Read And Trade** only when the integration must create, modify, or
cancel orders. Account access can cover all accounts or one selected account.
The account picker shows any name you gave an account on the dashboard,
followed by its account number. API responses keep reporting the account's
original name and number.
[Archived accounts](/settings/archived-accounts) are not listed in the picker.
A key already limited to an archived account keeps that access.
You can hold up to five active keys per environment. Use separate names for
separate trading clients so you can revoke one integration without
interrupting another.

The **Environment** choice determines what the key can reach. **Live** keys
(`fp_live_`) serve requests on `developers.myfundedperpetuals.com` and reach
your challenge accounts. **Test (Sandbox)** keys (`fp_test_`) serve requests
on `sandbox.myfundedperpetuals.com` and reach only your sandbox accounts, free
paper accounts for testing an API integration. A sandbox account is created
for you automatically when you create a test key without an active one, and
every test key covers all of your sandbox accounts. Test-key creation
requires a challenge purchase in the last 90 days. See
[Sandbox and test keys](/sandbox) for the full workflow.

Keys created before access controls were available keep their existing read and
trading access to all accounts. Revoke and replace a legacy key to narrow it.

> [!WARNING]
>
> Store API keys like passwords. Never commit one, print it in logs, include it
> in a URL, or embed it in browser or mobile application code. Anyone with the
> key can use its permissions without your password or another verification
> code. You are responsible for keeping the key secure. MyFundedPerps is not
> responsible for losses caused by a key you expose, share, or fail to secure.

## Create sandbox accounts

The **Sandbox Accounts** panel lists your sandbox accounts and their account
numbers and statuses. Select **Create Sandbox Account** to add a separate
\$100,000 simulated account, even when you already have an active sandbox
account. You do not need to create another API key: all your existing test keys
automatically include the new account.

You can create up to ten sandbox accounts over the lifetime of your account,
including failed and closed accounts. Creation requires a challenge purchase
in the last 90 days. The panel explains when access has expired or the limit
has been reached.

Breach and status emails for sandbox accounts are off by default. Turn on
**Sandbox Account Emails** in the same panel to receive them. Trade emails for
sandbox accounts also require this setting, in addition to
[Trade Email Notifications](/settings/notifications#trade-emails).

## Revoke a key

Select **Revoke**, review the confirmation, then select **Revoke API Key**.
New requests using that key stop authenticating immediately. A request already
in flight may still finish.

For request examples, authentication rules, and endpoint schemas, read the
[developer API quickstart](/quickstart).


# Appearance Settings
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/settings/appearance

Choose how background effects render, whether 3D scenes play, whether dialogs blur the page behind them, and install MyFundedPerps as a web app on supported devices.

[Open Appearance settings](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/settings?section=appearance)

## Background Effects

Background Effects controls the backdrops on supported sign-in, competition,
and affiliate pages. Choose one of three options:

* **Animated** draws the full backdrop and lets it move. This is the default.
* **Static** draws the same backdrop and holds it on a single frame. The page
  keeps its look, and the continuous graphics work that drains battery stops.
* **Off** replaces the backdrop with a plain gradient and skips the graphics
  work entirely. Choose this on devices where **Static** is still too heavy.

The visual change applies immediately and the signed-in account preference
carries to other devices. If your device or browser asks for reduced motion,
backdrops are held on a single frame regardless of this setting.

If the Redeem Code backdrop cannot start or loses graphics support, the page
shows a static background and keeps the code form available. Reward cases
also use a static image when their 3D rendering is unavailable.

## 3D Scenes

3D Scenes controls the animated 3D on the homepage and on reward cases,
including the case-opening animation. It is on by default and works
separately from Background Effects, so you can keep one and turn off the
other.

Turn it off to show still images in place of the 3D and save battery on
devices where the animation feels heavy. Reward cases still open and show
your prize. The change applies immediately, and the signed-in account
preference carries to other devices.

If your device or browser cannot run the 3D, the same still images appear
automatically, whatever this setting says.

## Dialog Background Blur

Dialog Background Blur controls whether the page behind dialogs and side panels
is blurred while they are open. It is on by default. Turn it off to keep the
page behind a dialog sharp, for example to keep reading a chart while a
confirmation is open.

The change applies the next time a dialog opens, and the signed-in account
preference carries to other devices.

## App Installation

The App Installation card adapts to the current device and browser:

* a supported browser can show **Install App** and its native install prompt;
* iPhone and iPad use **View Instructions** for Add to Home Screen;
* an installed app shows **Installed**;
* an unsupported browser points you to its own menu when installation may still
  be available there.

Installing opens MyFundedPerps as a web app. It does not create a separate
MyFundedPerps account or copy account data onto the device.

Automatic install reminders are device-specific. If reminders were turned off,
use **Turn On** in this card to re-enable them on the current device.


# Archived Accounts
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/settings/archived-accounts

Archive ended challenge accounts to hide them from your account lists, and unarchive them at any time.

[Open Archived Accounts](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/settings?section=archived-accounts)

Archive accounts you no longer need to see so your account lists only show the
accounts you are using. Archiving does not delete anything, and you can
unarchive an account at any time.

## What archiving changes

An archived account is hidden from:

* The account switcher and the trade page's account list.
* Your dashboard, Performance, and Journal account selection.
* The copy trading and API key account pickers.
* Your public profile and its account picker. Archiving removes the account
  from your public profile.

An archived account keeps its trade history, and it still appears in Purchase
History, Payouts, and Certificates.

## Which accounts you can archive

You can archive an account that has ended: passed, failed, or closed. Active
accounts cannot be archived.

A passed evaluation stays in your lists until identity verification and the
funded account agreement are complete, so you do not lose the steps that issue
your funded account.

## Archive accounts

1. Open **Settings**, then **Archived Accounts**.
2. Under **Ended Accounts**, select **Archive** on an account, or select
   **Archive All** to archive every ended account at once.

## Unarchive an account

1. Open **Settings**, then **Archived Accounts**.
2. Under **Archived**, select **Unarchive** on the account.

The account returns to your account lists. If it was on your public profile
before you archived it, add it again from
[Public Profile](/settings/public-profile).


# Certificates
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/settings/certificates

Find every pass, funded, payout, lifetime payout, and leaderboard certificate you have earned, and download or share any of them from one place.

[Open Certificates](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/settings?section=certificates)

Certificates collects every shareable card you have earned, so you do not need
to go back to the dashboard, Payout History, or the competition page to find
one. Each group appears once you have at least one certificate of that kind.

| Group | What it lists |
| - | - |
| Leaderboard | Your Launch Competition leaderboard card, while you have a competition account. |
| Lifetime Payouts | One certificate showing the total of every payout you have been paid. |
| Payouts | One certificate for each paid payout, showing the amount, account number, and paid date. |
| Funded Accounts | One certificate for each funded account issued to you after an evaluation. |
| Evaluation Passes | One certificate for each evaluation you passed, showing the account name, number, and pass date. |

Payout, funded, and pass certificates are listed newest first.

## Choose the name on your certificates

Use **Name on Certificates** at the top of Certificates to choose what your
pass, funded, payout, and lifetime payout certificates show:

* **Username**: your username. This is the default.
* **Legal Name**: the legal name on your profile.

The change applies to every certificate, including links you shared before.
**Legal Name** can only be chosen when your legal name is on file. Anyone with
a certificate link can see the name it shows, so choose **Username** if you do
not want your legal name on shared certificates.

## Share a certificate

1. Select **Share** on the certificate's row.
2. Review the preview. It shows exactly what anyone with the link sees.
3. Choose **Download Image**, **Copy Image**, **Copy Link**, or **Share
   Certificate** to use your device's share sheet when it has one.

Pass, funded, and payout certificates include a QR code in the top right that
opens the certificate's page, so anyone looking at the image can check it.

Pass, funded, and payout certificates keep the same details after they are
issued, so a link you shared earlier keeps showing the same card. The one
exception is your name: if you change your username in
[Settings](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/settings) or switch **Name on
Certificates**, your certificates show the new name. Links you shared before
may take a short while to show the change.

## Add a custom background

You can put your own photo or video behind a pass, funded, payout, or lifetime
payout certificate. It appears faded under the certificate's green background,
and the certificate text stays on top.

1. Open the certificate's share preview.
2. Under **Custom Background**, confirm the content rules. Your photo or video
   must not contain hateful, racist, sexual, violent, or illegal content, or
   anyone else's private information. Breaking these rules may lead to a ban or
   loss of rewards.
3. Select **Choose Background** and pick a JPG, PNG, or WebP image (up to 25 MB)
   or an MP4, WebM, or MOV video (up to 32 MB and at least 1 second long).
4. With an image, choose **Download Image** or **Copy Image**. With a video,
   choose **Download Video**. Your MP4 is prepared on our servers, which can
   take a minute, and downloads when it is ready. It keeps the video's own
   sound. Videos longer than 30 seconds use their first 30 seconds.

A photo is never uploaded: it stays on your device and is only added to the
images you save or copy. A video is uploaded privately only to make your
download. Nobody else can open it, and it is deleted within 24 hours. Your
certificate link and its preview on social sites always show the standard
background.

To pick a different file, confirm the rules again and select **Change
Background**. Select **Remove Background** or close the preview to go back to
the standard background.

Video downloads share a limit with PnL card videos. If you reach it, the
preview tells you when you can try again.

## Lifetime payout certificate

The **Lifetime Payout Certificate** adds up every payout you have been paid. It
shows the total, the name you chose for your certificates, the date of your latest payout, and how many
payouts you have received. It appears after your first payout is paid and
updates as new payouts are paid.

Select **Share** on its row to preview it, then choose **Download Image** or
**Copy Image**. It is an image, not a link, so nobody else sees it unless you
share the image yourself.

The leaderboard card is different: it is generated when you select **Share
Leaderboard Card**, using your current rank, equity at capture, total traded
volume, and win rate. It is an image to download, not a link. See
[Launch Competition](/guides/launch-competition#share-your-leaderboard-card)
for what the card contains.

## Missing a certificate

Only real challenge accounts earn certificates. A certificate does not appear
for:

* An evaluation that has not passed yet.
* A funding step that has not issued your funded account yet.
* A payout that has not been paid.

If you hold a very large number of certificates, the list shows the most recent
ones with a note. Older certificates stay shareable from your
[dashboard](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/dashboard) and
[Payout History](/guides/challenge-lifecycle/payouts).


# Copy Trading Settings
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/settings/copy-trading

Create and manage same-owner copy-trading groups, select lead and follower accounts, and set balance-adjusted multipliers.

[Open Copy Trading settings](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/settings?section=copy-trading)

## Group controls

Each group contains:

* one **Lead Account** that sends eligible trading instructions;
* one or more **Follower Accounts**;
* a multiplier from `0.1×` to `2×` for each follower;
* an enabled, stopping, or stopped lifecycle.

An account can participate in only one enabled group. Groups remain the same
when you switch the active account elsewhere in the app. Accounts are listed
under any name you gave them on the dashboard; renaming an account does not
change its group or multiplier.

If saving reports that an account can only be in one enabled group, review
its current group first. Remove the account from that group and save before
selecting it in another group. If a group has an unavailable lead or follower,
its remaining active accounts stay reserved. Use that group's **Disable Group**
control before reusing them. Disabling does not close positions; review the
order-cancellation consequences below before changing membership.

## Lead Account

Choose the account that should drive the group. Competition accounts cannot
lead a group. Changing the lead of an existing
group requires disabling that group first. If the lead is no longer active or
available, disable the group before editing its membership.

## Follower Accounts and Multipliers

Add active accounts you own. A funded account cannot follow an evaluation lead.
Competition accounts cannot follow either, because the Competition Rules
prohibit copying trades into or out of a competition account. Accounts that
cannot be selected show the reason under their name.

The multiplier adjusts the follower's balance-normalized opening quantity:

* below `1×` uses less relative size;
* `1×` uses the same relative size after starting-balance normalization;
* above `1×` uses more relative size, subject to the follower's own limits.

Each follower row shows what it would open when the lead opens 1 BTC, and how
that quantity follows from the two account sizes and the multiplier. For
example, a \$100,000 follower of a \$50,000 lead copies 200% of the lead's
quantity at `1×`, and 300% at `1.5×`.

## Try An Order

Once a group has followers, **Try An Order** shows how one lead order would
scale across the group. Nothing is placed. Drag the slider to set the lead
order size and choose `1×` or `2×` leverage. For each account, the preview
shows the order it would open, the margin that order needs, and a bar for the
account's balance. The filled part of the bar is the margin needed. An account
marked **Would Reject** cannot afford that order and would skip it while the
lead and other followers still fill. Lower its multiplier or use a smaller
order to copy it.

Copied market orders wait for the lead market order to fill. If the lead
rejects or expires without filling, its pending market copies are canceled
without opening follower positions or charging trading fees.

Resting limit and trigger orders, including TP/SL exits, continue to execute
independently on each account. Their fills can occur in a different order.

Every follower keeps independent collateral, challenge-rule, position, and
market checks. One follower can reject an instruction without blocking the lead.
Copies use the lead's chosen venue. A trading halt prevents new follower
exposure, including an order placed before the halt that is still executing.

When you save a group, every account that starts following has its open orders
canceled, including stop loss and take profit orders, and its TWAP/VWAP schedules stop. A follower trades only
through its lead, so a manual order left on it could not execute. Positions
stay open, and the save confirmation reports how many orders were canceled.
Protect follower positions from the lead account.

## Edit an enabled group

You can add or remove followers and change multipliers while a group stays
enabled. New lead orders copy to the saved followers. Orders already working
on a follower depend on what changed for that follower:

| Change | Copied orders on that follower |
| - | - |
| Kept in the group with the same multiplier | Kept, including copied stop loss and take profit orders. They still execute on that follower, and an order already executing completes normally. |
| Removed from the group | Canceled. The account unlocks for manual trading. Its positions stay open, so add your own stop loss and take profit. |
| Given a new multiplier | Canceled. The account stays locked and its positions stay open without those exits until the lead places new ones, which copy at the new multiplier. |
| Group turned off (every follower removed) | Canceled on every follower. Positions stay open and every follower unlocks for manual trading. |

Before you save, the form warns when the save would cancel copied orders and
shows how many followers are affected. After saving, the confirmation reports
how many follower orders were canceled.

> [!WARNING]
>
> To keep a follower with an open position protected, leave its multiplier
> unchanged until the position is closed. If you do change it, cancel and place
> the lead's stop loss and take profit again after saving so they copy to that
> follower at the new multiplier.

API credentials must cover the lead and every follower in the same live or
sandbox environment. If a group includes an account outside that boundary,
the API rejects the native lead operation before copying any orders. Use a
credential covering the complete group or manage the instruction on the
website. See [Authentication](/authentication) for copied-order changes and
scheduled execution boundaries.

## Disable and remove

Disable the group before removing it or selecting another lead. Disabling
cancels copied follower orders; follower positions stay open and every
follower unlocks for manual trading right away.

If the lead passes, fails, or is closed, the group stops automatically. The
stopped record identifies why and can be removed after cleanup completes. A
copied order that was still executing when the group stopped is not filled, and
its rejection says the lead account ended.

Read the [Copy Trading Guide](/guides/copy-trading-guide) for sizing examples,
stage compatibility, and the full lifecycle.

## Manage copy groups through the API

API keys with **read** scope can inspect `GET /v1/copy-trading`. A group is
returned only when the credential can access its lead and every follower in
the same live or sandbox environment. A restricted key can therefore see
fewer groups than the website. Accessible groups with archived members remain
listed so they can be disabled or deleted.

Keys with **trade** scope can use these operations:

| Operation | Endpoint |
| - | - |
| Create or update groups and explicitly delete disabled groups | `POST /v1/copy-trading` |
| Disable copying, including a group with inactive or archived accounts | `POST /v1/copy-trading/{config_id}/disable` |
| Acknowledge a completed follower stop notice | `POST /v1/accounts/{account_id}/acknowledge-copy-stop` |

Saving applies the same ownership, account status, stage, competition, sizing,
disjoint-group, and cleanup rules as the website. Every existing and new member must be
accessible to the credential. Groups omitted from a save are preserved; only
IDs in `deleted_config_ids` are deleted. A group must be disabled before it
can be deleted or its lead changed. Pending stop cleanup must finish first.

```json theme={null}
{
  "groups": [
    {
      "enabled": true,
      "source_account_id": "YOUR_LEAD_ACCOUNT_ID",
      "targets": [
        { "account_id": "YOUR_FOLLOWER_ACCOUNT_ID", "multiplier_bps": 10000 }
      ]
    }
  ],
  "deleted_config_ids": []
}
```

Include `config_id` when updating an existing group. The save response returns
`config_ids` in submitted-group order, including newly created IDs. A
multiplier of `10000` uses proportional sizing after the follower-to-lead
starting balance ratio. There can be at most 20 groups and 20 followers per
group; multipliers range from 1000 to 20000 basis points.

Creating a group is not idempotent. If the response is lost, list the groups
and reconcile the intended configuration before retrying. Disabling stops new
copying and schedules outstanding copied-order cleanup; it does not close
existing filled positions. Automatic stops caused by a terminal lead follow
the normal follower close-out process.

Before acknowledging a stop, read
`GET /v1/accounts/{account_id}/trading-policy`. Its account-backed `copy_stop`
contains `stopped_at`, `completed_at`, `acknowledged_at`, and `reason`, even
when the original group has been deleted or is hidden from this credential.
When `completed_at` is present, acknowledge with the exact `copy_stop.stopped_at`
Unix-millisecond timestamp as the request's `stopped_at`. An outdated timestamp
or unfinished cleanup is a no-op.


# Settings
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/settings/index

Configure your account, security, public profile, language, appearance, Streamer Mode, trading defaults, copy trading, API keys, and notifications, and find your certificates and purchase history.

Open [Settings](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/settings) while signed in. Most
changes save to your MyFundedPerps account and follow you across devices;
device-specific controls say so in their description.

On desktop, use **Search** above **Profile** to find pages and individual
settings, such as "App Installation", "Background Effects", or "Max Market
Slippage". Results are grouped into **Pages** and **Settings**, with the parent
page shown above each nested result. Matching words are highlighted. Search
ignores capitalization, accents, and punctuation, and accepts words in any order.
Select a setting to open its page and focus the matching card or control.
If nothing matches, the message shows your search text. Clear the search or
press Escape to show all sections again.

## Account

> [card] [Profile](/settings/profile)
>
> Manage your photo, username, connected accounts, and legal identity, or
> delete your account.

> [card] [Security](/settings/security)
>
> Manage sign-in passkeys, two-factor authentication with an authenticator
> app, and the devices signed in to your account.

> [card] [Public Profile](/settings/public-profile)
>
> Choose what other people and search engines can see.

> [card] [Language](/settings/language)
>
> Change the language used throughout the app.

> [card] [Appearance](/settings/appearance)
>
> Control background effects, 3D Scenes, Dialog Background Blur, and install
> the web app.

> [card] [Streamer Mode](/settings/streamer-mode)
>
> Blur personal details and secrets while you share your screen.

## Trading

> [card] [Trading](/settings/trading)
>
> Set order defaults, execution safeguards, confirmations, One-Click Trading,
> and alerts.

> [card] [Copy Trading](/settings/copy-trading)
>
> Configure lead and follower challenge accounts.

> [card] [Notifications](/settings/notifications)
>
> Choose trade sounds, volume, and custom audio, and, for affiliates,
> Affiliate Emails.

> [card] [API Keys](/settings/api-keys)
>
> Create and revoke credentials for programmatic trading.

## Achievements and billing

> [card] [Certificates](/settings/certificates)
>
> Find and share your pass, funded, payout, lifetime payout, and leaderboard
> certificates.

> [card] [Archived Accounts](/settings/archived-accounts)
>
> Hide ended accounts from your account lists, and unarchive them at any time.

> [card] [Purchase History](/settings/purchase-history)
>
> Search challenge orders, review totals and statuses, and open invoices.

> [!TIP]
>
> Use the app links at the top of each reference page to jump directly to the
> matching settings tab.


# Language Settings
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/settings/language

Choose the language MyFundedPerps uses and understand how the selection changes the current app route.

[Open Language settings](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/settings?section=language)

## Change the app language

Select a language from the Language menu. MyFundedPerps opens the localized
version of the current route so navigation, settings labels, trading controls,
and supported product copy use the new locale.

The page reload is expected. Finish any unsaved form or order-ticket work before
switching languages.

> [!NOTE]
>
> User-generated content, market symbols, legal text authored in a specific
> language, and content supplied by an external provider may remain in their
> original language.


# Notification Settings
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/settings/notifications

Choose trade emails, affiliate purchase emails, and sounds for trading events and price alerts, control volume and event toggles, and upload, preview, rename, or delete custom audio.

[Open Notification settings](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/settings?section=sounds)

The Notifications tab controls trade emails, trading audio, and, for
affiliates, purchase emails. Visual fill and order-change notifications are configured under
[Trading settings](/settings/trading).

## Trade Emails

**Trade Email Notifications** is off by default. Turn it on to receive an
email each time one of your orders fills, a take-profit order executes, or a
stop-loss order executes, on any of your trading accounts. The setting is
saved to your profile, so it applies on every device you sign in on.

Each email names the event, the trading account, the market, the side, the
executed quantity, the execution price, and the execution time in UTC, with a
link to the market's order history. A take-profit or stop-loss execution sends
only its own email, not an additional order-filled email. Emails follow the
actual fill: a price that touches your take-profit or stop-loss level without
the order executing does not send one. Emails usually arrive within a minute
or two of the fill.

Turn the setting off to stop all three emails. Executions that happen while it
is off never send an email, including after you turn it back on. Liquidations
and account emails, such as rule breaches and payout updates, are not affected
by this setting. API sandbox accounts send trade emails only when
**Sandbox Account Emails** is also turned on (see
[API Keys settings](/settings/api-keys)). The **Manage notification settings** link
in each email opens this card.

## Affiliate Emails

This card appears only when you are an affiliate. **Affiliate Purchase Email
Notifications** is on by default: each time a purchase made with one of your
codes is credited to you, you receive an email with the commission amount.
Turn it off to stop these emails, and turn it back on to receive them for
later purchases. Emails are not sent for purchases credited while the setting
is off. Historical purchases do not generate emails when their commission
is corrected or approved. The **Manage notification settings** link in each email opens this
card. See [Affiliate Program](/guides/affiliate-program) for when commission
is credited.

## Trade Sounds

Trade Sounds covers order fills, take profits, stop losses, and price alerts.
For each event, choose a built-in or custom sound and turn that event on or
off. Use the preview control to hear the current selection before relying on it
during trading.

Price alerts play the built-in **Alert** sound by default when an alert
triggers while MyFundedPerps is open in your browser.

The master Trade Sound Volume applies across enabled event sounds. Browser tab
audio permissions and device volume still affect what you hear.

> [!WARNING]
>
> Sound is a convenience, not an execution guarantee. Confirm fills, rejected
> orders, and position state in the trading interface even when no sound plays.

## Sound Library

Upload an accepted audio file to add a custom sound. Give it a recognizable
name, then select it for any event under Trade Sounds.

The library lets you:

* preview a custom sound;
* rename it without changing its audio;
* delete it when it is no longer needed.

An upload must be an audio file and fit within the size limit shown by the app.
If a custom sound is deleted, review any event that previously used it and
choose another sound.


# Profile Settings
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/settings/profile

Update your profile photo and username, connect social accounts, maintain the legal identity attached to your account, and delete your account.

[Open Profile settings](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/settings?section=profile)

## Profile photo

Choose a JPG, PNG, or WebP image, adjust the crop and zoom, then save. The
editor validates the image before upload. You can change or remove the saved
photo later.

## Username

Your username identifies your public profile. Enter an available value and
select **Save**. If the value is unavailable or invalid, the form keeps the
existing username and shows the reason.

Changing a username can change how people find or recognize your public profile.
Review [Public Profile settings](/settings/public-profile) after a rename.

## Connected accounts

Connect or disconnect X and Discord from the Connected Accounts card. Google
connection is being rolled out gradually and appears when available for your account.
A connection flow can open the provider and then return to MyFundedPerps.
Google is a sign-in method: you can connect only the Google account that uses
the same email as your MyFundedPerps account. See
[Sign-in methods](/settings/security#sign-in-methods). An
unlinked provider shows a **Connect** action. A linked provider shows
**Connected** with a **Disconnect** action.

### Discord Perpetuals Funded role

When your linked Discord account is a member of the MyFundedPerps Discord
server and you have an active funded account with an original size of at least
\$5,000, you receive the **Perpetuals Funded** role there. The role usually
appears within a few seconds and always within about 15 minutes. If you link Discord before
joining the server, the role appears within about 15 minutes of joining.

Funded accounts of \$1,000 and \$2,500 do not qualify, even if you hold several.
If your funded accounts have only ever been below \$5,000, an existing role is
removed without the 14-day grace period.

If you previously held a qualifying funded account and no longer have an active
one, for example because it failed or closed, the role is removed after about
14 days. Getting an active funded account of at least \$5,000 within those
14 days keeps the role, and getting one later gives it back. Disconnecting
Discord from your profile removes the role right away.

You can disconnect while signed in without signing in again. Social connections
are profile links; disconnecting one does not change your email sign-in method.

If the provider reports a failure, return to Profile settings and retry. Do not
disconnect an account while another browser tab is still completing the same
provider flow.

## Legal identity

Your legal first and last name, residential address, and country are saved at
signup. Residents of Afghanistan, India, Indonesia, or Myanmar whose government
issued ID shows a single name may leave the last name blank. Contact support if these details need correction. If an older account
is missing legal identity details, complete them here before identity verification.
Editing billing details at checkout only changes that order, not your profile.

> [!WARNING]
>
> Use accurate legal information. Identity, agreement, fraud-review, and payout
> workflows may compare account information. A display name or social username
> is not a substitute for legal identity.

## Change your sign-in email

Contact support to change your sign-in email. You may receive a
[Support Verification Code](/settings/security#verify-your-identity-in-support-chat)
at your current email. Check that the requested replacement address is correct
before sharing the `SUP-` code in the support conversation you opened.

If you cannot access your current inbox, tell support so they can help with
account recovery. Never share sign-in or authenticator codes.

An email already used by another account cannot be selected. After your email
changes, all existing sessions end. Sign in with the new address and verify that
inbox. Your trading history and two-factor authentication stay attached to your
account.

## Delete your account

Select **Delete Account** at the bottom of Profile settings, then type the
email address on your account and confirm. Deleting your account is
permanent and cannot be undone.

When you confirm, you are signed out of every device and can no longer sign in.
You lose access to your challenge accounts, trading history, purchase history,
and payouts. Any active challenge is forfeited, and any payout that has not
been sent is not paid.

Before you delete your account, request any payout you are eligible for and
wait for it to be sent. Contact support if you need help with your account
instead of deleting it. If you decide to trade with MyFundedPerps again later,
contact support before registering.


# Public Profile Settings
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/settings/public-profile

Enable a public trading profile, select included challenge accounts and performance fields, and control visibility and indexing.

[Open Public Profile settings](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/settings?section=public-profile)

## Enable the profile

Turn on **Enable Public Profile** to create or publish your public trading
profile. The page shows its share link after the profile is available.

Your public profile uses your account username. Complete account onboarding
before creating it; you do not choose a separate public-profile username.

## Choose public accounts

Select the eligible challenge accounts that should contribute to the public
profile. Account names remain private. The settings page lists the most recent
eligible accounts; an older account already included can remain part of the
profile even when it is outside that list.

[Archived accounts](/settings/archived-accounts) are not listed and cannot be
included. Archiving an account removes it from your public profile.

## Choose visible information

The profile can expose selected performance fields and account context, such as
an account-stage badge. Each row has its own visibility control, so hide a field
you do not want public instead of assuming it is concealed by another setting.

## Data freshness

Each public profile load uses a cached trading snapshot that can be up to 15
minutes old. The page does not subscribe to price updates or refresh trading
data in the background. Reloading during the same cache window can return the
same snapshot.

Open-position rows show the entry price and size. They do not show a changing
market price or position P\&L.

## Search engine indexing

Search Engine Indexing controls whether the profile asks supported search
engines to index it. Turning indexing off does not make an enabled profile
private: anyone with its URL may still be able to open it.

## Disable or delete

* **Disable Profile** removes the profile from public availability while
  retaining its settings for later use.
* **Delete Profile** permanently removes the public profile and its saved
  public-profile settings.

Use the confirmation dialog carefully; deletion is not the same as temporarily
hiding the profile.


# Purchase History
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/settings/purchase-history

Manage saved cards, search and filter challenge purchases, review price and discount details, export history, and open available invoices.

[Open Purchase History](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/settings?section=purchases)

Purchase History lists every challenge purchase on your account, newest first.
It is a billing record; it does not include trading fills, funded payouts, or
affiliate payments.

## Saved cards

**Saved Cards**, above your purchases, lists every card you saved at
checkout with its brand, last four digits, and expiry date. An expired card
shows **Expired**. Select **Remove** to delete a card; removing it does not
affect past purchases. To add a card, choose
[Save this card for future purchases](/guides/challenge-lifecycle/buying-a-challenge#save-a-card)
when you pay with a new card. Your card number stays with the payment
processor; MyFundedPerps never stores it.

## Purchase confirmation

A completed challenge purchase sends one purchase-confirmation email to the
email address entered at checkout. It includes your order details, account
number, account name, stage, and starting balance. An order for several
accounts sends one email that lists every account number. Purchased accounts do not send a separate
account-issued email. Your new account is available in the account switcher.

## Partner rewards

During an active My Funded Futures partner offer, a successful purchase whose
total after discounts is **strictly greater than** the advertised threshold
can receive one free \$25,000 Rapid Evaluation redemption code, while codes
remain available. Eligibility is determined when the payment succeeds, not
when you first see the banner or open checkout. For an order with several
accounts, the whole order total after discounts counts toward the threshold.
Each qualifying order can receive one code; repeat purchases can qualify
separately.

Your code arrives in a separate email at the email address entered at checkout.
Redeem it on [My Funded Futures](https://myfundedfutures.com/), rather than in
MyFundedPerps checkout. The partner offer also appears beneath the challenge cards on the homepage.
Select **MyFundedFutures** there for purchase and code-delivery details. The mobile
header keeps its compact product tabs.

The partner offer uses the existing Futures/Perps banner
and returns to its usual message when disabled, expired, or out of codes.
The banner can take up to two minutes to reflect inventory changes; seeing the
banner does not reserve a code.

If the reward email is missing, check your spam folder and contact
[support](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/contact) with your order number.
A delivery retry uses the code already assigned to that order.

## Find an order

Search by the order information shown in the table, or filter by status. The
row count and page count below the table cover every order matching the status
filter. The table loads your most recent orders first and loads older orders as
you page toward the end. Search applies to the orders loaded so far, so page
further back to find an older order. While a search is active, or if the total
is momentarily unavailable, the count shows a plus sign, such as
**200+ rows**, until every order has loaded.

| Status | Meaning |
| - | - |
| Paid | Payment completed and the order was fulfilled or is being finalized. |
| Pending | The order has not reached a final payment state. |
| Failed | Payment or fulfillment failed. |
| Partially Refunded | Some accounts in a multi-account order were refunded. |
| Refunded | All purchased accounts in the order were refunded. |

If you accidentally purchased extra accounts, contact
[support](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/contact) with your order number and the
accounts you want refunded. Approved partial refunds use those accounts’ share
of the discounted order. The \$25 fee applies once per refund request, capped
at its cash portion. Any corresponding store credit is returned as store credit.
Refund eligibility still follows the [refund policy](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/refund-policy).

When a refund is issued, you receive a confirmation email for your records. It
lists the order, the refunded accounts, the amount, and whether it went to your
original payment method or to store credit. A refund to your card can take 5-10
business days to appear on your statement. Store credit is available right
away. If an order is refunded in more than one step, you receive one email for
each refund.

A partially refunded order remains under the **Paid** filter. Its details mark
the refunded accounts and show the total returned, including store credit.
Accounts outside the refund retain their paid status.

## Review the price breakdown

Open a row to see its challenge, profit split, base price, discount code and
discount amount when present, total, and current status. An order for several
accounts appears once, with the number of accounts beside the challenge and
every account it issued in its details. Exports include a **Quantity** column
and list each account number. A purchase made with
the PERPS code shows PERPS as its discount code together with the
percentage it was worth at the time. Use this stored
breakdown instead of comparing the order to today's challenge price.

Payment Method shows **Unifold** for purchases paid through Unifold and
**Card** for card checkout. A purchase paid entirely with store credit also
shows **Card**. Purchase-history exports use the same labels.

## Open an invoice

Select the invoice icon in the order row or **View Invoice** inside the order
details for a paid or refunded purchase. The PDF opens in a new tab, where you
can save or print it. Pending and failed purchases do not have invoices.

The invoice header identifies the issuing company by its legal name, Funding
Perpetuals Holdings, Inc., together with its registered business address. The
invoice contains the order number, billing details, payment reference,
subtotal, discount, and total paid. An order for several accounts shows one
line with the number of accounts and the price of each. Discounts show the code you applied,
including PERPS when it selected an eligible promotion for your purchase.
Newly generated invoices identify Unifold payments as **Unifold**.

Older purchases may take a moment to generate their invoice on first access.
Once created, the PDF remains the original payment record. A refund does not
replace an existing invoice; check the order's current status in Purchase
History for refund information.

## Export history

Select **Download CSV** to export your purchase history. The file includes every
order matching the selected status filter, not only the rows currently loaded
in the table. The search box does not narrow the export. If the download fails,
an error message appears; select **Download CSV** again.

**Total (USD)** is the order price after discounts. The export splits it into
**Store Credit (USD)**, the store credit applied to the order, and the amount
charged to your payment method: **Card (USD)** for card checkout or
**Unifold (USD)** for Unifold payments. A purchase paid entirely with store
credit shows **Card** with a **Card (USD)** amount of 0.00. Use these columns to
track how much of each purchase you paid out of pocket.

For a missing row or invoice, follow [Troubleshooting and FAQ](/guides/troubleshooting-and-faq).


# Security Settings
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/settings/security

Manage email and Google sign-in, two-factor authentication, and the devices signed in to your account.

[Open Security settings](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/settings?section=security)

## Sign-in methods

You can sign in with a one-time code sent to your email. Google sign-in is
being rolled out gradually and may not be available for your account. When
**Continue with Google** is available, both methods open the same
MyFundedPerps account.

* **Gmail and Google Workspace addresses:** the first Google sign-in creates
  your account, or connects Google to your existing account with the same
  email.
* **Other addresses on a Google account:** you confirm the address once with
  an email code, and Google is connected right after. This keeps a Google
  account that is no longer tied to its mailbox from opening your account.
* **After Google is connected:** you can sign in with Google even if you later
  change the email on your Google account. Email codes keep working too.

You can connect or disconnect Google from the
[Connected Accounts](/settings/profile#connected-accounts) card. Disconnecting
Google requires a recent sign-in, and you can always sign in with an email
code afterwards.

## Two-factor authentication

Two-factor authentication applies to every sign-in method. After your email
code or Google sign-in, when you have a passkey or authenticator app enabled,
you must then verify one of those methods. If both are enabled, you can choose
either method at sign-in.

You can request up to five codes per rolling minute and ten per rolling hour
for the same email address. If you reach either limit, the code request control
remains unavailable while an inline message counts down until you can request
another code.

Passkeys use your device's biometric check, PIN, or security key PIN. MyFundedPerps does not receive that biometric or PIN.

## Resume or restart sign-in

If you return after verifying your email or signing in with Google, but before
completing two-factor
verification, MyFundedPerps can resume the unfinished sign-in. You are not fully
signed in until you verify your second factor.

Authenticator verification must finish within 10 minutes of verifying your email
or signing in with Google.
If that window has expired and you have no passkey to use instead, reopening
sign-in returns you to email entry. If it expires while you are entering an
authenticator code, submitting the code returns you to email entry with an
expiration message. Request and verify a new email code, or sign in with Google
again, to continue.

Select **Use Different Email** to clear the unfinished session and start again.
If that request fails, the verification screen stays open and shows an error.
Try **Use Different Email** again when your connection is available.

## Add a passkey

1. Select **Add Passkey**.
2. Follow the prompt from your device, password manager, or security key.
3. Confirm that the passkey appears in Security settings.

If your current session is no longer recent, sign out and sign in again, then
return to Security settings within 10 minutes to add the passkey.

Adding your first passkey enables two-factor authentication on every future sign-in.
Add more than one passkey if you want a recovery option on another device or
security key. You can keep up to 10 passkeys on your account.

## Remove a passkey

Select **Remove** beside a passkey and confirm. Removing your final passkey
leaves authenticator-app verification enabled if you have it. Removing your
final method turns off two-factor authentication.

## Add an authenticator app

1. Select **Add Authenticator App**.
2. Scan the QR code with your authenticator app, or enter the setup key manually.
3. Enter the app's six-digit **Authenticator Code** and select **Verify Code**.

Setup is complete only after the code is verified. Authenticator apps generate
a new code every 30 seconds. A code can be used only once. Start a new setup if you do not finish within
10 minutes. When you sign in with both methods enabled, select
**Use Authenticator App** to enter a code instead of using your passkey.

Authenticator setup, verification, and removal share a limit of five requests
per minute per account. If you reach it, wait a minute before trying again.
A new sign-in does not reset the limit.

## Remove an authenticator app

Select **Remove Authenticator App** in Security settings and confirm. You may need to sign
out and sign in again before changing your methods.

> [!WARNING]
>
> If you lose access to every enrolled passkey and authenticator app, contact
> MyFundedPerps support for account recovery. Keep an additional passkey on
> another device or security key as a recovery option.

## Signed-in devices

**Signed-In Devices** lists every browser and device currently signed in to
your account. Each entry shows the browser and operating system, an approximate
location from its network, and when it signed in. Other devices also show when
they were last active. The device you are using is marked **This Device**. Location and last activity are
approximate: last activity updates about once a day.

To sign out a device you don't recognize, select **Sign Out** beside it and
confirm. To sign out everywhere except the device you are using, select
**Sign Out All Other Devices** and confirm. A signed-out device must sign in
again with an email code, and with your passkey or authenticator app when
two-factor authentication is enabled.

If you see a device you don't recognize, sign it out and add a passkey or
authenticator app if you have not already.

## Verify your identity in support chat

Support can send a **Support Verification Code** to your current account email.
It starts with `SUP-` and is designed to be shared in the MyFundedPerps support
conversation you opened. Check the conversation reference and requested action
in the email before sharing it. It expires after 12 hours, or after 10 minutes
when the code is for changing your account email. Each code permits five
incorrect attempts. A new request replaces the previous code.

Never share a sign-in code, password-reset code, passkey approval, or
authenticator code with support. The support code cannot sign you in or remove
two-factor authentication. If you did not request help or the action is wrong,
do not share it.


# Streamer Mode Settings
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/settings/streamer-mode

Blur your personal details and one-time secrets while you stream, record, or share your screen.

[Open Streamer Mode settings](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/settings?section=streamer-mode)

## Streamer Mode

Streamer Mode keeps personal details off screen while you stream, record a
video, or share your screen. It is off by default. When it is on, these details
are blurred everywhere in the app:

| Where | What is blurred |
| - | - |
| Account menu and Profile | Your email address |
| Profile | Your legal name and address in **Legal Identity** |
| Checkout | Your email, billing name and address, address suggestions, and card details |
| Onboarding | Your legal name and address as you enter them |
| Funded agreement | Your legal name and typed signature, and the signed-by confirmation |
| Merch shipping | Your shipping name, address, and phone number |
| Payouts | Your Rise payout email |
| Builder submissions | Your name and contact email |
| Security and API Keys | Authenticator setup QR codes and setup keys, and new API key credentials |

Labels and buttons stay readable, so you can still show viewers how to fill in
a form or buy an account. You can type into blurred fields as usual. Blurred
text does not reveal on hover, so moving your cursor over it during a stream
does not expose it.

To check what you entered, press and hold **Hold to peek** next to a form:
Legal Identity, checkout billing details, card details, onboarding, merch
shipping, your Rise payout email, your funded agreement name, or your builder
submission contact details. Only that form is shown, and only while
you hold the button. It blurs again as soon as you let go. Authenticator setup
codes and new API keys have no peek button and stay blurred.

The change applies immediately, and the signed-in account preference carries
to your other devices. The current browser also remembers it, so pages are
blurred from the moment they load.

Identity verification cannot be blurred, because you need to see your camera
and document photos to complete it. While Streamer Mode is on, the verification
page reminds you to stop sharing your screen before you continue.

> [!NOTE]
>
> Streamer Mode only changes what is shown in MyFundedPerps. It does not hide
> details in other tabs, browser autofill suggestions, password managers, or
> emails. Check what else is visible before you go live.

## Hide Email in Account Menu

Hide Email in Account Menu blurs only the email address in the account menu.
You can also turn it on or off by selecting your email in the account menu.

While Streamer Mode is on, the account menu email is always blurred and this
setting cannot be turned off.


# Trading Settings
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/settings/trading

Configure PnL display, trade-chart lines, order-ticket defaults and presets, keyboard execution, execution protection, trade confirmations, on-screen trading notifications, the market % change period, and the live price in the browser tab.

[Open Trading settings](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/settings?section=trading)

Trading settings control how open-position Net PnL is displayed, how a new
order ticket starts, and which safety prompts appear. They do not override
challenge rules, market limits, or the settings already stored on an open position.

Use **Search** in the desktop settings sidebar to find a control such as
"Max Market Slippage", "Margin Mode", or "Confirm New Orders". Selecting a
nested result opens Trading and scrolls to the matching control. On desktop,
the sidebar also lists Trading's cards, such as PnL Display and Trade
Confirmations, under **Trading**. Select one to jump to it.

## PnL Display

Choose **Position PnL Display** in **Settings > Trading > PnL Display**:

* **Total trade** (default): shows unrealized PnL on the remaining size plus
  realized PnL from partial closes and swap payments, minus paid trading fees.
* **Open position**: shows unrealized PnL for only the remaining size. Realized
  PnL, paid trading fees, and swap payments are excluded. The percentage uses
  the remaining position's margin instead of the total margin committed.

For example, buy 1 ETH at \$3,000 and sell 0.9 ETH at \$3,100. If ETH then drops
to \$2,950, Open position shows -\$5 on the remaining 0.1 ETH, while Total trade
shows +\$85 before fees and swap payments.

Three switches show a position's PnL as a price move instead of USD, the way
traders of those markets usually count it. All three are off by default:

| Setting | Markets | Shows |
| - | - | - |
| Index PnL in Points | Indices such as NAS100, US30, and DAX | Points: **+50.00 pts** |
| Commodity PnL in Points | Gold, silver, oil, and other commodities | Points: **+12.40 pts** |
| Forex PnL in Pips | Forex pairs such as EURUSD and USDJPY | Pips: **+20.3 pips** |

A point is a move of 1.0 in the price: a long NAS100 position entered at 18,000
shows **+50.00 pts** when the mark reaches 18,050, however large the position
is. A pip is 0.0001 on most forex pairs and 0.01 on yen pairs, so EURUSD moving
from 1.0850 to 1.0870 is **+20.0 pips**. Shorts gain when the price falls. The
move is measured from your average entry, before fees and swap payments; there
is no tick count. Crypto and stock positions always show USD.

Points and pips apply to open positions (positions table, cards, mini chart, and
the chart's position label) and to closed positions in Position History. A
closed position that was reduced in steps shows the size-weighted move across
every close. A liquidated position shows the collateral it lost per unit, not
the distance to the liquidation price. Some older closed positions don't have
the data to compute a move, so they keep showing Net PnL in USD. Hover an open
position's value to see the USD breakdown. Sorting by PnL always sorts by USD.
Account totals, the dashboard, and share cards stay in USD because moves in
different markets can't be added up.

**Include Estimated Close Fees** is on by default. Turn it off to stop deducting
the estimated fee to close the remaining position. This applies to either PnL
mode. Both controls are in Settings; the terminal no longer has a fee toggle.

Your choices sync across devices when signed in. The display mode applies to
open-position values on the chart, positions table and cards, dashboard,
breakeven prices, and open-position share cards. The tooltip shows the components
included in the selected mode; realized fills remain available in trade history.
The chart's position label reads **Net PnL**, and its value follows your
selected display mode. When a switch above applies to the market, it reads
**Points** or **Pips** and shows the price move instead.

Close notifications use settled results rather than these display preferences.
A full close shows **Total trade net PnL**, including earlier partial closes,
all trading fees, and swap payments. A partial close shows **Closed portion net
PnL**, including its closing fee and a proportional share of the remaining
entry costs and swap payments. Older partially closed positions without that
cost history show **Fill net PnL** for subsequent partial closes instead.
Historical notifications keep their original amounts. Execution price movement
can still make the settled result differ from the chart estimate.

These preferences change displayed values only. Execution fees, account equity,
challenge rules, close-order previews, and closed trade history are unchanged.

## Chart Lines

Choose which trading lines and markers appear on the trade chart. Every group
except **Trade Arrows**, **Bid/Ask Lines**, and **Long-Press Candle Details**
is shown by default. Turn a
switch off to hide that group; your choice is saved to your user settings and
synced across devices when signed in.

| Setting | What it shows |
| - | - |
| Position Line | Your open position's entry price with its live Net PnL. |
| TP/SL Lines | Resting Take Profit and Stop Loss orders. |
| Open Order Lines | Resting limit, stop, take, and conditional orders. |
| Liquidation Lines | The estimated liquidation price of your position. |
| Loss Limit Line | The price where your position would bring the account to its loss limit. |
| Pass Target Line | The price where your position would bring an evaluation account to its profit target. |
| Trade Markers | Buy and sell markers where your orders filled. |
| Order Previews | The lines the order ticket draws before you place an order. |
| Trade Arrows | Arrow markers under buys and over sells, joined entry to exit. |
| Bid/Ask Lines | The current best bid and ask prices. |
| Long-Press Candle Details | A box with the held candle's prices when you long-press the chart on a touch screen. |

Hiding a line changes the chart only. The order, position, or risk level behind
it still exists and still executes, liquidates, or enforces your account rules
as normal. Hidden lines cannot be dragged, so manage those orders from the
Positions and Open Orders tabs instead. Hiding **Position Line** or **TP/SL
Lines** also removes the chart handles that add a new Take Profit or Stop Loss
from the position line. Hiding **Order Previews** or **TP/SL Lines** removes
the same handles from a draft limit, stop, or take order's line.

**Loss Limit Line** and **Pass Target Line** appear only while you hold a
position in the market you are viewing. Each assumes your other open positions
stay at their current prices, so the level moves as those prices change. The
pass target line shows only on evaluation accounts that have a profit target.
It is measured on the mark price, not individual trades, so a candle wick past
the line does not always reach it. Reaching it does not pass the account on its
own: every other challenge rule still applies. Both lines count a momentary
touch: equity at either line for an instant reaches it, even if the price moves
back right after.

The loss limit line is labeled with the rule you would hit first. If your
account has a daily loss limit and that limit is closer than your max drawdown,
the line reads **Daily Loss Limit**. Otherwise it reads **Max Drawdown**. The
label can switch as your equity moves and when the daily loss limit resets.
If you hold a position through midnight New York time, the line counts the new
day's daily loss limit from your first order of that day. Your dashboard
always shows the current daily loss floor.

While you size an order in the order ticket, the chart also draws a dashed
**Draft Daily Loss Limit** (or **Draft Max Drawdown**) and **Draft Pass
Target**. These show where the two levels
would sit if the order filled in full: at its limit or trigger price, or at the
current best price for a market order. If you already hold a position in the
market, the draft levels include it. The draft lines are previews only and
disappear when you clear the size. They show when **Order Previews** and the
matching line group are both turned on. Scaled orders do not show them, because
their fills spread across several prices.

The **Loss Limit Line** also sets aside the estimated closing fee and the
maximum slippage for closing your position, so it sits slightly closer to the
current price than the point where your open profit or loss alone would reach
the limit. A Stop Loss placed at or before the line stays within your loss
limit after those costs. A fast move that jumps past your Stop Loss before it
fills can still close it beyond the line.

If your remaining loss allowance is smaller than those closing costs, closing
at the current price would already breach the limit. The line then reads
**Closing now breaches** and sits on your position's profit side: below a
short, above a long. A close stays within the limit only once the price
reaches the line. The draft line shows the same warning when an order's opening
fee and closing costs alone would use up the allowance left.

**Trade Arrows** is off by default. Turn it on to change how **Trade Markers**
look: each fill becomes a small arrow on the candle it filled in, pointing up
from under the candle for a buy and down from over the candle for a sell,
instead of a lettered badge. Several fills on one side of a candle stack
outward. Liquidations and account close-outs use an amber arrow. A dashed line
joins each entry's arrow to the arrow of the exit that closed it, green when
the price moved in the trade's favor and red when it moved against it. Entries
of a position that is still open have no line until they close. Hover an arrow
to see the fill's side, size, and price; its trade stays highlighted while the
other trades dim. Arrows and lines cover your most recent 100 orders and appear
once the chart has loaded the candles they belong to. Turning off **Trade
Markers** hides them too.

If **Trade Markers** is on but no badges appear on the chart, right-click the
chart and make sure **Hide marks on bars** is unchecked. That chart option does
not affect **Trade Arrows**.

**Bid/Ask Lines** is off by default. Turn it on to draw the best bid as a
dashed green line tagged **Bid** and the best ask as a dashed red line tagged
**Ask**, each with its price on the price scale. They follow the market's order
book as it updates. On very liquid markets
the spread is often smaller than one pixel at normal zoom, so the two lines can
look like a single line until you zoom in.

**Long-Press Candle Details** is off by default. Turn it on to show a box with
the open, high, low, close, and change of the candle under your finger when
you long-press the chart on a phone or tablet. The box sits on the side of the
chart away from your finger and closes when you tap the chart. It applies to
candle and bar chart styles only, and has no effect when you use a mouse.

**Order Label Side** chooses which side of the chart shows the labels for your
position (including its Net PnL), your Take Profit, Stop Loss, and open orders,
and any draft order you are setting up. **Right**, the default, keeps them next
to the price scale. **Left** moves them to the left edge of the chart so they
do not cover the latest candles. The lines themselves still span the chart, and
dragging a label works the same on either side.

## Order Defaults

**Default Trading Hours** chooses which option opens first on markets that
trade on both **Standard Market Hours** and **24/7**. It starts as **Standard
Market Hours**. A market where you hold an open position opens on that
position's option instead. You can also change it from the **Trading Hours**
picker on the trade page.

Unless you have saved a different preference, new order tickets start with
**Isolated** margin, **USD** sizing for all markets, **Percent** TP/SL gain and
loss inputs, and **Clear Size After Order** enabled. The default slider ranges
are **up to 100%** for order size and **up to 10 contracts** for
futures-equivalent sizing. Your saved choices take precedence over these
defaults.

| Setting | Options | Effect |
| - | - | - |
| Margin Mode | Isolated or Cross | Sets the starting mode for a newly opened position. Existing positions keep their mode. |
| Apply Leverage to Open Cross Positions | On or off | Off by default. When on, confirming a new leverage in the order ticket also changes that market's open cross position to the new leverage right away, without placing an order. |
| Order Size Unit | USD or Asset | Sets the default quantity unit for order tickets. Futures-equivalent markets use the setting below. |
| Futures-Equivalent Position Sizing | USD, Asset, Minis, or Micros | Sets how supported Oil, Gold, Silver, NAS100, and SP500 tickets express size, using CME/COMEX contract multipliers. |
| Order Size Slider Range | 10%, 25%, 50%, 75%, or 100% | Sets the largest account-percentage shortcut shown for opening orders. Reduce-only orders still allow 100%. |
| Futures Contract Slider Range | 1, 5, 10, 25, 50, or 100 contracts | Sets the largest contract shortcut shown for supported index and commodity orders. Direct entry can exceed the chosen range. |
| TP/SL Gain and Loss Unit | Percent or USD | Changes how Take Profit and Stop Loss gain/loss inputs are displayed. |
| TP/SL Preset | Gain, Loss, and Percent or USD | Starts every order ticket with this Take Profit gain and Stop Loss loss. Leave both empty to turn the preset off. |
| Clear Size After Order | On or off | Clears quantity, including the size saved for that market, after an order is accepted to reduce accidental repeats. |

### TP/SL Preset

A TP/SL preset saves a gain and a loss, not prices. For example, a preset of
**\$150** gain and **\$50** loss fills the Gain and Loss fields on every market's
order ticket and turns on **Take Profit / Stop Loss**. When you enter a size,
the ticket calculates the Take Profit and Stop Loss prices that match those
amounts for that market, side, leverage, and entry price. Changing the size
recalculates them. A USD preset needs a size before it can show prices; a
Percent preset is a return on margin, so it can show prices before you enter a
size.

You can set either leg alone. Save or change the preset here, or enter a Gain
and Loss in the order ticket and select **Save** (or **Update**) next to
**Preset** in the Take Profit / Stop Loss section. Select **Clear** there, or
empty both fields here, to remove it. A ticket where you already entered a
Take Profit or Stop Loss keeps your values. After an order is accepted, the
ticket refills the preset for your next order.

Mini and micro modes match the selected real-world contract's dollar-per-point
exposure with a platform perpetual position. They use the market's maximum
leverage to calculate required margin and round position size down to the
market's supported size increment. Other markets show only USD and asset units;
the platform does not infer a futures multiplier.

## Order Presets

The order ticket includes three editable **Quick Size** buttons for opening
orders and three editable buttons for closing the current position, 25%, 50%,
and 100% by default. Quick
Size is one tap: each button places the order immediately, with no review step,
using the rest of the ticket as it stands (order type, leverage, margin mode,
and any Take Profit or Stop Loss). Open buttons follow the side selected in the
ticket, labeled Long or Short, and size the order as a USD notional amount. Open
sizes default to values matched to the account's balance tier and remain
editable. Close buttons appear when you hold a position in the selected market
and send a reduce-only order on the opposing side for that share of the
position; the ticket then returns to the side you had selected. If the ticket
cannot place the order as it stands, such as a limit order with no price or one
that needs a review, the button fills the ticket instead so you can finish it
yourself. Select the edit icon beside Quick Size to change the open amounts
and close percentages. To hide Quick Size from the order ticket, turn off
**Show Quick Size** under **Order Defaults**. The choice follows your account
across devices.

Open amounts can also be set for one market at a time, in any unit the ticket
offers for that market: the asset itself (such as 0.05 BTC, or 10,000 EUR on
EUR/USD) or mini and micro contracts on supported index and commodity markets. In the Quick
Size editor, choose the market's **Only** option, pick a unit, and enter three
amounts. That market then uses those buttons on every venue, while all other
markets keep your USD amounts. Contract amounts are whole numbers. Choosing
**All Markets** for that market removes its own amounts. You can save amounts
for up to 50 markets. Review, change, or remove them under **Quick Size by
Market** in **Order Defaults**. These amounts also follow your account across
devices; the USD amounts and close percentages stay on the device where you set
them.

Order presets save a complete recipe: side, order type, size, leverage, margin
mode, attached Take Profit and Stop Loss, slippage, and reduce-only intent. Six
stable slots map to the number keys 1 through 6 on the trade page.

> [!NOTE]
>
> Order presets are in a limited early release and may not be available on your
> account yet.

Open **Presets** from the terminal bottom bar. In Arm mode, choosing a preset
fills the visible order ticket and stops so you can review and submit it. The
ticket always updates to show the fields that will be used. The floating panel
can be moved, resized, and pinned on desktop; it uses a sheet on smaller screens.

1-Tap is a separate per-account opt-in and is off by default. After enabling it
in **1-Tap Safety**, arm it from the panel footer. The first submission after
arming requires a 350ms hold on a preset card. Later selections can submit with
one press until 1-Tap disarms. Closing the panel, switching markets, account risk
state changes, or five minutes of inactivity disarms it.

The notional ceiling blocks only 1-Tap submission. A blocked preset stays
available in Arm mode so you can fill and review the ticket. A successful fill
offers a five-second **Close** action. Closing is a new reduce-only trade, so
fees and simulated PnL still apply.

> [!WARNING]
>
> 1-Tap does not bypass market availability, challenge rules, exposure limits,
> or order validation. It submits simulated orders on the active terminal
> account.

Use the **Order Presets** card in Trading settings for the complete editor. A
risk-sized preset must include a Stop Loss; the app will not save one without a
price distance to size from.

## Keyboard Execution

Keyboard execution is off by default. Turn on **Enable keyboard execution** to
use the account-synced bindings below on the trade page.

| Action | Default |
| - | - |
| Choose Buy / Long | `B` |
| Choose Sell / Short | `S` |
| Choose Market Order | `M` |
| Choose Limit Order | `L` |
| Focus Order Size | `Q` |
| Submit Order Ticket | `Ctrl+Enter` or `Command+Enter` |
| Focus Positions | `P` |
| Manage Focused Position TP/SL | `Shift+T` |
| Close Focused Position | `Shift+Z` |
| Focus Open Orders | `O` |
| Cancel Focused Order | `Shift+D` |
| Cancel All Open Orders | `Shift+X` |
| Close All Positions | `Shift+C` |

Select a binding to record a replacement. Press Escape to cancel recording,
or Delete or Backspace to leave that action unassigned. After changing or
clearing a binding, select **Reset** beside that action to restore only its
default. The editor rejects duplicate bindings and shortcuts reserved by the
app, browser, or operating system.

Saved shortcut profiles created before the complete action set was available
leave the new actions unassigned. Select **Reset** beside an unassigned action
to add its default without changing your other bindings.

Press **Focus Positions** to open the Positions activity tab and focus its first
available Close control. Use Tab and Shift+Tab to move through the position
actions and rows. **Manage Focused Position TP/SL** and **Close Focused
Position** only act on the position whose action group currently has keyboard
focus. The close dialog supports both full and partial sizes.

Press **Focus Open Orders** to open the Open Orders activity tab and focus its
first available Cancel control. Use Tab and Shift+Tab to choose another order.
**Cancel Focused Order** only acts on the order whose actions currently have
keyboard focus. If no matching position or order has focus, a contextual
shortcut does nothing rather than choosing a row for you.

Shortcuts do not run while you are typing in an input, select, text area,
contenteditable field, or equivalent accessible editing control. Holding a key
does not repeat an action. Submit, Cancel All, and Close All still use the same
review dialogs, risk checks, and disabled states as their on-screen buttons.
For Cancel All and Close All, the configured shortcut only opens the review
dialog. The Confirm button receives focus and displays an Enter hint; press
Enter as a separate second step to accept the bulk action. The order-size
shortcut focuses and selects the Size field, so typing replaces its current
value.

## Execution Protection

### Max Market Slippage Setting

Set the maximum adverse fill movement accepted for ordinary market orders and
individual position closes. The server enforces the saved value. A tighter
limit can reject more orders in fast or thin markets; a wider limit accepts more
price movement.

**Close All** retains its own protective exit limit so the platform can preserve
the emergency close behavior.

### Leverage caps

Set separate caps for non-Forex and Forex markets. A cap limits the leverage
available in your order ticket; it cannot raise leverage above a market's own
maximum. Leave the field blank to use the selected market's maximum.

### Warn Without Stop Loss Setting

Turn this on to request confirmation when an order can increase exposure without
an attached Stop Loss. The prompt is a warning, not a rule: confirming can still
submit the order.

### Resize TP/SL With Position Setting

This setting is on by default. When you add to a position, your resting Take
Profit and Stop Loss orders on it grow so they cover the same share of the new
size. A stop loss that covered your whole position still covers your whole
position; two take profits that each covered half still each cover half.

For example, a 0.5 BTC stop loss on a 1 BTC long becomes a 0.75 BTC stop loss
after you add 0.5 BTC. Sizes round down to the market's size step, so the exits
never cover more than you hold.

If the order that adds to the position carries its own Take Profit or Stop
Loss, that exit already covers the full result, so your existing exits of that
kind are not resized. An exit that is executing at that moment is not resized.
Turn this off to keep existing TP/SL sizes unchanged when you add to a position.

## Trade Confirmations

**Confirm New Orders** has three options:

| Option | Behavior |
| - | - |
| Never | Submit without an additional review dialog. |
| Market Orders | Review orders that execute at market before submitting, including immediate market, scheduled, stop/take-market, and conditional orders. |
| All Orders | Review every supported new order beforehand. |

While the review is open, its estimates such as size, Take Profit, and Stop
Loss follow the current price, so market movement alone never resets it. If
the order itself changes, for example its leverage or the open orders it would
replace, the confirm button reads **Refresh Review**. Select it to accept the
updated details, then confirm. **Back** closes the review so you can edit the
order.

This choice does not apply to
[Reverse Position](/guides/trading-guide#reverse-a-position) or One-Click
Trading. Reversals follow **Confirm Reverse Position** below, and One-Click
Trading never shows a review.

**Confirm TP/SL Chart Drags** asks before a chart drag places or moves a Take
Profit or Stop Loss order. It is off by default, so releasing a drag applies the
change immediately. Turn it on if you want to review each change before it is
submitted.

**Warn Near-Market TP/SL** is on by default. It asks for review when you drag
an existing position's Take Profit or Stop Loss within 0.1% of the current
market price, where it may trigger almost immediately. It also applies to
TP/SL drafts for market entries, but not to exits attached to an unfilled
limit entry. Turn it off to skip this near-price warning. Your choice syncs
across devices. **Confirm TP/SL Chart Drags** still asks for review on every
drag when enabled. Disabling the warning does not change valid-price checks
or how orders execute.

When you release a chart drag, the order line stays at the new price. A small
loading icon shows while the update is being confirmed. If chart confirmations
are enabled, the icon appears after you confirm. It disappears when the update
is applied; queued moves keep it until processing finishes. If the update fails,
the chart restores the confirmed price or removes an unsuccessful new TP/SL.
This confirms the order update, not a trade fill. Fills appear separately on the
chart when the order executes.

**One-Click Chart Close** changes the X next to the PnL on the chart's position
line. It is off by default, so clicking the X opens the close dialog where you
choose the size and order type. Turn it on to close the whole position with a
market order as soon as you click the X. The close uses your saved
[Max Market Slippage](#max-market-slippage-setting) and skips the close dialog
and the **Confirm New Orders** review. If a current price is not available at
that moment, the close dialog opens instead so nothing is sent without a price.
The close button in the Positions tab still opens the close dialog.

For a market close, the dialog's **Est. Price** and **Net PnL** use the current
best bid (closing a long) or best ask (closing a short), which is the price a
market close fills at before slippage. That price can differ from the mark
price shown in the Positions tab, especially when an index or equity market's
underlying exchange is closed.

## Position Action Buttons

Under **Settings > Trading > Position Buttons**, turn each optional button on
or off to choose what appears directly beside a position: Share PnL Card,
Margin, Breakeven, and Reverse. On means shown in the position row or phone
card; off moves the action into **More**. Close and TP/SL always stay visible.

You can also change the same choices from **More > Show in Row** on a
position. Both controls stay in sync, and your choices are saved across devices.
Share, Breakeven, and Reverse are shown by default; Margin starts in More and
is available only for isolated positions. The **Show Reverse Position** setting
still controls whether Reverse is available at all.

**Breakeven** opens the TP/SL dialog with a full-position, market-executed Stop
Loss prepared for review. The price includes paid fees, estimated closing
fees, funding, and realized partial-close PnL, regardless of your PnL display
preferences. A temporary Fee Holiday is not assumed to remain active when
the stop triggers. Saving replaces existing stop losses and preserves Take
Profit orders. The action is unavailable until a current market price places
the break-even stop on the valid side of the market. Slippage, later fees,
and funding can still change the final result.

**Show Reverse Position** controls whether the
[Reverse Position](/guides/trading-guide#reverse-a-position) button appears. It
is on by default. Turn it off to remove the button from the chart's position
line, the Positions tab, and the position cards on a phone, so you cannot
reverse a position by mistake. Your positions and orders are not affected, and
you can still flip a position with an opposite order larger than it.

**Confirm Reverse Position** opens a review before a reversal is sent. It is on
by default, separate from **Confirm New Orders**. Turn it off to reverse a
position as soon as you click Reverse. The review still opens if a current
price is not available, or if you lead a copy trading group so you can see each
follower's result. This option is unavailable while Show Reverse Position is
off.

### One-Click Trading

**One-Click Trading** shows a small window with **Sell**, **Buy**, and
**Flat** on the trade page. Optional percent buttons are turned on from the
gear in the window itself; see
[One-Click Trading](/guides/trading-guide#one-click-trading). It is on by default. Buy and Sell send a market
order the moment you tap, with no review step, even if **Confirm New Orders**
asks you to review orders placed from the order ticket. Turn the switch off to
remove the window and its button.

> [!WARNING]
>
> One-Click orders are sent immediately. Fills can differ from the price shown
> when the market moves fast. Challenge rules, exposure limits, and order
> validation still apply.

**Show Flat Button** appears while One-Click Trading is on and is on by
default. Flat closes your whole position in that market and cancels the
market's open orders in one tap. Turn it off to hide Flat from the window.

**One-Click Trading by Market** lists the markets that have their own One-Click
settings. For each market you can change:

| Setting | Options |
| - | - |
| One-Click Size and Size Unit | USD, the asset, or Minis and Micros on supported index and commodity markets |
| One-Click Stop Loss / Take Profit | Leave empty for none, or enter an amount above 0 |
| Stop Loss and Take Profit Unit | Points, %, or USD |

Valid field edits save when you leave the field or press Enter. Stop Loss and
Take Profit unit changes save immediately and clear the previous distances.
Changes sync with open One-Click windows and remain saved after a refresh.
Removing a market restores its defaults in open windows too.

Markets are added here when you change the size in the One-Click window. Other
markets start from your Quick Size amount and your
**TP/SL Preset** under [Order Defaults](#order-defaults). You can save One-Click settings for up to 50
markets. See [One-Click Trading](/guides/trading-guide#one-click-trading) in
the Trading Guide for how the window works.

## Trade Notifications

Choose whether the app shows notifications for market-order fills, resting
limit/stop fills, Take Profit fills, Stop Loss fills, order changes, and TP/SL
changes. These are visual notifications. Configure audio separately under
[Notifications settings](/settings/notifications).

Fills that settle while your notification preferences are still loading are
announced as soon as loading finishes, even when newer fills have arrived in
the meantime. Notifications are a convenience, not an execution record: confirm
fill history on the trade page when precision matters.

For workflow examples, read the [Trading Guide](/guides/trading-guide).

## Market Change

**% Change Period** chooses what a market's percentage change measures:

| Option | Compares the current price with |
| - | - |
| **Rolling 24h** (default) | The price 24 hours ago. The window moves continuously. |
| **Daily open** | The price at 00:00 in the UTC offset you pick, from UTC-12 to UTC+14. The change resets once a day at that time. |

For example, with **Daily open** at UTC+8, the change resets at 16:00 UTC, and
the column reads **UTC+8** instead of **24h**.

The choice applies to the change column, its sorting, and the gainers and
losers filters on the [Markets](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/markets) page,
the market search on the trade page, the change next to the price in the trade
header, and the trending pairs strip, which also ranks markets by that change.
The 1h and 7d columns, the Markets overview cards, and the charts are not
affected; chart daily candles stay on UTC days.

Signed-in traders can also change it from the selector beside the market list
filters on the Markets page. Your choice syncs across devices.

Daily opens come from periodic price captures taken on the hour. A market listed
after the day started, or one without a capture at that time, shows `-` in
Daily open mode until the next day starts. Only whole-hour offsets are
available, so zones such as UTC+5:30 are not offered.

## Browser Tab

**Show Price in Tab** is on by default. While a trade page is open, its browser
tab title starts with the market's live price, for example
`84,605.5 | BTC Perpetual Futures | MyFundedPerps`. You can follow the price
from another tab without switching back. The title shows the same mark price
as the market header above the chart.

Turn the switch off to show only the market name in the tab title. Your choice
syncs across devices when signed in.

## Trader Lockout

Use **Trader Lockout** in Trading settings to take a voluntary break. You can
also open it from your profile menu in the top-right corner without leaving the
page you are on, including the trade page. Choose
**Current Account**, **Selected Accounts**, or **All Accounts**, then select
15 or 30 minutes, 1, 2, 4, 8, 12, or 24 hours, **Until Tomorrow**, or a
**Custom Date/Time**. Until Tomorrow means the next midnight in US Eastern
Time. Custom times and the exact unlock time are shown in Eastern Time.
Only active accounts can be locked. If your current account is not active,
choose Selected Accounts or All Accounts instead. All Accounts lists every
active account it will lock and applies to your existing active accounts at
confirmation.

Each account in the list shows how many positions and orders it has open, or
**No Open Trades**. By default, Trader Lockout closes everything first: open
positions close at market and working orders and TWAP orders are canceled
before the lockout starts. The confirmation lists every position and order that
will close on each account. If any of them cannot be closed, trading is not
locked, and you can review the remaining trades and try again.

To lock without closing anything, check **Keep Trades Open**. This option only
appears when a selected account has open trades. With it checked, existing
positions, working orders, and accepted schedules remain active. Existing entry
orders can fill, and stop-loss and take-profit orders can execute normally.

Review the accounts and exact unlock time, check the acknowledgment, and select
**Close Trades and Lock**, or **Lock Trading** when nothing will close.

> [!WARNING]
>
> Until expiry, you cannot place, modify, cancel, or manually close trades on
> the selected accounts. If you keep trades open, positions remain exposed to
> losses, and normal liquidation and account-loss rules still apply. Set your
> protective exits before confirming. You and Support cannot remove the lockout
> early.

The restriction applies to new manual, chart, keyboard, API, bot, and copy
trading requests. A locked follower cannot receive new copied orders. A locked
lead cannot submit new trades. Orders and schedules accepted before locking
continue to execute, including pending fills and protective exits. Other
accounts remain available unless you selected them.

**Trading Locked** shows a countdown and the exact unlock time. While your
current account is locked, the **Trader Lockout** item in your profile menu
also shows the time remaining. Trading becomes
available automatically at expiry. A lockout is not an account breach and does
not change evaluation or funded status, payout eligibility, trading-day rules,
or inactivity rules. Existing inactivity clocks continue running.

API order rejections use `account_trader_lockout_active`. The error details
include `expiresAt`, the unlock timestamp in Unix milliseconds.


# Account trading policy
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/trading-policy

Inspect effective rules, restrictions, and account locks before submitting API orders.

## Inspect policy before trading

Call `GET /v1/accounts/{account_id}/trading-policy` using a read or trade credential.
Only owned, non-archived accounts in the credential's live or sandbox environment
and account allowlist are visible. Other account IDs return `404`.

The response's `data` contains a timestamped, advisory snapshot:

| Field | Meaning |
| - | - |
| `manual_trading_blocked` | The account is inactive, a payout is pending, or copying locks manual instructions, including reductions. |
| `opening_exposure_restricted` | An account-wide condition prevents opening or increasing exposure. A false value does not guarantee an order will pass. |
| `restriction` | The user's reduce-only restriction, public reason, and flag time, or null. |
| `trading_halt` | Platform-wide opening halt and halted market categories. Category halts must be checked against the chosen market. |
| `competition` | Competition window, elimination, or ended-entry (disqualified) restriction and symbol/coin allowlist, or null. An empty allowlist allows all markets. |
| `copy_scope_blocked` | An enabled group led by this account has a member outside the credential's ownership, live/sandbox, archive, or account-allowlist boundary. |
| `copy_follower_locked` | An enabled copy group or outstanding lead-stop cleanup locks manual trading. |
| `copy_stop` | Stop reason and stop, cleanup-completion, and acknowledgment timestamps. Unset timestamps are null. |
| `account_rules` | Effective rule IDs and parameters, resolved from defaults, global policy, current plan and evaluation step, and supported account overrides. |
| `limits` | Current platform configuration, including cooldown, trade windows, position and resting-order limits, minimum notional and risk parameters. `execution_delay_min_ms` and `execution_delay_max_ms` are deprecated and always `0` because orders have no execution delay. They will be removed on or after December 31, 2026; do not depend on them. |
| `unlimited_trade_count_threshold` | Trade-window values at or above this threshold disable that count window; they are not a remaining allowance. |
| `slippage_tolerance_bps` | Minimum and maximum accepted slippage tolerance. |
| `maximum_total_notional_usd` | Configured total exposure ceiling for the account model and size, or null when absent. |
| `fee_exempt` | Whether this account has the platform's fee exemption. |

The `limits` object uses snake\_case keys such as `max_open_positions`,
`max_position_value_usd`, `max_resting_orders`, `min_order_notional_usd`,
`order_cooldown_ms`, and `trades_per_minute`.

Trade windows count every order that fills or triggers. A reduce-only order,
such as a take profit or stop loss, is never rejected by a full trade window
when it triggers, so your exits still execute; it still counts toward the
window for your next orders.

Current plan rules replace retired account snapshots for daily loss, drawdown,
consistency, and profit target. Minimum-trading-day account overrides are retired.
Use returned values instead of copying plan numbers into your integration.
A zero percentage disables that rule. The `evaluation-inactivity` (30 days)
and `funded-inactivity` (7 days) windows are universal product rules pinned in
code; they are reported for every account except rule-less competition
products and cannot be changed by plan or account.

## Market exposure caps

Competition accounts use a separate per-user allowance from other accounts.
Matching competition accounts share their own cap for each market, product,
and size. Both allowances use the configured cap independently, and competition
orders remain subject to exposure rejection. This applies equally to API and
website orders.

An October Competition account on the Blitz or Whale path has its market leverage
ceilings and exposure caps scaled by 4x or 0.5x. Scaled leverage rounds down
and never drops below 1x. Orders above the scaled limits are rejected the same
way as orders above the standard limits; see
[October competition](/guides/october-competition#choose-your-path).

An Elite account trades NAS100 and SP500 at up to 40x, US30 at up to 25x, gold
at up to 20x, and oil at up to 10x, and caps each group's combined open
notional at that multiple of its starting balance. Market listings still report each market's standard
`maxLeverage`. API and website orders above an Elite limit are rejected with
`invalid_leverage` or `max_total_notional`; see
[Elite Accounts](/guides/elite-accounts#leverage-and-exposure).

Gold trades on XAU, which counts as gold for these Elite limits. The previous
GOLD market is retiring: it is reduce-only, so its market reports
`trading_enabled: false` and an order that would open, add to, or flip a
position is rejected with `market_unavailable`. Reduce-only orders, closes,
and Take Profit and Stop Loss exits on existing GOLD positions keep working;
see [Retiring markets](/guides/trading-guide#retiring-markets).

EUR/USD and USD/JPY trade on Veranta. The previous `hyperliquid` EUR/USD and
USD/JPY markets are retiring the same way: they report
`trading_enabled: false`, an order that would open, add to, or flip a position
there is rejected with `market_unavailable`, and reduce-only orders, closes,
and Take Profit and Stop Loss exits on existing positions keep working.

Forex and index markets on the Veranta and Ostium venues follow their venue's
trading sessions. While a market is closed, a market order or close
is rejected with `market_closed`. Limit, Take Profit, and Stop Loss orders can
still be placed, edited, and canceled; they stay open and can fill at the
reopening price. See
[Trading hours](/guides/trading-guide#trading-hours).

From 15 minutes before a session market's scheduled weekend close until it
reopens, every open position on it is closed automatically and an order that
would open, add to, or flip a position is rejected with `weekend_closure`.
Resting entry orders on the market are canceled with cancel reason
`venue_policy`, and the closed positions report close reason `system`. See
[Weekend auto-close](/guides/trading-guide#weekend-auto-close).

A market's exposure cap limits combined open notional (long plus short) across
accounts of the same challenge model and account size. Each Elite account
instead has its own cap for each market, counting only that account's
position. The server includes existing exposure and rejects a fill that would
exceed the configured cap. Closing or reducing positions remains allowed.

An existing position keeps its enrolled exposure group through additions,
reductions, and reversals, even if challenge offerings change. A new position
after fully closing uses the current product grouping. This applies equally to
API and website orders; see [Asset Exposure Limits](/guides/asset-exposure-limits).

Exposure-cap enforcement defaults to enabled for newly added markets. A
numerical cap must still be configured; enabling the switch alone does not set
a dollar limit. Check the [current market caps](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/exposure-caps)
for the applicable limits, and choose your product and account size there to
see the exact cap and maximum leverage that apply to your account.

## Treat preflight as advisory

Fetch policy when selecting an account and refresh after a relevant rejection or
configuration change. Do not poll this endpoint once per second: it consumes the
shared [REST read budget](/errors-and-rate-limits).

A true `copy_scope_blocked` means the credential cannot cover the configured
copy group as a whole. Use a credential authorized for every member in the same
environment, or change the group through the website. A false value does not
cover stale working copied orders left by earlier configurations: modification
and cancellation check those affected accounts again at execution.

The snapshot does not reserve margin, position slots, order slots, trade-window
allowances, or market liquidity. It does not evaluate a proposed order or fetch
fresh prices. Check market metadata and an appropriate quote for market-specific
constraints. Placement and settlement remain authoritative for current balances,
rate-window usage, cooldown, market hours, competition markets, and all other
order-dependent rules. Account evaluation rules can also depend on stage and
fresh equity. The saved slippage-protection maximum is enforced server-side and included here.
Other saved interface preferences, such as display defaults, are not an order policy.


# Trading with the API
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/trading-with-api

Place and manage every order type available in the trading terminal.

The REST API uses the same order books, trading rules, fees, margin checks, and
paper execution engine as the trading terminal. Every create request requires
an `Idempotency-Key` header. Standard orders and position closes may also carry
a caller-assigned `client_order_id` for durable reconciliation.

Close notifications in the trading terminal also cover orders placed through
the API. A full close reports the whole trade's settled net PnL, including
entry and exit fees, earlier partial closes, and swap payments. Partial-close
notifications distinguish a closed portion from a legacy fill-only result.
See [PnL Display](/settings/trading#pnl-display) for the calculation scopes.
Order history continues to report each fill's own realized PnL and fee.

## Exposure caps

API orders share the same per-user market exposure allowance as orders placed
in the terminal. Your own accounts of the same product and size share one cap
for each market; other users have separate allowances. Elite accounts are the
exception: each Elite account has its own cap for each market, counting only
that account's position. Long and short notional
add together. An opening fill that would exceed the cap is rejected with
`exposure_cap`, without resizing. Reductions and closes remain allowed, and
freed capacity becomes available at the next refresh, approximately 10 seconds
later. See [Asset Exposure Limits](/guides/asset-exposure-limits).

## Standard and advanced orders

Send orders to `POST /v1/orders`. If `type` is omitted, the request is treated
as a market order for compatibility with existing clients.

| `type` | Required price fields | Important options |
| - | - | - |
| `market` | `expected_price` | `slippage_tolerance_bps`, attached TP/SL |
| `limit` | `limit_price` | attached TP/SL, IOC, FOK, or GTD time in force |
| `chase` | `chase_offset` | optional `chase_cap_price` |
| `stop_market` | `trigger_price` | attached TP/SL, or reduce-only protection |
| `stop_limit` | `trigger_price`, `limit_price` | opening conditional order, attached TP/SL |
| `take_market` | `trigger_price` | opening conditional order, attached TP/SL |
| `take_limit` | `trigger_price`, `limit_price` | opening conditional order, attached TP/SL |
| `take_profit` | `trigger_price`, `reduce_only: true` | position protection |
| `conditional` | `trigger_price`, `trigger_market_id`, `trigger_direction` | observe one market and execute on another |

The server resolves provider, symbol, and venue coin from `market_id`. Do not
send those fields. `expected_price` records what your client observed, but it
never controls the execution price, margin calculation, or slippage reference.

Some instruments are listed on more than one venue. `GET /v1/markets` returns
each instrument's default venue; `GET /v1/markets?venues=all` also returns its
alternate venues, with `default_venue: false`. Trade an alternate venue by
sending its `market_id`, the same choice the trade page's venue switcher
offers. An account holds an instrument on one venue at a time: an order that
would open on a second venue while a position is open on another is rejected
with `venue_conflict`. Close the existing position first. TWAP and scaled
orders use the default venue.

FX markets trade on `veranta`. Use their current `market_id` values from
`GET /v1/markets`. The previous `hyperliquid` EUR/USD and USD/JPY markets are
retiring: they accept only orders that reduce or close existing positions
there. The historical `fpx` and `lighter` providers are retired and have no
markets available for new trades.

Before placing a market order, request
`GET /v1/markets/{market_id}/quote?side=buy&size=...` to estimate the fill. A
size-aware quote returns the projected fill price (top-of-book bounded by the
mark-based slippage cap), the maximum adverse slippage tier in basis points
(`slippage_bps`), notional,
fee, and whether the requested size is valid at the market's precision. The
eventual order still executes against newer authoritative market data, so
treat the quote as an estimate rather than a reserved price. The fee rate follows the market's asset category, regardless of its
source venue or venue ticker format. The quote is not tied to an account, so
its fee uses the standard rate; an
[Elite account](/guides/elite-accounts#fees) is charged its reduced rate when
the order fills, and an account with the
[Reduced Fees](/guides/commissions-and-fees#reduced-fees) add-on (paid or
added free during the launch week) is charged half the quoted fee. Accounts
without the add-on pay the standard fee. The fee and slippage schedules are published in the
[Trading Guide](/guides/trading-guide#how-market-orders-fill).

Forex on Veranta, and NAS100, SP500, and US30 on Ostium, quote and fill at the
venue's ask for buys or bid for sells, moved against you by a slippage charge
that grows with order notional. There is no cap from the mark. On these
markets `slippage_bps` is that charge; see
[Veranta and Ostium fills](/guides/trading-guide#veranta-and-ostium-fills).

Forex markets on other venues quote and fill like every other Hyperliquid
market: top-of-book bounded by the mark-based slippage cap, with the forex
slippage tier as the cap. The quote's `reference_price`, `reference_kind`, and `reference_time`
identify its execution reference. An estimate does not reserve a price.

## Conditional trigger policy

New TP/SL and other conditional orders use Last Price on Binance, Bybit and
Hyperliquid. This is selected by the server; no new request parameter is
required. An external condition follows its trigger
market's source, while execution uses its order market's book.

Existing orders keep their original trigger policy when their price or size is
modified. Canceling and replacing an order adopts the current policy. Copied
orders, partial fills and attached TP/SL inherit the originating order's policy,
including when they are created after this update. A trigger does not guarantee
its fill price. See [TP/SL behavior](/guides/trading-guide#add-take-profit-and-stop-loss-orders).

Eligible protective stop-market and take-profit market orders can fill from the
first recorded bid or ask at or after their touch. The accepted price stays fixed
during processing. When the touch spread is wider than the slippage cap, the
order fills at the touch bid (sell) or ask (buy), which can be further from the
touch midpoint than the cap; see
[How triggered Stop Loss and Take Profit exits fill](/guides/trading-guide#how-triggered-stop-loss-and-take-profit-exits-fill).
Recent order or position changes, unavailable quote history, or a touch price
beyond the order's slippage tolerance retain ordinary current-quote execution. Fees,
funding charges, loss limits, and liquidation rules still apply.

This first recorded quote can be up to one second after the touch on Hyperliquid
and up to half a second on Binance and Bybit. If the gap in quote history exceeds
the venue's limit, the order uses ordinary current-quote execution.

## Limit order example

```bash theme={null}
curl https://developers.myfundedperpetuals.com/v1/orders \
  -X POST \
  -H "Authorization: Bearer $FP_API_KEY" \
  -H "Content-Type: application/json" \
  -H "Idempotency-Key: $(uuidgen)" \
  -d '{
    "client_order_id": "strategy-7:entry-42",
    "type": "limit",
    "account_id": "YOUR_ACCOUNT_ID",
    "market_id": "binance|BTCUSDT",
    "side": "buy",
    "size": 0.001,
    "limit_price": 115000,
    "leverage": 2,
    "margin_mode": "cross",
    "take_profit_price": 120000,
    "stop_loss_price": 112000
  }'
```

For a GTD limit, set `time_in_force` to `gtd` and provide
`gtd_expires_at` as a Unix timestamp in milliseconds. IOC and FOK limits use
`time_in_force` without an expiry.

When an order with `take_profit_price` or `stop_loss_price` adds to a position
you already hold, each attached exit is sized to the full resulting position.
Exits that already protect that position overlap it, and the fill is rejected
with `rule_violation` and rule `exit-allocation` unless the request sets
`replace_overlapping_exits` to `true`. With that flag, the fill cancels the
overlapping resting exits in the same group (stop losses for a stop loss, take
profits for a take profit) and places the new full-size exit in the same
transaction. Exits that are currently executing are never replaced; the fill
is still rejected until they settle. See
[Add Take Profit and Stop Loss Orders](/guides/trading-guide#add-take-profit-and-stop-loss-orders).

A limit placed at or through the current market (a buy at or above the best
ask, a sell at or below the best bid) does not rest. It fills right away as a
standard market order, at the best opposing price under the mark-based slippage
cap and never worse than `limit_price`. The server rejects such an order unless
the request sets `marketable_limit_acknowledged` to `true`. A limit that rests
fills its whole size at exactly `limit_price` after two consecutive crossing
book checks. If the confirming check misses, the order stays open. Its first
miss can retry sooner; repeated misses wait longer between attempts. Where
faster confirmation is enabled, a fresh book showing the market strictly
beyond the resting limit can fill it immediately at `limit_price`. If that
book is too old, the order uses the usual confirmation checks. Exact touches
can start confirmation immediately after triggering, but still require a
newer crossing book. An interrupted attempt can return to waiting and retry;
an earlier touch alone does not authorize a fill. See
[How limit orders fill](/guides/trading-guide#how-limit-orders-fill).

## Manage working orders

Use `GET /v1/orders?account_id=...&status=working` for the complete bounded set
of pending and resting orders. This view is safer for reconciliation than
searching recent history.

At an hourly swap boundary, ready charges are applied before order settlement
and its balance and margin checks, without waiting for the scheduled hourly
processing window. Incomplete charge data can keep the order pending while it
is recovered. This also applies to reduce-only closes: closing after a boundary
does not remove the charge for exposure held at that boundary. See
[Commissions and Fees](/guides/commissions-and-fees#hourly-swap-fees).

For an enabled copy group, copied market orders stay pending until the lead
market order fills. If the lead rejects or expires without filling, its pending
market copies are canceled without opening follower positions or charging
trading fees. Resting limit and trigger copies, including attached TP/SL,
execute independently on each account. Copies open on the same venue as the
lead order, including an alternate venue you chose for the market, and a
trading halt blocks new follower exposure even while a copy is in flight. A
copy uses the `leverage` you send, lowered to the follower's own maximum for
that market when needed, and keeps the margin mode of any position the
follower already holds in that market. See
[Copy Trading](/guides/copy-trading-guide#market-order-execution).

Use `GET /v1/orders?client_order_id=...` to resolve your caller-assigned order
identity when the placement response or server `id` is unavailable. This lookup
survives API key rotation and returns the normal order-page shape with zero or
one result.

If the server cannot prove the snapshot is complete inside the active-order
bound, it returns `503` with `Retry-After` instead of returning truncated data.

* `PATCH /v1/orders/{order_id}` changes price and optionally size.
* `PUT /v1/orders/{order_id}/attached-exits` sets or removes TP/SL attached to
  a resting limit, `stop_market`, `stop_limit`, `take_market`, or `take_limit`
  entry. Send `null` to remove a leg.
* `DELETE /v1/orders/{order_id}` cancels a working order or queues cancellation
  when execution already owns the row.

To cancel the complete ordinary-order snapshot for an account, send
`POST /v1/accounts/{account_id}/cancel-all-orders` with an `Idempotency-Key`.
It includes resting orders and armed trigger orders. An in-flight market order
can still settle, and active TWAP, VWAP, or scaled parents must be canceled
through their own endpoints. Each request advances at most five source orders,
with every source cancellation isolated in its own transaction. A `202`
response includes progress and `Retry-After`; repeat the same request until the
operation reports `completed`.

Chase orders cannot be modified. Cancel the chase and place a replacement with
new offset or cap settings.

## Close and protect positions

`POST /v1/positions/{position_id}/close` derives the closing side, leverage,
margin mode, and reduce-only flag from the current position. It supports market,
limit, and external conditional closes. Omit `size` for a full close. Provide
`client_order_id` to reconcile the resulting close order in the same way as a
standard order.

To flatten one account, send
`POST /v1/accounts/{account_id}/close-all-positions` with an
`Idempotency-Key`. The server snapshots at most 100 open positions and submits
one reduce-only market close per target, paced through the account's order
cooldown. These closes use the trading terminal's 2.5% maximum-slippage policy.
Each request advances one position and never sleeps through the account
cooldown inside the HTTP action. A `202` response includes current progress and
`Retry-After`; repeat the same request until the operation reports `completed`.
The final result contains the submitted order or rejection for every
snapshotted position.

Both account-wide endpoints persist their original target snapshot. A retry
with the same idempotency key resumes unfinished targets or returns the
completed result, even if the account state has changed. A concurrent retry
returns `409 operation_in_progress` with `Retry-After`; wait and retry with the
same key. A different account or action cannot reuse that key.

Use `PUT /v1/positions/{position_id}/exit-orders` to atomically place, modify,
and cancel multiple TP/SL levels. The request includes the position size and
current exit-order snapshot you observed. A concurrent position or order change
returns `409`, so fetch fresh state and rebuild the operation.

New TP and SL operations can reference each other by operation index to form an
OCO pair. A fill retires the same quantity from the paired leg: a smaller leg's
fill shrinks the larger leg, and a fill that covers the paired leg cancels it.
Manually canceling one leg leaves the other leg active and unlinked.

When a fill adds to a position, resting TP/SL orders on it grow to cover the
same share of the new size, rounded down to the market's size step. This
follows the account owner's **Resize TP/SL With Position** Trading setting,
which is on by default. A group is not resized when the adding order carries
its own attached exit for it. After an add, read the updated sizes from the
working-order snapshot before you build an `expected_orders` list.

For an isolated position, `PUT /v1/positions/{position_id}/isolated-margin`
sets the desired total `extra_margin`. Repeating the same target is safe. A
reduction uses a fresh authoritative book and rejects when it would create
unsafe liquidation risk.

### TP/SL batch example

For a long position of size `0.01` with no existing protective exits, this
request creates a paired market TP and SL. Replace the prices with valid
levels above and below the current market respectively.

```json theme={null}
{
  "expected_position_size": 0.01,
  "expected_orders": [],
  "operations": [
    {
      "kind": "place",
      "group": "tp",
      "execution_type": "market",
      "price": 120000,
      "size": 0.01,
      "oco_pair_with_operation_index": 1
    },
    {
      "kind": "place",
      "group": "sl",
      "execution_type": "market",
      "price": 110000,
      "size": 0.01,
      "oco_pair_with_operation_index": 0
    }
  ]
}
```

Send this body to `PUT /v1/positions/{position_id}/exit-orders`. For MCP, call
`replace-position-exit-orders` with the same fields plus `position_id`.
If protective exits already exist, populate `expected_orders` from the current
working-order snapshot with each exit's `order_id`, `execution_type`, `price`,
and `size`. Do not send an empty snapshot for an already-protected position.
Use `execution_type: "limit"` for price-capped protective exits through this
batch endpoint; the ordinary create-order endpoint rejects reduce-only
`stop_limit` and `take_limit` requests.

## TWAP and VWAP

Create both strategies with `POST /v1/twap-orders`. Set `strategy` to `twap`
or `vwap`, then provide the duration, slice interval, and optional randomized
timing. Optional trigger and termination prices use the same behavior as the
terminal.

The slice interval must be a whole number from 30 seconds through the smaller
of 12 hours or half the selected duration. Every schedule therefore has at
least two slices.

Read active schedules with `GET /v1/twap-orders?account_id=...`, inspect one
parent with `GET /v1/twap-orders/{id}`, and stop future slices with `DELETE` on
that resource. An in-flight child may still settle after cancellation begins.
Retain the parent ID returned at creation to inspect that schedule directly
throughout its lifecycle.

## Scaled orders

Create a ladder with `POST /v1/scaled-orders`. Provide a start price, end
price, 2 to 10 rungs, and a `flat`, `ascending`, or `descending` distribution.
Every rung is an ordinary limit order and independently follows the platform's
fill and trading rules.

`GET /v1/scaled-orders/{id}` returns every rung's price, size, child order ID,
and placement rejection when applicable. `DELETE` fences unplaced rungs and
cancels every working child.

## Price alerts

Price alerts are the same alerts you set on the trading chart. An alert
notifies you once when a market's mark price reaches your level. It never
places or changes an order.

Create one with `POST /v1/price-alerts`:

```bash theme={null}
curl -X POST https://developers.myfundedperpetuals.com/v1/price-alerts \
  -H "Authorization: Bearer $FP_API_KEY" \
  -H "Content-Type: application/json" \
  -d '{"market_id":"binance|BTCUSDT","price":120000,"note":"breakout"}'
```

* The server reads the current mark and sets `condition` for you: `above` when
  the level is above the mark, `below` when it is below.
* A fired alert appears in your notification center and sends a browser push
  if you turned on push notifications. Your
  [account stream](/account-streaming#price-alerts) also receives a
  `price_alert` event, so a bot can react without polling.
* Alerts belong to you, not to an account. Every API key you own, including
  read-only keys and keys limited to certain accounts, sees and manages the
  same alerts as the website.
* You can hold up to 25 armed alerts across the website and the API. Delete
  one or wait for one to fire before arming another.
* `PATCH /v1/price-alerts/{id}` moves an armed alert to a new `price` or
  `note`, choosing the direction again from the current mark.
* A triggered alert stays listed for 90 days. Re-arm it at the same price with
  `POST /v1/price-alerts/{id}/rearm`, or remove it with `DELETE`.

## Reconcile fills and closed positions

`GET /v1/fills?account_id=...` returns filled orders in settlement order with
fees, realized P\&L, notional, liquidity role, and partial-fill lineage. Use
`GET /v1/positions?account_id=...&status=closed` for cursor-paginated closed
position records.

Treat all cursors as opaque. Order and strategy state can continue changing
after a response, so reconcile by resource ID until it reaches a terminal
status.

## Track evaluation progress

`GET /v1/accounts/{account_id}` returns a `risk` snapshot with equity, loss-limit room,
and the profit still needed to pass. An evaluation passes when equity,
including unrealized P\&L, reaches the profit target, so track
`risk.remaining_profit_equity`. When it reaches zero, the evaluation passes and
open positions are closed. `risk.remaining_profit` counts realized profit only
and can stay above zero while open profit already covers the target. Both are
null when the account has no profit target, and `remaining_profit_equity` is
also null when marks are incomplete.

## Copy groups and scheduled execution

Before submitting a lead order through the API, ensure the credential covers
the lead and every follower. The same boundary applies to modifications,
cancellations, and protective exits. A scope failure rejects the complete
native order operation, preserving the copy group's behavior rather than
silently dropping a follower. See [Authentication](/authentication).

Competition accounts cannot lead or follow in a copy group, because the
Competition Rules prohibit copying trades into or out of them.
`POST /v1/copy-trading` rejects an enabled group that includes one. A group
saved before this rule does not copy lead orders to or from a competition
account; disable it with `POST /v1/copy-trading/{config_id}/disable`.

Accepted TWAP/VWAP and scaled orders retain the environment and account scope
that authorized them. Revoking the key blocks new requests but does not revoke
that accepted schedule. Each later slice or rung checks the current copy group
against its retained scope. If the group now includes an inaccessible account,
TWAP/VWAP stops with `completion_reason: "api_account_scope_changed"`; scaled
orders reject the remaining unplaced rungs with that `reject_reason`. Previously
accepted child orders are not canceled, and filled positions are not closed.

Older API schedules created before scope was retained can recover their
boundary while the original key still exists. If that key has been deleted,
only the schedule's own account can be established: an enabled copy group
causes future slices or rungs to stop rather than assume broader access. Finish
or recreate an older copied schedule before deleting its original key.

## Reconcile conditional orders and scheduled history

Order responses expose `stop_triggered_at` once a conditional limit has entered
its limit leg. Before that timestamp exists, its trigger remains armed.
`triggered_at` records the latest execution attempt and may change on retry.
`cancel_requested_at` records cancellation intent while execution can still be
in flight: reconcile the final `status` because a fill can win that race.
`oco_sibling_order_id` identifies the paired exit. Fills retire matching size
from its sibling; canceling one leg explicitly unlinks the surviving leg.

Attached TP/SL orders are linked in both directions. Once an entry fills, its
`take_profit_order_id` and `stop_loss_order_id` name the exit orders the fill
created. Each of those exits carries `parent_order_id` (the entry) and
`bracket_role` (`take_profit` or `stop_loss`). When a later fill grows an
existing exit instead of creating a new one, that exit keeps its original
`parent_order_id`.

A canceled order carries `cancel_reason`:

| `cancel_reason` | Meaning |
| - | - |
| `user` | You canceled it, including a cancel requested while it was executing. |
| `oco` | Its paired TP or SL filled and retired the remaining size. |
| `reduce_only` | The position it protected closed, reversed, or became too small for it. |
| `replaced` | A new attached TP or SL took over the size it covered. |
| `liquidation` | A liquidation closed the position it protected. |
| `expired` | Its GTD time passed while it was executing. |
| `account_closed` | The account passed, failed, or closed. |
| `trading_restricted` | A trading restriction on your profile canceled opening orders. |
| `venue_policy` | The market stopped accepting new positions on this venue. |
| `copy` | A copy-trading lead order changed or ended, the copy stopped applying, or the account started following a lead. |

Treat unknown values as a generic cancellation: new reasons may be added.
Orders canceled before this field existed omit it. A closed position carries
`close_reason`: `user`, `take_profit`, `stop_loss`, `liquidation`, `reversal`,
or `system`.

A copied follower order that was still executing when its group stopped
because the lead account passed, failed, or closed is rejected with
`reject_reason` `copy_lead_stopped`; the follower's positions are then closed
by the copy-trading stop.

Every fill also records `position_side_after` (`long`, `short`, or `flat`) and
`position_size_after`, the account's position in that market immediately
after the fill. Fills from before these fields existed omit them.

`GET /v1/twap-orders?account_id=...` continues to return active TWAP and VWAP
parents. To discover terminal parents without retaining their IDs, request
`status=completed` or `status=canceled`. History is ordered by creation time,
newest first, within the selected status, and accepts `limit` (1 to 100,
default 50) and `cursor`. Follow `next_cursor` while `has_more` is true, keeping
`account_id` and `status` unchanged. Query both terminal statuses for a complete
history. The `strategy` field distinguishes TWAP from VWAP; `completion_reason`
explains why a completed schedule stopped. Pagination is not accepted for the
active listing.

## Live market data

Use [market data streaming](/market-streaming) for live prices, books, trades,
and candles. It is public and uses a dedicated WebSocket endpoint. For order,
fill, position, and balance changes on your own accounts, use
[account streaming](/account-streaming), an authenticated WebSocket that pushes
each change as it happens. REST remains available for snapshots and lookups.